advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of
402
![Printronix P7000 Printer User`s manual | Manualzz Printronix P7000 Printer User`s manual | Manualzz](http://s1.manualzz.com/store/data/002090537_1-08c2cd4cefb029ea9fc02f8930ab9f40-360x466.png)
P7000 User’s Manual READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THIS PRINTER Software License Agreement Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Remedies CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS BEFORE USING THIS PRINTER. USING THIS PRINTER INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS, PROMPTLY RETURN THE PRINTER AND ALL ACCOMPANYING HARDWARE AND WRITTEN MATERIALS TO THE PLACE YOU OBTAINED THEM, AND YOUR MONEY WILL BE REFUNDED. 1. THE PARTIES AGREE THAT ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE EXCLUDED. Printronix, Inc. does not warrant that the functions contained in the Software will meet your requirements or that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free. Printronix, Inc. reserves the right to make changes and/or improvements in the Software without notice at any time. 2. IN NO EVENT WILL PRINTRONIX, INC. BE LIABLE FOR LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTIONS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT, EVEN IF PRINTRONIX, INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE ABUSE OR MANIPULATION OF THE SOFTWARE. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 3. Printronix, Inc. will not be liable for any loss or damage caused by delay in furnishing a Software Product or any other performance under this Agreement. 4. Our entire liability and your exclusive remedies for our liability of any kind (including liability for negligence except liability for personal injury caused solely by our negligence) for the Software Product covered by this Agreement and all other performance or nonperformance by us under or related to this Agreement are limited to the remedies specified by this Agreement. 5. California law governs this Agreement. Definitions. “Software” shall mean the digitally encoded, machine-readable data and program. The term “Software Product” includes the Software resident in the printer and its documentation. The Software Product is licensed (not sold) to you, and Printronix, Inc. either owns or licenses from other vendors who own, all copyright, trade secret, patent and other proprietary rights in the Software Product. License. 1. 2. 3. Authorized Use. You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software resident in the printer solely for your own customary business or personal purposes. Restrictions. a. To protect the proprietary rights of Printronix, Inc., you agree to maintain the Software Product and other proprietary information concerning the typefaces in strict confidence. b. You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software Product. c. You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer all or any portion of the Software Product separate from the printer, without the prior written consent of Printronix, Inc. d. You may not modify or prepare derivative works of the Software Product. e. You may not transmit the Software Product over a network, by telephone, or electronically using any means; or reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the Software. f. You agree to keep confidential and use your best efforts to prevent and protect the contents of the Software Product from unauthorized disclosure or use. Transfer. You may transfer the Software Product with the printer, but only if the recipient agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement. Your license is automatically terminated if you transfer the Software Product and printer. Limited Software Product Warranty Printronix, Inc. warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with specifications published by Printronix, Inc. Printronix, Inc. does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions. Remedy Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Printronix, Inc. in connection with the Software is replacement of defective software with a copy of the same version and revision level. Termination of License Agreement This License shall continue until terminated. This license may be terminated by agreement between you and Printronix, Inc. or by Printronix, Inc. If you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not corrected within thirty (30) days after notice. When this License is terminated, you shall return to the place you obtained them, the printer and all copies of the Software and documentation. U.S. Government Restricted Rights Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 242.227-7013, subdivision (b) (3) (ii) or subparagraph (c) (1) (ii), as appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c) (2). Acknowledgement of Terms and Conditions YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT, UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. NEITHER PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY STATEMENT OR REPRESENTATION NOT CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT. NO CHANGE IN THIS AGREEMENT IS EFFECTIVE UNLESS WRITTEN AND SIGNED BY PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH PARTY. BY USING THIS PRINTER, YOU AGREE TO ACCEPT THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. User’s Manual The Printronix P7000 Series PSA3™ Printers This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright. No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, translated, or incorporated in any other material in any form or by any means, whether manual, graphic, electronic, mechanical, or otherwise, without the prior written consent of Printronix. Printronix makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding this material, including, but not limited to, implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Printronix shall not be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any damages, whether direct or indirect, incidental or consequential, in connection with the furnishing, distribution, performance, or use of this material. The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. COPYRIGHT 1997, 2005 PRINTRONIX, INC. Trademark Acknowledgements IBM, AS/400, and Proprinter are registered trademarks, and Intelligent Printer Data Stream and IPDS are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. Printronix, PGL, LinePrinter Plus, and IGP are registered trademarks, and P7005, P7010, P7015, P7205, P7210, P7215, P7220, and SureStak are trademarks of Printronix, Inc. ANSI is a registered trademark of the American National Standards Institute, Inc. Centronics is a registered trademark of Genicom Corporation. CSA is a registered certification mark of the Canadian Standards Association. Dataproducts is a registered trademark of Dataproducts Corporation. EIA is a registered service mark of the Electronic Industries Association. Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation. Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation. IEEE is a registered service mark of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. QMS is a registered trademark, and Code V is a trademark of Quality Micro Systems, Inc. TUV is a registered certification mark of TUV Rheinland of North America, Inc. UL is a registered certification mark of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. ENERGY STAR is a registered trademark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency. As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Printronix has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency. 5 Trademark Acknowledgements 6 Table of Contents 1 Introduction ............................................. 13 Printer Overview ..................................................................13 The P7000 Series PSA3 Printer....................................13 Integrated Print Management System...........................15 Graphics Enhancements...............................................17 Taking Care Of Your Printer..........................................17 Conventions In This Manual ................................................18 Warnings And Special Information ......................................18 Related Documents .............................................................19 Printronix Customer Support Center ...................................20 2 Setting Up The Printer ............................ 21 Before You Begin ................................................................21 Power Requirements ...........................................................21 Select A Site ........................................................................22 Printer Dimensions ..............................................................23 Printer Component Locations ..............................................26 3 Operating The Printer ............................. 27 Powering On The Printer .....................................................27 Operating Modes .................................................................27 The Control Panel................................................................28 Control Panel Keys .......................................................29 Operational Procedures.......................................................34 Reload Paper ................................................................34 Unload Paper ................................................................45 7 Table of Contents Integrated Print Management System .................................48 Lighter Or Darker Print ..................................................48 Changing Ribbons ........................................................49 Cancel A Print Job ........................................................52 4 The Configuration Menus........................ 53 Configuration Overview .......................................................53 Changing Parameter Settings .......................................54 Saving Parameter Settings ...........................................54 Default And Custom Configurations..............................55 Navigating The Menus ..................................................56 Changing Parameters Example ....................................57 Auto Save Configuration ...............................................60 Saving Your New Configuration ....................................61 Optimizing Print Quality.................................................68 Optimizing Print Speed .................................................69 Main Menu...........................................................................70 QUICK SETUP ....................................................................73 CONFIG. CONTROL ...........................................................82 HOST INTERFACE .............................................................85 Auto Switching Submenu ..............................................86 IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu.................88 Centronics (Parallel) Submenu .....................................91 Dataproducts (Standard) Submenu ..............................94 Serial Submenu ............................................................98 E-Net Adapter Submenu .............................................106 Ethernet Submenu ......................................................107 NETWORK SETUP MENU................................................108 ADAPTER ADDRESS.................................................109 ADAPTER PARAMS ...................................................110 ETHERNET ADDRESS ..............................................113 ETHERNET PARAMS.................................................115 WLAN ADDRESS .......................................................117 WLAN PARAMS..........................................................119 8 Table of Contents WLAN KERBEROS.....................................................121 WLAN LEAP................................................................123 ACTIVE (IGP) EMUL .........................................................125 IGP/PGL Emulation ...........................................................126 Features ......................................................................126 Configuring The Emulation With The Control Panel ...128 IGP/PGL Submenu .....................................................129 IGP/PGL Submenu (with PCL-II) ................................131 IGP/PGL Submenu (with LG)......................................132 IGP/VGL Emulation ...........................................................146 Features ......................................................................146 Configuring The Emulation With The Control Panel ...147 IGP/VGL Submenu .....................................................148 IGP/VGL Submenu (with PCL-II) ................................150 IGP/VGL Submenu (with LG)......................................152 EMULATION......................................................................166 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation .........................................167 Standard......................................................................167 Simple Prot Conv ........................................................168 Coax Emulation...........................................................169 Twinax Params ...........................................................180 3270 Params...............................................................187 5250 Params...............................................................196 SPC Coax Params ......................................................202 SPC Twx Params........................................................206 LinePrinter Plus Emulation ................................................209 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (with PCL-II) ...........................212 P-Series Emulation .....................................................219 P-Series Emulation (with PCL-II) ................................220 P-Series Emulation (with LG)......................................221 P-Series XQ Emulation ...............................................228 Serial Matrix Emulation ...............................................232 9 Table of Contents Proprinter XL Emulation ..............................................236 Epson FX Emulation ...................................................241 ANSI Emulation .................................................................248 IPDS Emulation .................................................................257 PCL - II Emulation .............................................................263 LG Emulation.....................................................................269 PRINTER CONTROL ........................................................276 ADVANCED USER............................................................281 DIAGNOSTICS..................................................................289 5 Interfaces .............................................. 293 Overview............................................................................293 Dataproducts Parallel Interface .........................................294 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals ......................295 Centronics Parallel Interface .............................................296 Centronics Parallel Interface Signals ..........................297 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface .............................................298 Compatibility Mode......................................................298 Nibble Mode ................................................................298 Byte Mode ...................................................................298 Signals ........................................................................299 Terminating Resistor Configurations...........................302 RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interfaces...............................304 RS-232 ........................................................................305 RS-422 ........................................................................306 6 Reprogramming The Security Key ........ 307 Reprogramming The Security Key ....................................307 How To Program The Security Key.............................307 10 Table of Contents 7 Troubleshooting .................................... 311 Cleaning Requirements .....................................................311 Exterior Cleaning.........................................................311 Interior Cleaning..........................................................312 Diagnosing Problems ........................................................314 Bar Code Verification ..................................................314 Printing A Hex Dump...................................................315 Fault Messages...........................................................316 A Printer Specifications............................ 345 Ribbon Specifications ........................................................345 Paper Specifications ..........................................................346 Printer Weight And Dimensions.........................................348 Environmental Characteristics ...........................................348 Electrical Characteristics ...................................................350 Interfaces...........................................................................351 Printing Rates ....................................................................351 B ASCII Character Set............................. 353 C Communication Notices ....................... 355 Notices...............................................................................355 Energy Star........................................................................358 Product Recycling and Disposal ........................................359 Communication Statements ..............................................360 Lithium Battery Warning ....................................................365 Software License Agreement ............................................366 11 Table of Contents 12 1 Introduction Printer Overview This chapter provides a general overview of your printer and the conventions used within this manual. The P7000 Series PSA3 Printer The Printronix® P7000 PSA3™ Printer consists of 500, 1000, 1500, lines per minute (lpm) cabinet and pedestal models and a 2000 lpm cabinet model. All printer models are packaged in various configurations that offer software versatility and the latest refinements in printing technology. The print mechanisms are housed in sound-insulated cabinets which make the printer among the quietest line matrix printers in the world. Additionally, your printer has a flexible architecture that allows you to add new features and emulations as they become available. LinePrinter Plus® is the standard emulation. LinePrinter Plus includes the Epson® FX-1050, Printronix P-Series, P-Series XQ, Serial Matrix and Proprinter® III XL emulations. Coax/Twinax, IPDSTM, ANSI®, LG, PCL2, IGP®/PGL®, and IGP/VGL graphics enhancement emulations are available as optional upgrades. No matter what emulation is installed, your printer is easy to use. The message display and lights on the control panel communicate with you directly and clearly. You can select every function on your printer at the control panel, or you can send commands from the host computer. 13 Chapter 1 Printer Overview The printer model numbers indicate printing speed and physical configuration. Model numbers beginning with P70 indicate pedestal models. Model numbers beginning with P72 indicate cabinet models. The final two digits in the model number refer to the printer’s maximum speed in lines per minute (lpm): 05 for 500 lpm, 10 for 1000 lpm, 15 for 1500 lpm, and 20 for 2000 lpm. Refer to the following table for a complete listing of model numbers and options. Table 1. The Printronix P7000 Printers Model Number 14 Print Speed Model Type Power Stacker P7005 500 lpm Pedestal P7010 1000 lpm Pedestal P7015 1500 lpm Pedestal P7205 500 lpm Cabinet N/A P7210 1000 lpm Cabinet Option P7215 1500 lpm Cabinet Option P7220 2000 lpm Cabinet Option Integrated Print Management System Integrated Print Management System The P7000 has a new feature that automatically monitors and communicates ribbon life. Using a specially barcoded spool, the printer can automatically detect when a new or used ribbon is loaded, and all ribbon properties. With a sophisticated algorithm, the system monitors all jobs printed and automatically updates the remaining ribbon life on the front panel display. This allows the system administrator to have precise control over print quality and consumable costs. The accurate presentation of available ribbon life allows for efficient planning of print jobs. For example, you can install a new ribbon before printing large print jobs. When the ribbon life gets near the end point, the printer displays a ribbon low message and flashes the indicator light. Printing will continue without interruption. Once the ribbon reaches 0% remaining, the alarm sounds, the indicator light flashes, the display updates, and printing pauses. If a new ribbon is loaded, the system automatically detects the change, clears the condition, and restarts the life at 100%. If it is not convenient to change the ribbon immediately, cycle the printer on and offline and it will resume printing for a few minutes. This should be enough to complete the job. If not, repeat the same procedure indefinitely to extend printing on the same ribbon. Output Darkness By default the system is configured to meet most user requirements. However, some applications require that the output remains darker than the nominal set point while some applications are less critical and could tolerate a lighter final image. The system can easily adjust to this variability. A setting under the Printer Control menu is available that allows the user to adjust the final output. The range is as follows: Normal (Default) Darker +1 through +6 Lighter -1 through -10 The ribbon life indicator always cycles between 100% and 0%, but if a darker setting is selected, zero will be reached more quickly. 15 Chapter 1 Printer Overview If a lighter setting is selected, the system will extend the amount of printing it takes to reach zero. Ribbon Flipping In some cases, the application’s print pattern is narrow enough where only half of the ribbon is used when printing. In these cases, you can flip the ribbon and use the other half. The Integrated Print Management System detects the flip and resets the ribbon life to 100%. NOTE: It is the user’s responsibility to ensure the print pattern is sufficiently narrow to support flipping. If not, the ribbon life may falsely indicate 100% for the flipped ribbon. Loading a Used Ribbon You can take ribbons off the printer and reload it at a later time. The ribbon life gauge automatically updates to reflect the correct remaining capacity. NOTE: The ribbon must be reloaded back onto the same printer, and in the same orientation as it was removed. If the used ribbon is loaded onto a different printer, or if it is flipped over, it will incorrectly indicate the ribbon as new. Ribbon Log The Integrated Printer Management System tracks all used ribbons. This data allows you to monitor how many ribbons and ribbon types have been used on the printer. This data is contained in the ribbon log. To print the ribbon log, see page 289. 16 Graphics Enhancements Consumable Monitoring With PrintNet Enterprise The Integrated Print Management System works with PrintNet Enterprise (PNE). PNE allows a system administrator to remotely view the current consumable status of all printers. PNE can be configured to deliver alerts on all consumable warnings. When a ribbon reaches the low state, PNE notifies the system administrator remotely via an automated e-mail alert of the low condition. This allows corrective action to be taken before the ribbon reaches its end of life. If the ribbon is not changed, an alert will again be initiated once the ribbon reaches the 0% end point. Refer to your PrintNet Enterprise Remote Management Software manual for details. Graphics Enhancements The IGP/PGL and IGP/VGL emulations allow you to create and store forms, generate logos, bar codes, expanded characters, and create other graphics. Alphanumeric and bar code data are added as the form is printed. These emulations are available as factory-installed or field-installed options. For more information, contact your authorized service representative. Taking Care Of Your Printer Your printer will produce high print quality jobs if it is well taken care of. Periodic cleaning, handling the printer properly, and using the correct printer supplies such as ribbon and paper ensures optimum performance. Chapter 7 explains how to clean the printer, and printer supplies are listed in Appendix A. Whenever it is necessary to service the printer, remember these important maintenance concepts: • Incorrect closure of the platen lever can lead to smearing, degraded print quality, paper jams, and damage to the platen and shuttle assembly. Never close the platen lever too tightly. 17 Chapter 1 Conventions In This Manual Conventions In This Manual All uppercase print indicates control panel keys. Example: Press the CLEAR key, then press the ON LINE key. Quotation marks (“ ”) indicate messages on the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). Example: Press the ON LINE key. “OFFLINE” appears on the LCD. The + (plus) symbol represents key combinations. Example: “Press = + >” means press the = (UP) key and the > (DOWN) key at the same time. Warnings And Special Information Read and comply with all information highlighted under special headings: WARNING CAUTION IMPORTANT A warning notice calls attention to a condition that could harm you. A caution notice calls attention to a condition that could damage the printer. Information vital to proper operation of the printer. NOTE: A note gives you helpful tips about printer operation and maintenance. 18 Related Documents Taking Care Of Your Printer Related Documents • Maintenance Manual — Explains how to maintain and repair the line matrix printer at the field service level of maintenance. • Coax/Twinax Programmer's Reference Manual — Covers the host control codes and character sets for the Coax and Twinax emulations. • Coax/Twinax Programmer's Reference Manual for the Simple Protocol Converter Option — Covers the host control codes and character sets for the Coax and Twinax Simple Protocol Converter emulations. • LinePrinter Plus Programmer's Reference Manual — Covers the host control codes for the LinePrinter Plus emulation. • IGP/PGL Programmer's Reference Manual — Provides information used with the optional IGP Printronix emulation enhancement feature. • IGP/VGL Programmer's Reference Manual — Provides information used with the optional Code VTM emulation enhancement feature. • ANSI Programmer's Reference Manual — Provides host control codes and character sets for the ANSI emulation. • IPDS Twinax Emulation Programmer's Reference Manual — Provides an overview of Intelligent Printer Data StreamTM (IPDS) features, commands, and diagnostics. • Character Sets Reference Manual — Information about and examples of the character sets available in line matrix printers. • Network Interface Card User's Manual — Information about network protocols, configuration, and operation. 19 Chapter 1 Printronix Customer Support Center Printronix Customer Support Center The Printronix Customer Support Center offers technical support with: • • • • • Installation Configuration and setup Operation and supplies loading Specifications of the proper print media and ribbon Answers to post-sale service support questions Call the Printronix Customer Support Center at: 1-714-368-2686 in the Americas 31-24-6489489 in Europe, Middle East, and Africa 65-65484114 in Asia Pacific or visit the Printronix web page at www.printronix.com http://www.printronix.com/public/servicesupport/default.aspx 20 2 Setting Up The Printer Before You Begin Read this chapter carefully before installing and operating the printer. The printer is easy to install. However, for your safety and to protect valuable equipment, perform all the procedures in this chapter in the order presented. Power Requirements The printer must be connected to a power outlet that supplies AC 100V to 240V +/- 10% at 50 to 60 Hz. The printer automatically senses and adjusts itself to conform to the correct voltage range. Primary circuit protection is provided by the power switch, which is also a circuit breaker. Consult an electrician if printer operation affects local electrical lines. IMPORTANT Printer power should be supplied from a separate AC circuit protected at 10 amperes for 100 - 120 volts or 5 amperes for 200 - 240 volts at 50 or 60 Hertz. 21 Chapter 2 Select A Site Select A Site Select a printer site that meets all of the following requirements: • • Permits complete opening of the printer cover and doors. • Has a standard power outlet that supplies 88-135 Volts AC or 178-270 Volts AC power, at 47 to 63 Hz. • • Is relatively dust-free. • For cabinet models, allows at least three feet of clearance behind the printer. (This permits air to circulate freely around the printer and provides access to the paper stacking area.) Has a temperature range of 10° C to 40° C (50° F to 104° F) and a relative humidity from 15% to 90% non-condensing. Is located within the maximum allowable cable length to the host computer. This distance depends on the type of interface you plan to use, as shown in Table 2. Table 2. Maximum Interface Connection Cable Length 22 Interface Type Maximum Cable Length Centronics Parallel 5 meters (15 feet) Dataproducts Parallel 12 meters (40 feet) IEEE 1284 Parallel 10 meters (32 feet) Serial RS-232 15 meters (50 feet) Serial RS-422 1220 meters (4000 feet) Coax 1500 meters (4920 feet) Twinax 1500 meters (4920 feet) Twinax (shielded cable) 1500 meters (4920 feet) Twisted Pair / Type 3 300 meters (985 feet) Ethernet 10/100Base-T 100 meters (328 feet) Printer Dimensions Printer Dimensions 57.5 in 41.0 in (104 cm) (146.1 cm) 27.0 in (68.84 cm) 29.0 in (73.7 cm) 83.0 in (210.8 cm) 27.0 in (68.6 cm) 27.0 in (68.6 cm) Figure 1. Printer Dimensions - Cabinet Model 23 Chapter 2 Printer Dimensions 59.0 in (149.9 cm) 42.5 in (107.8 cm) 27.0 in (68.6 cm) 32.5 in (82.6 cm) 83.0 in (210.8 cm) 27.0 in (68.6 cm) 27.0 in (68.6 cm) 32.0 in (81.3 cm) Figure 2. Printer Dimensions - Cabinet Model with Paper Stacker 24 Printer Dimensions 25 in. (63.5 cm) 48.0 in. (122 cm) 10.5 in. (26.67 cm.) 24.6 in. (62.48 cm) 30 in. (76.2 cm.) Figure 3. Printer Dimensions - Pedestal Model 25 Chapter 2 Printer Component Locations Printer Component Locations Barcode Ribbon Ribbon Spool Date Code Label Splined Shaft Paper Support Tractor (2) Ribbon Hub Hammer Bank Cover and Ribbon Mask Vertical Position Knob Blue Tractor Lock (2) Platen Lever Barcode Sensor Platen Stop Ribbon Guide (2) Figure 4. Printer Component Locations 26 3 Operating The Printer Powering On The Printer When you power on the printer, it executes a self-test. The default power-up state is online. When the self-test completes and the software has initialized successfully, the status indicator light turns on, indicating the printer is online. The default value of the type of emulation you have installed appears upper right corner of the display. The ribbon life remaining is shown on the second line. If there is a fault during the self-test, the status indicator flashes and a specific fault message appears on the display (such as “LOAD PAPER”). The alarm also sounds if it is configured to do so. See “ LCD Message Troubleshooting Table” on page 317 for information on fault messages and solutions. Operating Modes Online. In online mode, the printer can receive and print data sent from the host. Pressing the ON LINE key toggles the printer from offline to online mode. The status indicator is lit in online mode. Offline. In offline mode, you can perform operator functions, such as loading paper and setting top-of-form. You can also move within the printer configuration menus. Pressing the ON LINE key toggles the printer from online to offline mode. The status indicator is off in offline mode. Fault. In fault mode, a condition exists which must be cleared before printing can continue. The status indicator flashes, the alarm 27 Chapter 3 The Control Panel beeps (if configured to sound), and a descriptive fault message displays. The current operating mode can be selected via control panel keys or can result from routine operations such as powering on the printer. The Control Panel Figure 5 shows the keys, displays, and indicators as they appear on the control panel. The following section provides the descriptions, and functions of the control panel keys. Key combinations are indicated with the plus (+) sign. For example, “Press + ” means to press the key and the key at the same time. Message Display PRT CONFIG Circular Pad Emulation SET TOF Status Indicator ONLINE <PGL> RIBBON LIFE = 100% JOB SELECT ENTER VIEW/EJECT ON LINE/CLEAR Ribbon Life Indicator PAPER ADVANCE Figure 5. Control Panel 28 CANCEL Control Panel Keys Control Panel Keys ON LINE / CLEAR Toggles the printer between online and offline modes. If a fault condition exists, pressing this key will clear the fault message and return the printer from fault mode to offline mode. NOTE: If the fault condition is not corrected before pressing this key, the fault message will reappear when attempting to place the printer online. PAPER ADVANCE Performs advance to top-of-form, as defined by the current active form length. The key works both online and offline. • If online with data in the printer buffer, the data will print and then the paper will move to the next top-of-form. • In the fault state, PAPER ADVANCE will advance the paper. The first press moves to the top of the next available form. All subsequent presses advances one forms length as defined by the current active forms length. VIEW / EJECT When the printer is online or offline, pressing this key executes the view or eject function, depending on whether the printer is a cabinet or a pedestal (or zero tear pedestal). If online with data in the printer buffer, the data prints and the key functions as described below. If in a fault state, this key will be ignored. • View Function — for cabinet models, pressing the VIEW/EJECT key moves the last data printed to the tractor area for viewing. While in the view state, the message "Printer in View" displays, pressing the UP or DOWN arrow keys moves the paper up or down in 1/72 inch increments. This is done to align the image within a pre-printed form, for example. Refer to the UP and DOWN key functions for additional details on the 29 Chapter 3 The Control Panel microstep feature. Pressing VIEW/EJECT a second time moves the paper back to the adjusted print position. Eject Function — for pedestal models, when the VIEW/EJECT key is pressed, the bottom of the last printed form will move to the tear bar position. The message "READY TO TEAR/EJECT To Return" displays. While in this position, pressing the UP or DOWN arrow keys moves the paper up or down in 1/72 inch increments. Refer to the Up and Down key functions for additional details on the microstep feature. When the VIEW/EJECT key is pressed a second time, the printer will move the paper to enable printing on the next available form. CANCEL In offline mode, this key cancels all data in the print buffer, if enabled in “ADVANCED USER” on page 281. The print buffer is cleared without printing any of the data and the current paper position is set as the top-of-form. If this function is disabled, the CANCEL key will be ignored. NOTE: Use of this key will cause loss of data. SET TOF Sets the top-of-form on the printer. This key is active only when the printer is offline and will not operate if the printer is in a fault condition. The paper moves down to the print position and aligns to the top-of-form. Refer to the Quick Setup Guide for complete instructions on how to set the top-of-form. NOTE: If there is any data in the buffer, the paper will move to the last print position. PRT CONFIG In offline mode, PRT CONFIG prints the current short configuration. This key requires a confirmation with the ENTER key; pressing any other key will exit from this function. See “The Configuration Menus” on page 53 for an explanation of configuration menus. 30 Control Panel Keys JOB SELECT In offline mode, this key allows you to change the active configuration if multiple configurations have been saved or the typeface of the printer. ENTER When navigating the configuration menus, ENTER selects the currently displayed option value as the active value. An asterisk (*) appears next to the active value on the display. ENTER is also used for starting and stopping printer tests and generating a configuration printout. NOTE: The ENTER key must be unlocked in order to function. See UP + DOWN, below. The ENTER key lock and unlock function can be configured to be a key combination other than = + > (see page 288). UP or DOWN ( = or > ) Moves up or down between levels in the configuration menus and makes vertical forms adjustment. After pressing VIEW, press = or > to adjust the paper up or down in 1/72 inch increments for fine vertical forms alignment. When the printer is in offline mode, press = or > to move through levels in the configuration menus. UP + DOWN ( = + > ) Locks and unlocks the ENTER key. NOTE: The ENTER key lock and unlock function can be configured to be a key combination other than = + > (see page 288). 31 Chapter 3 The Control Panel PREV or NEXT ( ; or < ) Moves between the options on the current level of configuration menu. In the configuration menu, press ; to scroll backward or press < to scroll forward through the menu selections on the same level. PREV + NEXT ( ; + < ) When both keys are pressed simultaneously, the printer will reset to the power-up configuration and reset its internal state. = + ON LINE (IPDS Emulation only) In offline mode, press = + ON LINE. If there is data in the printer buffer, the printer will be placed in online mode, print one page, and return to the offline mode. This action can be repeated until the end of a print job. Only one page prints each time you press = + ON LINE. If there is no data in the printer buffer, the printer is placed in online mode. In the fault state, = + ON LINE does not work. = + PAPER ADVANCE (IPDS Emulation only) In offline mode, press = + PAPER ADVANCE. The printer will perform a reverse linefeed. If you hold down the = + PAPER ADVANCE keys for longer than 1/2 second, the printer moves to the previous top-of-form position. If there is data in the printer buffer, the data does not print. In the fault state, = + PAPER ADVANCE does not work. 32 Control Panel Keys = + VIEW (IPDS Emulation only) In offline mode, press = + VIEW. If there is data in the IPDS printer buffer, the printer will be placed in online mode, print one line, and return to offline mode. This action can be repeated until the end of the job. This function prints only one line of text. If the data is not text, only 1/6 inch prints. If there is no data in the printer buffer, the printer is placed in online mode for one second and then returns to offline mode. In the fault state, = + VIEW does not work. Ribbon Life Indicator Indicates life remaining of the currently installed ribbon. The default settings for this feature should match the requirements for most applications; no special user setup is needed. If your particular application requires darker printing or can tolerate lighter printing, the ribbon end point can be adjusted as appropriate. Please refer “Ribbon End Point” on page 80. 33 Chapter 3 Operational Procedures Operational Procedures This section contains routine printer operating procedures on how to: • • • reload paper unload paper cancel a print job. Reload Paper Do this procedure when “LOAD PAPER” displays. (This message occurs when the last sheet of paper passes through the paper slot.) This procedure reloads paper without removing the last sheet of the old paper supply, while retaining the current top-of-form setting. Paper Slot Paper Slot Metal Paper Guide (P7220 Only) Cabinet Models Pedestal Models Figure 6. Paper Slot Location 34 Reload Paper 1. Raise the printer cover. Raise the platen lever as far as it will go. (See Figure 4 on page 26 for the location of the lever.) 2. Press ON LINE/CLEAR to turn off the alarm. Do not open the tractor doors or remove the existing paper. 3. For cabinet models, open the front door. Align the paper supply with the label on the floor. Ensure the paper pulls freely from the box. 4. Feed the paper up through the paper slot (see Figure 6). It may be easier to feed one corner of the new paper up through the slot first. When this corner can be grasped from the top, rotate the paper back to the normal position. NOTE: If you are using thick, multi-part forms and are unable to load the new paper over the existing paper, go to step 16. 5. Hold the paper to prevent it from slipping down and through the paper slot. 35 Chapter 3 Operational Procedures New Paper Existing Paper Figure 7. Loading New Paper into the Printer 6. Pull the new paper above and behind the ribbon mask, but in front of the existing paper. See Figure 4 on page 26 for the ribbon mask location. If necessary, gently press the existing paper back. 7. Align the top edge of the new paper with the top perforation of the existing paper. 8. Load the new paper over the existing paper. Open and load the tractors one at a time to prevent the paper from slipping. NOTE: Make sure that the top edge of the new paper lines up with the top horizontal perforation of the last page. 36 Reload Paper Vertical Position Knob Paper Thickness Indicator A A Platen Stop Platen Lever Platen Stop Knob Figure 8. Setting the Platen Lever 9. Turn the vertical position knob to feed the paper up into the paper guide assembly, removing the last printed sheet. 10. Turn the platen stop knob clockwise or counterclockwise to match the paper thickness. (The A-B-C scale corresponds approximately to 1-, 3-, and 6-part paper thickness). NOTE: If you are using the same thickness of paper, there is no need to readjust. 11. Lower the platen lever until it stops. 12. Press ON LINE/CLEAR to remove the “LOAD PAPER” fault message from the display. 37 Chapter 3 Operational Procedures 13. Press PAPER ADVANCE several times to make sure the paper feeds properly beyond the tractors and over the lower paper guide. Feed sufficient paper to ensure the paper stacks correctly. 14. Close the printer top cover. Close the cabinet front door. 15. Press ON LINE/CLEAR to place the printer in online mode and resume printing. Paper Slot Paper Slot Metal Paper Guide (P7220 Only) Cabinet Models Pedestal Models Figure 9. Paper Slots on the Printers NOTE: Perform steps 16 to 33 only if you are unable to load the new paper over the existing paper. 16. Open both tractor doors. 17. Remove the old paper from the tractors. Allow the paper to fall into the paper supply area. 18. Feed the new paper up through the paper slot. Hold the paper to prevent it from slipping down through the paper slot. 38 Reload Paper Left Tractor Door Paper Left Tractor Lock Figure 10. Loading Paper on the Left Tractor 19. Pull the paper above and behind the ribbon mask. See Figure 4 on page 26 for the ribbon mask location. 20. Load the paper on the left tractor. 21. Close the tractor door. 39 Chapter 3 Operational Procedures Tractor Splined Shaft Tractor Paper Scale Figure 11. Positioning the Left Tractor to Avoid Damage CAUTION To avoid damage to the printer caused by printing on the platen, always position the left tractor unit directly to the left of the “1” mark on the paper scale. 22. Normally, you should not need to adjust the position of the left tractor. If adjustment is necessary, unlock the left tractor. Slide the tractor until it is directly to the left of the number “1” on the paper scale and lock it. (You can also use the paper scale to count columns.) 40 Reload Paper Tractor Door Tractor Lock Figure 12. Loading Paper onto the Sprockets 23. Unlock the right tractor. 24. Load the paper onto the sprockets and close the tractor door. If necessary, slide the right tractor to remove paper slack or to adjust for various paper widths. Then, lock the tractor. 41 Chapter 3 Operational Procedures Upper Paper Guide Upper Paper Guide Wire Guide (2) Paper Slot Cabinet Model Pedestal Model Figure 13. Using the Paper Guide to Orient the Paper 25. Pedestal models: Using the vertical position knob to move the paper up, guide the paper over the upper paper guide and through the slot to the rear of the top cover. For pedestal models with the Quick Access Cover, refer to the Quick Setup Guide for paper exiting options. 26. Press PAPER ADVANCE several times to make sure the paper feeds properly beyond the tractors and over the lower paper guide. Feed sufficient paper to ensure the paper stacks correctly. 27. Cabinet models: Open the cabinet rear door. Make sure the paper is aligned with the label in the output area (inside the cabinet). Close the front and rear doors. 42 Reload Paper Perforation TOF Indicator Vertical Position Knob Figure 14. Aligning the Perforation with the TOF Indicator 28. Align the top of the first print line with the TOF indicator on the tractor by rotating the vertical position knob. For best print quality, it is recommended that the top-of-form be set at least one print line or more below the perforation. NOTE: For exact positioning, press the VIEW/EJECT key to move the last data printed to the tractor area for viewing. While in View mode “Printer in View” displays. Press the Up or Down Arrow keys to move the paper vertically in small increments. Pressing the VIEW/EJECT key a second time moves the paper back to the adjusted print position. The key works both online and offline provided that the printer is in View mode. (This procedure is applicable for both the cabinet and pedestal models.) 43 Chapter 3 Operational Procedures Vertical Position Knob Paper Thickness Indicator A A Platen Stop Platen Lever Platen Stop Knob Figure 15. Adjusting the Platen Lever 29. Turn the Auto Platen Stop Knob clockwise or counterclockwise to match the paper thickness. (The A-B-C scale corresponds approximately to 1-, 3-, and 6-part paper thickness. Adjust until you have the desired print quality). NOTE: The platen stop allows you to set an optimum and consistent thickness that is not affected when opening and closing the platen lever. 30. Lower the platen lever until it stops. 31. Press ON LINE/CLEAR to clear any fault messages (such as “LOAD PAPER”) from the LCD. 32. Press SET TOF. The top-of-form you have set moves down to the print position. If there is data in the buffer, the paper moves forward to the last print position on the next page. 33. Press ON LINE/CLEAR and close the printer cover. 44 Unload Paper Unload Paper 1. Press ON LINE/CLEAR to place the printer in offline mode and open the printer cover. 2. For cabinet models, open the cabinet rear door. For models with the power stacker installed, press the STACKER UP key on the rear control panel. Paper Perforation Figure 16. Unloading the Paper from the Printer 3. Tear off the paper at the perforation. 4. Allow the paper to fall to the back of the printer and into the paper stacking area. 5. For pedestal models, remove the stacked paper from the paper tray. 45 Chapter 3 Operational Procedures Paper Power Stacker Figure 17. Removing Stacked Paper from the Printer 6. For cabinet models, remove the stacked paper from the rear cabinet floor. For cabinet models with the power stacker installed, remove the paper from the wire paper tent and press the STACKER DOWN key to lower the stacker mechanism. 7. Close the cabinet rear door. 46 Unload Paper Tractors Doors (2) Platen Lever Figure 18. Completely Removing the Paper 8. To completely remove the paper from the printer: a. Raise the platen lever as far as it will go and open both tractor doors. CAUTION Be careful when pulling any paper backward through the paper path, especially when using a label stock. If you are not careful, labels can detach and adhere to the printer within the paper path, where only an authorized service representative can remove them. b. Open the cabinet front door. c. Gently pull the paper down through the paper slot. Allow the paper to fall into the paper supply area. d. Remove the paper from the paper supply area. 47 Chapter 3 Integrated Print Management System Integrated Print Management System The P7000’s Integrated Print Management System feature automatically monitors and communicates the status of the ribbon’s life to help the operator know when to change ribbons. Using a special bar coded spool, the P7000 automatically detects when a new or used ribbon is installed and determines the ribbon’s length, ink color, and expected yield. The ribbon life, starting from 100% when new and decreasing to 0% when depleted, is always displayed on the control panel. See Figure 5 on page 28. When the ribbon life reaches 2%, a warning message “RIBBON UNDER 2%/Change RBN soon” appears on the control panel display. The control panel status indicator lamp flashes. The printer will continue printing in this condition until the ribbon life reaches 0% at which time, printing will stop. The ribbon may be changed at any time while the printer is in the “RBN END POINT/Change Ribbon” condition without losing data in the printer’s buffer. Simply follow the procedures outlined below to change the ribbon. You may also resume printing for approximately two more minutes without changing the ribbon by pressing the ON LINE/CLEAR key twice. This may be done as many times as needed to complete the job in progress. Lighter Or Darker Print The ribbon life value as determined by the Integrated Print Management System is factory set so that the image quality at the end of the ribbon life is as good as it was when the ribbon was new. You may adjust the ribbon end point for a lighter or darker image as required for your printing needs. See “PRINTER CONTROL” on page 276. 48 Changing Ribbons Changing Ribbons Before changing the ribbon, determine whether you want to make the print lighter (extend the ribbon life) or darker (shorten the ribbon life). If you want to make the print lighter, go to “Ribbon End Point” on page 277 and follow the procedures for adjusting the image density. If you are satisfied with the print darkness, or if you want to increase the darkness at the end of ribbon life, continue with the following steps. Blue Tractor Door (2) Platen Lever Figure 19. Preparing to Load the Ribbon 1. Open the printer cover. 2. Raise the platen lever as far as it will go. 3. Close the tractor doors. 4. Remove the old ribbon and discard properly. 49 Chapter 3 Integrated Print Management System Date Code Label Spool Right Hub Figure 20. Loading the Barcoded Ribbon 5. Place the full spool on the right hand side ribbon hub and press it into place. IMPORTANT The full spool has a barcode label on the bottom side and a date code label on the top. Once the sensor reads and logs the ribbon barcode, the Integrated Print Management System starts to track ribbon usage. A date code label is on the top side of the right hand spool. If you remove the ribbon during the course of its life and want to re-install the same ribbon, be sure to place the same spools on the correct hubs. 50 Changing Ribbons Ribbon Spool A Left Hub Ribbon Loading Instructions For Future Reference Hammer Bank Cover Ribbon Mask A Ribbon Guide (Both Sides) Figure 21. Threading the Ribbon Around the Ribbon Guide 6. Thread the ribbon around the ribbon guide and along the ribbon path. Be sure to thread the ribbon between the hammer bank cover and the ribbon mask. 7. Place the empty spool on the left hub. 8. Press the spool down until it snaps into place. 51 Chapter 3 Integrated Print Management System 9. Turn the left spool by hand to make sure the ribbon tracks correctly in the ribbon path and around the ribbon guides. 10. Close the platen lever. 11. Close the printer top cover. If you want to increase the darkness level of the ribbon at the end of life, go to “Ribbon End Point” on page 277 and follow the procedures for adjusting the image density. If you are satisfied with the print darkness, press the ON LINE/CLEAR key twice to return the printer to operation. Cancel A Print Job The procedure to cancel a print job depends on the printer emulation and your application software. Contact your system administrator for additional information. 1. If the printer is online, press ON LINE/CLEAR to place the printer in offline mode. 2. From the host system, stop the print job. NOTE: If the print job is not stopped from the host system before pressing CANCEL, the print job continues with data missing when the printer returns to online mode. Exercise caution to prevent unwanted data loss occurrences, as this function deletes unprinted data in the printer. This function is active only in offline mode; the purpose of this function is to eliminate the necessity of printing unwanted data when print jobs are canceled. 3. Press CANCEL. NOTE: You may need to enable the Cancel option on the front panel. See “ADVANCED USER” on page 281 for details. 4. Set the top-of-form. Refer to the Quick Setup Guide. 52 4 The Configuration Menus Configuration Overview To print data, the printer must respond correctly to signals and commands received from the host computer. Configuration is the process of matching the printer's operating characteristics to those of the host computer and to specific tasks, such as printing labels or printing on different sizes of paper. The characteristics which define the printer's response to signals and commands received from the host computer are called configuration parameters. You can configure the printer using the configuration menus and the control panel or by sending control codes in the data stream from a host computer attached to the printer. This chapter provides an introduction to configuring the printer and includes the configuration menus available (depending on which emulation you have installed in the printer). IMPORTANT Configuration directly affects printer operation. Do not change the configuration of your printer until you are thoroughly familiar with the procedures in this chapter. 53 Chapter 4 Configuration Overview Changing Parameter Settings You may change a printer parameter setting, such as line spacing or forms length, either by pressing keys on the control panel or by sending emulation control codes in the data stream from a host attached to the printer. The control panel allows you to configure the printer’s resident set of configuration menus. An example procedure for using the control panel to change parameter settings begins on page 57. When control codes are sent from a host attached to the printer, they override control panel settings. For example, if you set the line spacing to 6 lpi with the control panel, and application software later changes this to 8 lpi with a control code, the control code overrides the control panel setting. Saving Parameter Settings The parameter settings that you have changed using the menus and control codes will be permanently stored in the printer’s memory. Changes made to the Factory Default configuration menu items will always be written to the first available Config (#) where # equals the next available unassigned configuration number and can be made with or without the Protect Config option disabled. You may also save your new configurations using the PTX_SETUP command host control code. See your LinePrinter Plus Programmer’s Reference Manual for details. 54 Default And Custom Configurations Default And Custom Configurations A configuration consists of a group of parameter settings, such as line spacing, forms length, etc. Your printer provides a fixed default configuration and allows you to define several custom configurations for use with particular print jobs.The factory default configuration can be loaded, but it cannot be altered. Eight configurations can be modified for unique print job requirements. The “Save Config.” option allows you to save eight groups of parameter settings in memory as custom configurations numbered from 1 through 8. An explanation on how to save a set of parameter values as a custom configuration using the “Save Config.” menu option begins on page 61. 55 Chapter 4 Configuration Overview Navigating The Menus To manipulate configurations review the following instructions about navigating through the menus. You must be offline to move within the menus. ON LINE/CLEAR Press to toggle between ONLINE and OFFLINE. Menus are accessed with the printer offline. Press to move up or down through the menu levels. OR Press to scroll through the available choices on a chosen level. OR ENTER + Press to confirm selection. Press to lock and unlock the ENTER key. The ENTER key is locked by default to prevent you from accidentally changing the printer configuration. The lock and unlock function can be configured to be other than = + > (See “Set Lock Key” on page 288.) To experiment with navigating the menus, use the example on the next page as a tutorial. 56 Changing Parameters Example Changing Parameters Example * = Factory Default OFFLINE QUICK SETUP ... PRINTER CONTROL Ribbon End Point Darker +6 Darker +5 Darker +4 Darker +3 Darker +2 Darker +1 Normal* Lighter -1 Lighter -2 Lighter -3 Lighter -4 Lighter -5 Lighter -6 Lighter -7 Lighter -8 Lighter -9 Lighter -10 Open Platen @ BOF Disable* Enable Unidirectional Disable* Enable Barcode Quality Dark* Draft Display Language English German French Italian Spanish Portuguese Tear Bar Dist. 7.46 in.* (4.5-10.5 in.) Accented Char Standard* Tall A configuration consists of several parameters. The default factory configuration has a starting set of parameters. In the configuration menu above, and in all the configuration menus in this chapter, the factory default values are indicated by an asterisk (*). Your print jobs may require parameter values which vary from the default settings. This section provides an example procedure for changing individual parameter values. The following procedure shows how to change and save the settings for the Barcode Quality and Language options. Use these guidelines to navigate the configuration menus and change other parameters. 57 Chapter 4 Configuration Overview Step Press 1. Make sure the printer is on. 2. ON LINE/CLEAR 3. LCD OFFLINE QUICK SETUP ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED + OFFLINE QUICK SETUP 4. OFFLINE PRINTER CONTROL UNTIL 5. PRINTER CONTROL Ribbon End Point 6. PRINTER CONTROL Barcode Quality UNTIL 7. 58 Notes Barcode Quality Dark* Allows you to make configuration changes. Changing Parameters Example Step Press 8. LCD Notes Barcode Quality Draft Cycle through the choices. Barcode Quality Draft* The * indicates this choice is active. OR 9. ENTER 10. PRINTER CONTROL Barcode Quality 11. PRINTER CONTROL Display Language UNTIL 12. Display Language English* 13. Display Language Spanish Press until the desired parameter displays. Display Language Spanish* The * indicates this choice is active. ENTER SWITCH LOCKED Locks the ENTER key. OR 14. ENTER 15. + 59 Chapter 4 Configuration Overview Step Press 16. ON LINE/CLEAR 17A. ENTER 17B. ON LINE/CLEAR 18. LCD Notes ENTER = Save ONLINE = No Save Press ENTER to automatically save configuration changes. Press ONLINE to continue without saving. Cfg = 1* = Power-Up Cfg Configuration changes have been saved as Configuration 1, and will be set as the Power-Up config. The printer will then be brought online. ONLINE Ribbon Life = 100% Places the printer online without permanently saving the configuration changes. The printer is ready for operation Auto Save Configuration After any changes are made to the Factory Default configuration menu items, you will be prompted to save the changes to “Config #”, where # equals the next available unassigned configuration number. If you do not select this option, the printer will be brought ONLINE and the changes will be implemented but saved only temporarily until deliberately saved as a new configuration or until you power off the printer. 60 Saving Your New Configuration Saving Your New Configuration The Save Config. option allows you to save up to eight custom configurations to meet different print job requirements. Once you have changed all of the necessary parameters, you may save them as a numbered configuration (Example 1 on page 62) or a named configuration (Example 2 on page 65) that can be stored and loaded later for future use. If you do not save your configuration using the Auto Save, or this option, all of your parameter changes will be erased when you power off the printer. Once you have saved a custom configuration using this option, it will not be lost if you power off the printer. You can load a configuration for a specific print job (see “Load Config.” on page 82). You can also modify and resave it. You may want to print your configurations (see “Print Config.” on page 83) and store them in a safe place, such as inside the printer cabinet. If the Protect Configs. parameter is enabled and you try to resave an existing configuration, the new configuration will not be saved until the existing configuration has been deleted (see “Delete Config.” on page 83). NOTE: Once you change active emulations, any changes to the previously selected emulation will be gone unless they have been saved. 61 Chapter 4 Configuration Overview Example 1 This example shows how to save a configuration as a numbered configuration, then later print it. Step Press 1. Make sure the printer is on. 2. ON LINE/CLEAR 3. LCD OFFLINE CONFIG. CONTROL ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED + OFFLINE QUICK SETUP 4. OFFLINE CONFIG. CONTROL UNTIL 5. CONFIG. CONTROL Load Config. 6. CONFIG. CONTROL Save Config. UNTIL 7. 62 Notes Save Config. 1* Allows you to make configuration changes. Saving Your New Configuration Step Press 8. LCD Notes Save Config. 2 Cycle through the choices. Save Config. 2* The * indicates this choice is active. OR 9. NOTE: ENTER We recommend that you print the configuration. To print the configuration go to Step 9. To skip this procedure and resume printer operation, go to Step 14. 10. CONFIG. CONTROL Save Config. 11. CONFIG. CONTROL Print Config. UNTIL 12. Print Config. Current 13. Print Config. 2 Press until the desired parameter displays. OFFLINE CONFIG. CONTROL The selected configuration is printed. OR 14. ENTER 63 Chapter 4 Configuration Overview Step Press 15. LCD ENTER SWITCH LOCKED Notes Locks the ENTER key. + 16. 17. 64 ON LINE/CLEAR ONLINE Ribbon Life = 100% If you printed out the configuration, store it in a safe place. The printer is ready for operation. Saving Your New Configuration Example 2 This example shows how to save a configuration as a named configuration. Step Press 1. Make sure the printer is on. 2. ON LINE/CLEAR 3. LCD Notes OFFLINE CONFIG. CONTROL ENTER SWITCH UNLOCKED Allows you to make configuration changes. + OFFLINE QUICK SETUP 4. OFFLINE CONFIG. CONTROL UNTIL 5. CONFIG. CONTROL Load Config. 6. CONFIG. CONTROL Name Configs. UNTIL 7. Name Configs. 1 The LCD flashes. 65 Chapter 4 Configuration Overview Step Press LCD 8. Name Configs 2 Notes You will rename config 2. UNTIL 9. 2 2* 10. 2 T Cycle through the choices until “T” displays. 11. 2 T_ Saves the first character. 12. 2 TE Cycle through the choices until “E” displays. 2 TE_ Saves the second character. 2 TES Cycle through the choices until “S” displays. 2 TES_ Saves the third character. UNTIL UNTIL 13. 14. UNTIL 15. 66 Saving Your New Configuration Step Press LCD 16. UNTIL 17. 18. ENTER Notes 2 TEST Cycle through the choices until “T” displays. 2 TEST_ Saves the fourth character. Name Configs TEST The configuration is renamed TEST. 19. CONFIG. CONTROL Name Configs 20. CONFIG. CONTROL Save Config. UNTIL 21. Save Config. 1* 22. Save Config. TEST 23. ENTER TEST now appears as one of configuration choices. Saving Configuration Save Config. TEST* Your configuration is saved as TEST. 67 Chapter 4 Configuration Overview Step Press 24. LCD ENTER SWITCH LOCKED Notes Locks the ENTER key. + 25. ON LINE/CLEAR ONLINE Ribbon Life = 100% Now you have the saved configuration for later use if needed. Optimizing Print Quality LP+, IGP/PGL, and IGP/VGL Emulations You can optimize print quality for darker and sharper barcodes and characters. Doing so, however, will decrease the printer speed. To optimize print quality, you can change the values of the following configuration parameters: 68 • Bar Code Quality (Printer Control menu): Select “Dark” or “Recommended.” Recommended prints the darkest images, but at the slowest speed. Dark prints at a faster speed than Recommended, but the characters are not as dark. (See page 279 for a written description of Bar Code Quality.) • Print Quality (IGP/PGL emulation): Select “Best” or “High.” Best prints the darkest images, but at the slowest speed. High prints at a faster speed than Best, but the characters are not as dark. (See page 129 for the IGP/PGL Configuration Menu, and see page 143 for a written description of Print Quality.) • Print Quality (IGP/VGL emulation): Select “High.” (See page 148 for the IGP/VGL Configuration Menu, and see page 157 for a written description of Print Quality.) Optimizing Print Speed Optimizing Print Speed LP+, IGP/PGL, and IGP/VGL Emulations The printer has been configured at the factory for optimal print speed. To optimize print quality instead, you can change values for specific configuration parameters such as Barcode Quality and Print Quality. Doing so, however, will decrease the printer speed. If you have optimized the printer for print quality, you can change it to optimal speed by selecting the values as follows: • Bar Code Quality (Printer Control menu): Select “Draft.” (See page 70 for the Configuration Main Menu, and see page 279 for a written description of Bar Code Quality.) • Print Quality (IGP/PGL emulation): Select “Dataprocessing.” (See page 129 for the IGP/PGL Configuration Menu, and see page 143 for a written description of Print Quality.) • Print Quality (IGP/VGL emulation): Select “Dataprocessing.” (See page 148 for the IGP/VGL Configuration Menu, and see page 157 for a written description of Print Quality.) Coax/Twinax Emulation You can increase print speed by selecting the Enable mode for the Early Print Complete configuration parameter in the Coax/Twinax Emulation. However, if an error occurs while in Enable mode, you may lose data. For more information, refer to “Early Print Complete” on page 172. (For the Coax/Twinax Emulation menu, refer to page 167.) 69 Chapter 4 Main Menu Main Menu OFFLINE QUICK SETUP page 73 Host Interface Device ID 2 Adapter Address 1 Ethernet Address 1 WLAN Address 1 Active IGP Emul 3 PGL SFCC Printer Protocol 4 Form Length 4 Form Width 4 P-Series SFCC 4 Margins 5 Form Length 5 Form Width 5 Vert Forms 6 Horiz Forms 6 Page Length Rep. 7 Max Line Width 7 Ribbon End Point Save Config Power Up Config CONFIG. CONTROL page 82 Load Config. Save Config. Print Config. Delete Config. Power-Up Config. Protect Configs. Name Configs Reset Cfg Names HOST INTERFACE page 85 Auto Switching* Dataproducts Centronics Serial Twinax 1 Coax 1 E-Net Adapter 1 IEEE 1284 Ethernet 1 NETWORK SETUP1 page 108 Adapter Address 1 Adapter Params 1 Ethernet Address 1 Ethernet Params 1 WLAN Address 1 WLAN Params 1 1If IGP/PGL* IGP/VGL (not shown if any below are installed) ANSI (if installed) PCL-II (if installed) LG (if installed) LP+ (with any above) installed If Twinax is selected 3 If VGL is enabled 4 If LP+ is selected 5 If ANSI is installed 6 If LG is installed 7 If PCL-II is installed 2 Figure 22. Main Menu Configuration 70 ACTIVE (IGP) EMUL page 125 MainSpeed Menu Optimizing Print EMULATION page 166 CTHI 1 LinePrinter+ 44/48XX-ANSI 1 IGP/PGL 1 IGP/VGL 1 IPDS 1 LG 1 PCL-II 1 PRINTER CONTROL page 276 Ribbon End Point Eject Function Open Platen @ BOF Barcode Quality Tear Bar Dist. Unidirectional Display Language Accented Char 3 ADVANCED USER page 281 DIAGNOSTICS page 289 Ptx Setup Option 3 Hex Dump Mode Power-up State Downloaded Fonts 3 PMD Fault Power Stacker 1 Auto Elevator 1 Auto Locking File System Set Sharing 3 Shuttle Timeout Slow Paper Slew Alarm Power Saver Time Pwr Save Control Cancel Key Set Lock Key Ribbon Action Ink Saver Mode Printer Tests Test Width Paper Out Dots System Memory Print Statistics DRAM Avail. Flash Avail. 1 If installed Ethernet is installed 3 Not available in LG or PCL-II 2 If 71 Chapter 4 Main Menu Brief descriptions follow for the first-level configuration menu options: 72 • QUICK SETUP — These options allow quick access to the most frequently changed or inputted parameters during the installation of the printer. • CONFIG. CONTROL — These options allow you to save, print, load, delete, name, and reset entire sets of configuration parameters. • HOST INTERFACE — These options allow you to select either the Serial RS-232, Serial RS-422, Centronics® parallel, Dataproducts® parallel and Long Lines, Ethernet™, IEEE® 1284 parallel, Auto Switching, Coax or Twinax interface for the printer. This menu also allows you to configure several parameters for each interface. • NETWORK SETUP — This option allows you to select from Ethernet Address options and Ethernet Parameters options. • ACTIVE (IGP) EMUL — This menu allows you to select the PGL or VGL emulation from the menu if IGP is installed. • EMULATION — This menu allows you to configure the options which are available for the current operating (active) emulation. For example, if LinePrinter+ is the active emulation, then the LinePrinter+ emulation options can be configured using this menu. • PRINTER CONTROL — These options allow you to select parameters common to a general user, such as display language and Barcode quality. • ADVANCED USER — These options allow you to select several advanced operating parameters for the printer, such as the speed at which paper will advance when slewing. • DIAGNOSTICS — These options include the diagnostic tests, system memory, and statistics of the printer. QUICK Optimizing PrintSETUP Speed QUICK SETUP QUICK SETUP (from page 70) Host Interface Auto Switching* Centronics Dataproducts Serial IEEE 1284 Coax 1 Twinax 1 Ethernet 1 WLAN Address IP Address 3 Subnet Mask 3 Gateway Address 3 MAC Address 3 DHCP 3 Printer Protocol P-Series* P-Series XQ Serial Matrix Proprinter XL Epson FX 6 * = Factory Default 1 If installed 2 If Enet is selected 3 If Wireless is selected 4 If VGL is enabled 5 If VGL is selected Device ID IPDS* 5225 4234-2 Active IGP EMUL 4 IGP/PGL* IGP/VGL 4 Form Length 6 Funct. of Lines 66 lines* 1-192 lines If LP+ is selected If ANSI is installed 8 If LG is installed 9 If PCL-II is installed 10 If PGL is selected 7 Adapter Address 1 IP Address 2 Subnet Mask 2 Gateway Address 2 MAC Address 2 DHCP 2 PGL SFCC 10 7E* Ethernet Address 1 IP Address 2 Subnet Mask 2 Gateway Address 2 MAC Address 2 DHCP 2 VGL SFCC 5 5E* 1-FF Form Width 6 Funct. of CPI 132 characters* 1-272 characters Select CPI 10.0 CPI* 12.0 CPI 13.3 CPI 15.0 CPI 17.1 CPI 20.0 CPI 73 Chapter 4 QUICK SETUP 6 If LP+ is selected If ANSI is installed 8 If LG is installed 9 If PCL-II is installed * = Factory Default If installed 2 If Enet is selected 3 If Wireless is selected 4 If VGL is enabled 5 If VGL is selected 1 QUICK SETUP (continued) Select CPI 6.0 LPI* 8.0 LPI 10.3 LPI Form Width7 Funct. of CPI 136 Characters* (1-272) Max Line Width 9 13.2 Inches* 13.6 Inches 74 7 Margins 7 Form Length 7 Left Margin Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Funct. of Lines 66 Lines* (1-192) Vert Forms 8 Horiz Forms 8 Page Length Rep 9 Bot. Frm 66/6* (0-198) Top Mrg 0/6* (0-198) Left Mrg 0.00* (0-198) Top Mrg 0/6* (0-198) P-Series SFCC 6 1* 00-7F Ribbon End Point Darker +6 Darker +5 Darker +4 Darker +3 Darker +2 Darker +1 Normal* Lighter -1 Lighter -2 Lighter -3 Lighter -4 Lighter -5 Lighter -6 Lighter -7 Lighter -8 Lighter -9 Lighter -10 Save Config 1* 2-8 Inches/Page* Lines/Page Power Up Config Factory* 1-8 QUICK Optimizing PrintSETUP Speed Host Interface The Host Interface menu enables you to select and configure interfaces between the printer and your host computer. Device ID This parameter defines the printer emulation as IPDS, 4234-2 or 5225. After the emulation has been changed, a POR status is sent to the host. IPDS is the default. Adapter Address • IP Address. A numeric address such as 123.45.61.23 which identifies a printer or server in a LAN or WAN. • Subnet Mask. A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or subnets. This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be forwarded to other subnets. • Gateway Address. A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device (gateway) that translates data between two incompatible networks, which can include protocol translation. • MAC Address. This menu item is the Manufacturer’s Assigned Number, and is unique for each printer. It is read-only. • DHCP. You can enable/disable the DHCP protocol using this option, but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting. 75 Chapter 4 QUICK SETUP Ethernet Address • IP Address. A numeric address such as 123.45.61.23 which identifies a printer or server in a LAN or WAN. • Subnet Mask. A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or subnets. This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be forwarded to other subnets. • Gateway Address. A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device (gateway) that translates data between two incompatible networks, which can include protocol translation. • MAC Address. This menu item is the Manufacturer’s Assigned Number, and is unique for each printer. It is read-only. • DHCP. You can enable/disable the DHCP protocol using this option, but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting. WLAN Address 76 • IP Address. A numeric address such as 123.45.61.23 which identifies a printer or server in a LAN or WAN. • Subnet Mask. A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or subnets. This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be forwarded to other subnets. • Gateway Address. A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device (gateway) that translates data between two incompatible networks, which can include protocol translation. • MAC Address. This menu item is the Manufacturer’s Assigned Number, and is unique for each printer. It is read-only. • DHCP. You can enable/disable the DHCP protocol using this option, but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting. QUICK Optimizing PrintSETUP Speed Active IGP Emulation The Active Emulation menu enables you to activate either the PGL or VGL emulation. PGL SFCC You can specify which hex code (1-FF) will be used as the Special Function Control Character (SFCC). The SFCC denotes that the following data is an IGP command. • • 7E (the default) 1 – FF VGL SFCC You can specify which hex code (1-FF) will be used as the Special Function Control Character (SFCC). The SFCC denotes that the following data is an IGP command. • • 5E (the default) 1 – FF Printer Protocol Select the LinePrinter+ protocol you wish to use. Refer to the LinePrinter Plus Programmer's Reference Manual for more information. Form Length Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page. You can set the form length in inches, millimeters (mm), or as a function of the current lpi (lines per inch). Form Width The form width can be specified in inches, millimeters, or as a function of the current cpi (characters per inch). The forms width set should not exceed the actual paper width. 77 Chapter 4 QUICK SETUP Select CPI This parameter lets you specify the characters per inch (cpi) values. Select LPI This parameter lets you specify the lines per inch (lpi) values. P-Series SFCC This parameter allows you to select which ASCII codes will function as the Special Function Control Code (SFCC) command delimiter. P-Series codes can use hex 00 through hex 7F. Options include the following: • • • • • SOH (hex 01) (the default) ESC (hex 1B) ETX (hex 03) CIRCUMFLEX (hex 5E) – also called caret (^) TILDE (hex 7E) – (~) NOTE: SOH, ETX, and ESC are non-printables. The characters (^) and (~) are printable; however, do not use them as printables in the host data stream if either is chosen as a delimiter because print errors will occur. Margins 78 • Left Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far left edge of the page, and column numbering increments from left to right. • Right Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far right edge of the page, and column numbering increments from right to left. • Top Margin. Defined in lines, starting from line zero at the top of the page and incrementing from the top down. • Bottom Margin. Defined in lines, starting from line zero at the bottom of the page and incrementing from the bottom up. QUICK Optimizing PrintSETUP Speed Form Length Form length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page. You can set the form length in inches, millimeters (mm), or as a function of the current lpi (lines per inch). Form Width The form width can be specified in inches, millimeters, or as a function of the current cpi (characters per inch). The forms width set should not exceed the actual paper width. Vert Forms • Bot Frm 66/6 (default). This option sets the bottom margin for the forms. You must specify the bottom margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch), ranging from 0 to 198 lines (33 inches). The default setting is 66. Press the right arrow to increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. Selecting a value for this option resets the top margin to 0, so the top margin must be redefined after this option is selected. • Top Mrg 6/0 This option sets the top margin for the forms. You must specify the top margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch), ranging from 0 to 198 lines (33 inches). The default setting is 0. Press the right arrow to increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The margins will automatically adjust so that the top and bottom margins do not cross each other. 79 Chapter 4 QUICK SETUP Horiz Forms • Left Mgr 0.00 (default). This sets the left margin for the forms. You must specify the left margin in 1/10 inch increments, from 0 to 13.1 inches. The default value is 0. Press the right arrow to increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The margins will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross each other. • Right Mrg 0/6. This sets the right margin for the forms. You must specify the right margin in 1/10 inch increments, from 0.1 to 13.2 inches. The default value is 13.2. Press NEXT to increase the value, PREV to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The margins will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross each other. Page Length Rep • Inches/Page (default). Allows the user to set the page length in inches. • Lines/Page. Allows the user to set the page length in number of lines. Max Line Width Set the maximum line width at either 13.2 inches or the maximum width of the printer. Ribbon End Point This parameter adjusts the point at which the system will declare the ribbon as being expended. The life count will always be from 100% to 0%, but if a darker setting is selected 0% will be reached more quickly. If a lighter setting is selected, the system will extend the time it takes to reach 0%. 80 QUICK Optimizing PrintSETUP Speed Save Config This option allows you to save up to eight configurations to meet different print job requirements. This eliminates the need to change the parameter settings for each new job. The configurations are stored in memory and will not be lost if you turn off the printer. If the Protect Configs. parameter is enabled, the new configuration will not be saved unless the existing configuration has been deleted first. The factory default configuration cannot be changed. See “Saving Your New Configuration” on page 61 for details. Power Up Config This option allows you to specify which of the nine configurations (Factory or 1-8) will be the power-up configuration. 81 Chapter 4 CONFIG. CONTROL CONFIG. CONTROL The CONFIG. CONTROL menu allows you to control your printer’s configurations according to the specifications necessary for your print jobs. * = Factory Default CONFIG. CONTROL (from page 70) Load Config. Factory* 1-8 Name Configs 1-8 Save Config. 1* 2-8 Print Config. Current Short* Current Full Factory Power-Up All 1-8 Delete Config. 1* 2-8 Power-Up Config. Factory* 1-8 Protect Configs. Disable* Enable Reset Cfg Names 1* 2-8 All Load Config. The printer can store numerous configurations in memory. This parameter allows you to select and load a specific configuration. 82 CONFIG.Print CONTROL Optimizing Speed Save Config. This option allows you to save up to eight configurations to meet different print job requirements. This eliminates the need to change the parameter settings for each new job. The configurations are stored in memory and will not be lost if you turn off the printer. If the Protect Configs. parameter is enabled, the new configuration will not be saved unless the existing configuration has been deleted first. The factory default configuration cannot be changed. See “Saving Your New Configuration” on page 61 for details. Print Config. This option is used to print a listing of various stored printer configurations. Store printouts of your configurations in a safe place for quick referral. Delete Config. You can delete one or all of your eight customized configurations. The factory default configuration cannot be deleted. Power-Up Config. You can specify which of the nine configurations (Factory or 1-8) will be the power-up configuration. Protect Configs. You can specify whether or not a new configuration should overwrite an existing configuration when you activate the Save Configs. parameter. When disabled (default), the new configuration will overwrite the existing configuration. When enabled, the new configuration will not overwrite the existing configuration, and the message “CONFIG. EXISTS / Delete First” displays. 83 Chapter 4 CONFIG. CONTROL Name Configs You may specify a 15-character name which can be used to refer to a configuration. The name you enter for a configuration will be used in the Load Config., Save Config., Print Config., Delete Config., and Power-Up Config. menus. The name can only be cleared by using the Reset Cfg Names menu. When you move into the Name Configs. menu, the top line of the display shows the current configuration name. The second line of the display is initially the same as the top line. You can modify the second line of the display without affecting the top line until the ENTER key is pressed, which sets the modified name. Press the UP or DOWN ( = or > ) keys to cycle through the values available for that character at the cursor location. Press the NEXT (<) key to move to the next character to be modified. Press the PREV key (;) to go back to a character you have already modified. Continue until you have entered the name you want to give to this configuration, then press ENTER to save. The name you entered will now represent this configuration on the printer's front panel. To exit this menu without saving, press any key other than the ENTER key. The configuration name will revert to the last saved value. Reset Cfg Names You can reset specific configuration names back to the default value of the configuration number. 84 HOST INTERFACE Optimizing Print Speed HOST INTERFACE * = Factory Defaultt HOST INTERFACE (from page 70) Auto Switching* Twinax Coax IEEE 1284 Centronics Dataproducts (see page 86) (Available with CT Option) (Available with CT Option) (see page 88) (see page 91) (see page 94) Serial E-Net Adapter Ethernet (see page 98) (see page 106) (see page 107) The Host Interface Menu enables you to select and configure one of many types of interfaces between the printer and your host computer. The currently selected interface is indicated with an asterisk on the control panel message display. Each interface has its own submenu with a set of interface parameters which can be configured. IMPORTANT When switching between Twinax, Coax, or Auto Switching, the printer will load the power-up configuration and the new interface parameters. Any settings made and not saved before selecting these interfaces will be lost. 85 Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE Auto Switching Submenu * = Factory Default 1 If Installed Auto Switching (from page 85) Parallel Hotport Port Type Centronics* (see page 91 for options) Dataproducts (see page 94 for options) IEEE 1284 (see page 88 for options) Disable E-Net Adapter (see page 106 for options) Trickle Time 1/4 sec* 1/2 sec 1 sec 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec 16 sec Off Timeout 10 sec.* (10-60) Report Status Disable* Enable 86 Serial Hotport Port Type RS 232* RS 422 Disable Trickle Time 1/4 sec* 1/2 sec 1 sec 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec 16 sec Off Timeout 10 sec.* (10-60) Report Status Disable* Enable Ethernet Hotport1 Timeout 10 sec.* (10-60) C/T Hotport1 Port Type Twinax* Coax Disable Timeout 10 sec.* (10-60) Report Status Disable* Enable Auto Switching Submenu Auto Switching Gives the printer the ability to handle multiple data streams sequentially. With Auto Switching, the printer can service hosts attached to the serial, parallel, Ethernet, coax and twinax ports as if they were the only interface connected. For example, if the host computer sends one print job to the RS-232 serial port and a separate print job to the IEEE 1284 parallel port, the printer's Auto Switching is able to handle both jobs, in the order they were received. The user does not have to reconfigure the selected interface between jobs. Port Type Select the types of parallel, serial and/or C/T interfaces which are connected to the printer. For example, if your printer is attached to one host with a Centronics connection and a second host with an RS-422 serial connection, you would select Centronics under the Parallel Hotport menu, RS-422 under the Serial Hotport menu, and Disable under the C/T Hotport menu. Trickle Time When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In order to support this feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for future use. For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then receives a second print job from the parallel port, the data from the parallel port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port. The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its buffer too fast. This function is not applicable for C/T hotport. 87 Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE Timeout This is the value used by the printer to time out from the current port and check the other selected port types for data to print. When the printer has not received data from the host after a certain period of time, it needs to timeout in order to service the other ports. Report Status • Disable (default). When a fault occurs on the printer, only the active port reports the fault to the host. • Enable. The port will report any fault even when it is not the current active port. IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu * = Factory Default IEEE 1284 (from page 85) Prime Signal Enable* Disable TOF Action Reset* Do Nothing Buffer Size in K 16* 1-16 Auto Trickle Disable* Enable Trickle Time 1/4 sec* 1/2 sec 1 sec 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec 16 sec Off Offline Process Disable* Enable The IEEE 1284 interface is faster and more versatile than Centronics and supports bidirectional communication. Configuration of this interface is controlled from the host. Refer to “IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface” on page 298 more details about the available modes (Compatibility, Nibble, and Byte). 88 IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu Prime Signal • Disable (default). The parallel port will not perform a warm start (reboot) if the host asserts the prime signal. • Enable. The parallel port will perform a warm start (reboot) if the host asserts the prime signal. TOF Action • Reset (default). A form feed is performed before a warm start when the prime signal is asserted from the host. This setting is used only if the prime signal parameter is enabled. • Do Nothing. Nothing occurs before a warm start when the prime signal is asserted from the host. Buffer Size in K This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the IEEE 1284 parallel port buffer. You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments. Auto Trickle Auto Trickle is used to prevent a host computer from timing out because the parallel interface was busy for too long. When Auto Trickle is enabled and the printer's buffers are almost full, the printer will begin to trickle data in (at the rate set in the Trickle Time menu) until the buffers start to empty out. Trickle Time When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In order to support this feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for future use. 89 Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then receives a second print job from the parallel port, the data from the parallel port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port. The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its buffer too fast. This function is not applicable for C/T hotport. Offline Process 90 • Disable (the default). When set to disable, the printer does not process parallel/network data while offline. • Enable. When set to enable, the printer continues to process (but not print) the current network/parallel job while the printer is offline until the printer's buffer is full. Centronics (Parallel) Submenu Centronics (Parallel) Submenu * = Factory Default Centronics (from page 85) Data Bit 8 Enable* Disable Prime Signal Enable* Disable PI Ignored Enable* Disable Data Polarity Resp. Polarity Standard* Inverted Standard* Inverted Buffer Size in K TOF Action Reset* Do Nothing 16* (1-16) Auto Trickle Disable* Enable Busy on Strobe Enable* Disable Latch Data On Leading* Trailing Trickle Time 1/4 sec* 1/2 sec 1 sec 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec 16 sec Off Data Bit 8 • Enable (default). Allows access to the extended ASCII character set. • Disable. The printer interprets bit 8 of each incoming data character as a zero, regardless of its actual setting. 91 Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE PI Ignored The PI (Paper Instruction) signal is used to control vertical paper motion. • Enable (default). Ignores the PI signal and treats the data as characters or control codes. • Disable. Causes the printer to interpret the eight data lines as VFU commands when the PI signal is true. Data Polarity The Data Polarity parameter must be set to match the data polarity of your host computer. • Standard (default). Does not expect the host computer to invert the data. • Inverted. Expects the data received on the data lines from the host computer to be inverted. Ones become zeros, and vice versa. Resp. Polarity The Resp. Polarity parameter must be set to match the response polarity of your host computer. • • Standard (default). Does not invert the response signal. Inverted. Inverts the response signal sent to the host computer. Busy On Strobe • Enable (default). Asserts a busy signal after each character is received. • Disable. Asserts a busy signal only when the print buffers are full. Latch Data On Specifies whether the data is read on the leading or trailing edge of the data strobe signal. 92 Centronics (Parallel) Submenu Prime Signal • Enable (default). The parallel port will perform a warm start (reboot) if the host asserts the prime signal. • Disable. The parallel port will not perform a warm start (reboot) if the host asserts the prime signal. TOF Action • Reset (default). A form feed is performed before a warm start when the prime signal is asserted from the host. This setting is used only if the prime signal parameter is enabled. • Do Nothing. Nothing occurs before a warm start when the prime signal is asserted from the host. Buffer Size in K Configures the amount of memory allocated for the Centronics parallel port buffer. You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments. Auto Trickle Auto Trickle is used to prevent a host computer from timing out because the parallel interface was busy for too long. When Auto Trickle is enabled and the printer's buffers are almost full, the printer will begin to trickle data in (at the rate set in the Trickle Time menu) until the buffers start to empty out. Trickle Time When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In order to support this feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for future use. 93 Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then receives a second print job from the parallel port, the data from the parallel port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port. The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its buffer too fast. This function is not applicable for C/T hotport. Dataproducts (Standard) Submenu * = Factory Default Dataproducts (from page 85) Data Bit 8 Enable* Disable TOF Action Reset* Do Nothing 94 PI Ignored Enable* Disable Buffer Size in K 16* (1-16) Data Polarity Standard* Inverted Auto Trickle Disable* Enable Resp. Polarity Standard* Inverted Trickle Time 1/4 sec* 1/2 sec 1 sec 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec 16 sec Off Latch Data On Middle* Trailing Leading Prime Signal Disable* Enable Dataproducts (Standard) Submenu Data Bit 8 • Enable (default). Allows access to the extended ASCII character set. • Disable. The printer interprets bit 8 of each incoming data character as a zero, regardless of its actual setting. PI Ignored The PI (Paper Instruction) signal is used to control vertical paper motion. • Enable (default). Causes the printer to interpret the eight data lines as DVFU commands when the PI signal is true. • Disable. Ignores the PI signal and treats the data as characters or control codes. Data Polarity The Data Polarity parameter must be set to match the data polarity of your host computer. • Standard (default). Does not expect the host computer to invert the data. • Inverted. Expects the data received on the data lines from the host computer to be inverted. Ones become zeros, and zeros become ones. Resp. Polarity The Response Polarity parameter must be set to match the response polarity of your host computer. • • Standard (default). Does not invert the response signal. Inverted. Inverts the response signal sent to the host computer. Latch Data On Specifies whether the data is read on the leading, middle, or trailing edge of the data strobe signal. The default is Middle. 95 Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE Prime Signal • Disable (default). The parallel port will not perform a warm start (reboot) if the host asserts the prime signal. • Enable. The parallel port will perform a warm start (reboot) if the host asserts the prime signal. TOF Action • Reset (default). A form feed is performed before a warm start when the prime signal is asserted from the host. This setting is used only if the prime signal parameter is enabled. • Do Nothing. Nothing occurs before a warm start when the prime signal is asserted from the host. Buffer Size in K Configures the amount of memory allocated for the Dataproducts parallel port buffer. You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments. Auto Trickle Auto Trickle is used to prevent a host computer from timing out because the parallel interface was busy for too long. When Auto Trickle is enabled and the printer's buffers are almost full, the printer will begin to trickle data in (at the rate set in the Trickle Time menu) until the buffers start to empty out. Trickle Time When the printer is printing data from a host and a second job is received by the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed. In order to support this feature, the port has to be able to accept data from the host and store it for future use. 96 Dataproducts (Standard) Submenu For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then receives a second print job from the parallel port, the data from the parallel port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel port. The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its buffer too fast. This function is not applicable for C/T hotport. 97 Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE Serial Submenu * = Factory Default Serial (from page 85) Interface Type RS 232* RS 422 Data Term Ready True* On-Line and BNF Off-Line or BF On-Line False One Char Enquiry Disable* Enable 98 Data Protocol Baud Rate XON/XOFF* ETX/ACK ACK/NAK Series1 1 Char Series1 2 Char DTR 9600 Baud* 19200 Baud 38400 Baud 57600 Baud 115200 Baud 600 Baud 1200 Baud 2400 Baud 4800 Baud Request to Send Buffer Size in K On-Line and BNF* 16* Off-Line or BF (1-16) On-Line False True Framing Errors Enable* Disable Word Length 8 8* 7 Stop Bits 1 1* 2 Poll Character 00 Hex* (0-FF hex) Parity None* Odd Even Mark Sense Poll Response 0 ms* (1-30 ms) Idle Response Disable* Enable Serial Submenu Interface Type This parameter allows you to select either the RS-232 or RS-422 serial port interface. Data Protocol You can select one of the following serial interface protocols to meet the host interface requirements. • XON / XOFF (default). The printer controls the flow of communication from the host by turning the transmission on and off. In some situations, such as when the buffer is full or the timing of signals is too slow or too fast, the printer will tell the host to stop transmission by sending an XOFF character. An XOFF character is sent when the number of empty bytes in the buffer is less than or equal to 25 percent of the buffer size. If the host keeps sending data after an XOFF is sent, the printer firmware will continue to send an XOFF for every 16 characters received. When cleared, the printer will resume receiving data (XON). The data does not have any End of Text codes; XON / XOFF is a non-block protocol. • ETX / ACK. End of Text / Acknowledge. The host controls the flow of communication to the printer by sending a block of data and ending the block with an End of Text (ETX) signal. When the printer receives the ETX signal, it will acknowledge the ETX, thereby acknowledging it has received the entire block of data. • ACK / NAK. ACK means acknowledge; the device acknowledges it has accepted a transmission. NAK means negative acknowledge; the device did not receive the transmission. 99 Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE SERIES1 1 CHAR. The printer controls the flow of communication from the host by turning the transmission on and off using response characters sent to the host. If the number of valid bytes in the buffer reaches 75 percent of the buffer size, the online or offline and buffer full response character is sent. If the buffer is completely full, an online or offline buffer full response is sent every time a character is sent from the host. Whenever the printer state changes to online or offline, the appropriate response character is sent. If the idle response option is enabled, the printer will send a response character every two seconds while the number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of the buffer size. If a poll character is received (configurable from the Poll Character xx Hex option on the front panel from hex 0 through FF), the printer will send a response character n milliseconds later (configurable from the Poll Character xx MS on the front panel from 0 through 30). This n milliseconds is called the poll delay. The poll character will be removed from the input data stream and will not be processed. This may cause problems with the transmission of binary data (e.g., control codes, bit image, etc.). If a poll delay is started due to the receipt of a poll character and another poll character is received, the second poll character has no effect and is removed from the input data stream. If a transition (from buffer full to empty or online to offline) occurs during a poll delay, the new printer state will be sent at the end of the poll delay. 100 Serial Submenu The response characters are described in Table 3. Table 3. Series1 1 Char Response Characters Printer State Online and Buffer Empty • Response CR Online and Buffer Full 3 Offline and Buffer Empty 0 Offline and Buffer Full 2 SERIES1 2 CHAR. This protocol behaves exactly the same as the Series1 Char except there is a two-character response to the host. The response characters are described in Table 4. Table 4. Series1 2 Char Response Characters Printer State • Response Online and Buffer Empty 1 CR Online and Buffer Full 3 CR Offline and Buffer Empty 0 CR Offline and Buffer Full 2 CR DTR. The printer controls the data flow by sending this hardware signal to the host. If there is enough room in the printer buffer, the printer will send a high signal; if the buffer is full, the printer will send a low signal. DTR tells the host if it is safe to send more data. (If the host sends data during an unsafe condition, data will be lost.) DTR is not available when RS-422 is selected. 101 Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE Baud Rate Sets the baud rate of the serial interface in the printer. Baud rate is the speed at which serial data is transferred between the host computer and the printer. The choices for the RS-232 and RS-422 interfaces are 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 Baud. The default is 9600 Baud. NOTE: If you select a baud rate that is greater than 19200, you may need to use RS-422 or select a lower baud rate to prevent data loss. You also may need to increase the Buffer Size in K parameter to improve performance. Word Length Sets the length of the serial data word. The length of the data word can be set to 7 or 8 bits, and must match the corresponding data bits setting in the host computer. Stop Bits 1 Sets the number of stop bits in the serial data word. Either one or two stop bits can be selected. The setting must match the corresponding stop bit setting in the host computer. Parity Set for odd parity, even parity, mark, sense, or no parity. The setting must match the corresponding parity setting in the host computer. 102 Serial Submenu Data Term Ready This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal is generated. This signal indicates if the printer is ready to receive data. • • True (default). Continuously asserts the DTR signal. • Off Line or BF (buffer full). Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is offline or the internal serial buffer is full. • • On Line. Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is online. On Line and BNF (buffer not full). Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full. False. Never asserts the DTR signal. Request To Send This configuration is part of hardware flow control and determines when the Request to Send (RTS) signal is generated. This signal indicates whether or not the printer is ready to receive data. • On Line and BNF (default). Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full. • Off Line or BF. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is offline or the internal serial buffer is full. • • • On Line. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online. False. Never asserts the RTS signal. True. Continuously asserts the RTS signal. 103 Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE Buffer Size in K This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the serial port buffer. You may specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments. NOTE: If you select a baud rate that is 19200 or greater, you may need to increase the Buffer Size in K parameter to improve performance. Poll Character This option is for the Series1 protocol. Whenever the printer receives this character, it sends a response to the host indicating the current state of the printer (see Series1 protocol). It may be configured from 0 through FF hexadecimal. Poll Response This option is for the Series1 protocol. After receiving a poll character, the printer will wait the poll response time in milliseconds before sending the response. It may be configured from 0 through 30. Idle Response This option is for the Series1 protocol. • • 104 Disable (default) Enable. The printer will send a response character every two seconds while the number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of the buffer size. Serial Submenu One Char Enquiry The One Char Enquiry mode uses the Poll Character to detect a request from the host and sends a response back to the host. This option also allows you to turn on and off this feature. Table 5. One Char Enquiry Response Characters Printer State Response (hex) Online and Buffer Not Full 22 Online and Buffer Full 23 Offline and Buffer Not Full 20 Offline and Buffer Full 21 The Poll Character is removed from the data stream. If the Data Protocol is set to ETX/ACK, ACK/NAK, or Series 1, One Char Enquiry is automatically disabled. Framing Errors Possible errors that can occur when the printer’s serial interface settings do not match those of the host computer. • Enable (default). If a framing error occurs, a fault message will display on the control panel. • Disable. If a framing error occurs, a fault message will not display on the control panel. 105 Chapter 4 HOST INTERFACE E-Net Adapter Submenu * = Factory Default E-Net Adapter (from page 85) Buffer Size in K 16* 1-16 The E-Net Adapter interface allows you to locate the printer on a LAN rather than attach the host directly into the printer. The detailed configuration of this option is given in the PrintNet User's Manual. Buffer Size in K This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the Ethernet buffer. You can specify between 1-16 Kbytes. The default is 16 Kbytes. 106 Ethernet Submenu Ethernet Submenu * = Factory Default Ethernet (from page 85) Buffer Size in K 16* 1-16 The Ethernet interface allows you to locate the printer on a LAN rather than attach the host directly into the printer. The detailed configuration of this option is given in the Network Interface Card User's Manual. Buffer Size in K This option configures the amount of memory allocated for the Ethernet buffer. You can specify between 1 and 16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments. The default is 16 Kbytes. 107 Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP MENU NETWORK SETUP MENU NETWORK SETUP (from page 70) ADAPTER ADDRESS 1 See page 109. WLAN PARAMS 3 See page 119. ADAPTER PARAMS 1 See page 110. ETHERNET ADDRESS 2 ETHERNET PARAMS 2 See page 113. See page 115. WLAN Kerberos 4 See page 121. WLAN ADDRESS 3 See page 117. WLAN LEAP 5 See page 123. 1 Only if the Ethernet Adapter feature is installed. if the Integrated Ethernet feature is installed. 3 Only if the Wireless Adapter feature is installed. 4 Only if a Symbol radio card is installed. 5 Only if a Cisco radio card is installed. 2 Only 108 ADAPTER ADDRESS ADAPTER ADDRESS * = Factory Default ADAPTER ADDRESS (from page 108) IP Address Subnet Mask xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Gateway Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx MAC Address hhhhhhhhhhhh DHCP Disable* Enable IP Address A numeric address such as 123.45.61.23 which identifies a printer or server in a LAN or WAN. Subnet Mask A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or subnets. This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be forwarded to other subnets. Gateway Address A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device (gateway) that translates data between two incompatible networks, which can include protocol translation. MAC Address This menu item is the Manufacturer’s Assigned Number, and is unique for each printer. It is read-only. 109 Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP MENU DHCP You can enable/disable the DHCP protocol using this option, but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting. The options include: • • Disable (default) Enable. ADAPTER PARAMS ADAPTER PARAMS (from page 108) * = Factory Default Novell Protocol Nest Serv Type Enable* Disable Auto* Bindery NDS IPDS Data Port 5001* 1023-65535 NetBIOS Protocol Enable* Disable Novell Frame ASCII Data Port Auto Sensing* Ethernet II Ethernet 802.3 Ethernet 802.2 802.2 Snap 9100* 1023 - 65535 Keep Alive Timer Ethernet Speed 3 Minutes* 2 - 10 Minutes Auto Select* 10 Half Duplex 10 Full Duplex 100 Half Duplex 100 Full Duplex Job Control Standard* Enhanced Off You may enable or disable the Novell or NetBIOS Protocols within this menu, as well as selecting which Novell Frame scheme to use in processing Novell signals. See the Novell chapter in the Network Interface Card User's Manual for more details. 110 ADAPTER PARAMS Novell Protocol This option determines whether the Novell protocol will be available. The selections are as indicated below: • Enable (default). Makes the Novell protocol available with the ethernet installed. • Disable. Makes the Novell protocol unavailable during printer operation. Nest Serv Type You can change the Nest Server using this option, but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting. The options are Bindery (the factory default), NDS, and Auto. NetBIOS Protocol This option determines whether the NetBIOS protocol will be available. The selections are as indicated below: • Enable (default). Makes the NetBIOS protocol available with the ethernet installed. • Disable. Makes the NetBIOS protocol unavailable during printer operation. Novell Frame This selection determines which framing scheme will be used in processing Novell signals. • • • • • Auto Sensing (default) Ethernet II Ethernet 802.3 Ethernet 802.2 802.2 Snap 111 Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP MENU ASCII Data Port This option sets the port number for ASCII print jobs. The data port number needs to match your host system setting. • • 9100 (default) 1023 - 65535 IPDS Data Port This option allows you to set the port number for IPDS print jobs only if the IPDS option is installed. The range is 0 - 5000, and the factory default is 5001. Keep Alive Timer This is the time that the Keep Alive Timer will run. With the Keep Alive Timer on, the tcp connection will stay connected even after the print job has terminated. • • 3 Minutes (default) 2 - 10 Minutes Ethernet Speed This menu option only appears if a 10/100Base-T network interface card (NIC) is installed. The Ethernet Speed menu allows compatibility with different systems and networks. The factory default is Auto Select. 112 • Auto Select. (default) This setting tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to perform an auto detection scheme and configure itself to be 10 Half Duplex, 10 Full Duplex, 100 Half Duplex, or 100 Full Duplex. • 10 Half Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10 Megabits per second using half duplex. • 10 Full Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10 Megabits per second using full duplex. ETHERNET ADDRESS • 100 Half Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 100 Megabits per second using half duplex. • 100 Full Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 100 Megabits per second using full duplex. Job Control The job control mode has three options: • Standard (default). The NIC waits for the printer to finish receiving the current job before sending another job. The status line shows “done” when the job is completely received by the NIC. This is the default. • Enhanced. The NIC waits for the printer to finish receiving the current job before sending another job. The status line shows “done” when the job is fully printed. • Off. No job synchonization between the NIC and the printer. ETHERNET ADDRESS * = Factory Default ETHERNET ADDRESS (from page 108) IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Subnet Mask xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Gateway Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx MAC Address hhhhhhhhhhhh DHCP Disable* Enable IP Address A numeric address such as 123.45.61.23 which identifies a printer or server in a LAN or WAN. 113 Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP MENU Subnet Mask A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or subnets. This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be forwarded to other subnets. Gateway Address A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device (gateway) that translates data between two incompatible networks, which can include protocol translation. MAC Address This menu item is the Manufacturer’s Assigned Number, and is unique for each printer. It is read-only. DHCP You can enable/disable the DHCP protocol using this option, but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting. The options include: • • 114 Disable (default) Enable. ETHERNET PARAMS ETHERNET PARAMS ETHERNET PARAMS (from page 108) NetBIOS Protocol Enable* Disable * = Factory Default ASCII Data Port 9100* 1023 - 65535 IPDS Data Port 5001* 1023 - 65535 Keep Alive Timer Ethernet Speed 3 Minutes* 2 - 10 Minutes Auto Select* 10 Half Duplex 10 Full Duplex 100 Half Duplex 100 Full Duplex Job Control Standard* Enhanced Off The ETHERNET PARAMS menu helps your printer communicate on a network. For information on assigning the IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet Mask, and MAC Address, refer to the Network Interface Card User's Manual. NetBIOS Protocol This option determines whether the NetBIOS protocol will be available. The selections are as indicated below: • Enable (default). Makes the NetBIOS protocol available with the ethernet installed. • Disable. Makes the NetBIOS protocol unavailable during printer operation. 115 Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP MENU ASCII Data Port This option sets the port number for ASCII print jobs. The data port number needs to match your host system setting. • • 9100 (default) 1023 - 65535 IPDS Data Port This option allows you to set the port number for IPDS print jobs only if the IPDS option is installed. The range is 1023 - 65535, and the factory default is 5001. Keep Alive Timer This is the time that the Keep Alive Timer will run. With the Keep Alive Timer on, the tcp connection will stay connected even after the print job has terminated. • • 3 Minutes (default) 2 - 10 Minutes Ethernet Speed This menu option only appears if a 10/100Base-T network interface card (NIC) is installed. The Ethernet Speed menu allows compatibility with different systems and networks. The factory default is Auto Select. 116 • Auto Select. (default) This setting tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to perform an auto detection scheme and configure itself to be 10 Half Duplex, 10 Full Duplex, 100 Half Duplex, or 100 Full Duplex. • 10 Half Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10 Megabits per second using half duplex. • 10 Full Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10 Megabits per second using full duplex. WLAN ADDRESS • 100 Half Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 100 Megabits per second using half duplex. • 100 Full Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 100 Megabits per second using full duplex. Job Control The job control mode has three options: • Standard (default). The NIC waits for the printer to finish receiving the current job before sending another job. The status line shows “done” when the job is completely received by the NIC. This is the default. • Enhanced. The NIC waits for the printer to finish receiving the current job before sending another job. The status line shows “done” when the job is fully printed. • Off. No job synchonization between the NIC and the printer. WLAN ADDRESS * = Factory Default WLAN ADDRESS (from page 108) IP Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Subnet Mask xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx Gateway Address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx MAC Address hhhhhhhhhhhh DHCP Disable* Enable IP Address A numeric address such as 123.45.61.23 which identifies a printer or server in a LAN or WAN. 117 Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP MENU Subnet Mask A binary value used to divide IP networks into smaller subnetworks or subnets. This mask is used to help determine whether IP packets need to be forwarded to other subnets. Gateway Address A gateway address is the IP address of a hardware device (gateway) that translates data between two incompatible networks, which can include protocol translation. MAC Address This menu item is the Manufacturer’s Assigned Number, and is unique for each printer. It is read-only. DHCP You can enable/disable the DHCP protocol using this option, but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting. The options include: • • 118 Disable (default) Enable. WLAN PARAMS WLAN PARAMS WLAN PARAMS (from page 108) NetBIOS Protocol Enable* Disable * = Factory Default ASCII Data Port 9100* 1023 - 65535 IPDS Data Port 5001* 1023 - 65535 Keep Alive Timer Ethernet Speed 3 Minutes* 2 - 10 Minutes Auto Select* 10 Half Duplex 10 Full Duplex 100 Half Duplex 100 Full Duplex Job Control Standard* Enhanced Off For information on assigning the IP Address, Gateway Address, Subnet Mask, and MAC Address, refer to the Network Interface Card User's Manual. NetBIOS Protocol This option determines whether the NetBIOS protocol will be available. The selections are as indicated below: • Enable (default). Makes the NetBIOS protocol available with the ethernet installed. • Disable. Makes the NetBIOS protocol unavailable during printer operation. 119 Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP MENU ASCII Data Port This option sets the port number for ASCII print jobs. The data port number needs to match your host system setting. • • 9100 (default) 1023 - 65535 IPDS Data Port This option allows you to set the port number for IPDS print jobs only if the IPDS option is installed. The range is 1023 - 65535, and the factory default is 5001. Keep Alive Timer This is the time that the Keep Alive Timer will run. With the Keep Alive Timer on, the tcp connection will stay connected even after the print job has terminated. • • 120 3 Minutes (default) 2 - 10 Minutes WLAN KERBEROS WLAN KERBEROS * = Factory Default 1 = Only if a Symbol radio card is installed. WLAN Kerberos 1 (from page 108) Kerberos Enable Disable* Enable Kerberos Password Reset Kerberos Password 88* 0-65535 Kerberos Password (01-15) Kerberos Password (16-30) Kerberos Password (31-40) Clock Skew Ticket Lifetime Clock Skew Units Seconds* 300* 60-900 Minutes 5* 1-15 Clock Skew (Sec) 300* Ticket Lifetime Units Seconds* 43200* 300-259200 Minutes 720* 5-4320 Hours 12* 1-72 Days 1* 1-3 Ticket Lifetime (Sec) 43200* KDC Port Number Renew Lifetime Renew Lifetime Units Seconds* 0* 0-604800 Minutes 0* 0-10080 Hours 0* 0-168 Days 0* 0-7 Renew Lifetime (Sec) 0* Kerberos Enable • Disable (the default). Disables Kerberos authentication in the wireless network interface. • Enable. Enables Kerberos authentication in the wireless network interface. 121 Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP MENU Kerberos Password • Kerberos Password (01-15). The first 15 characters of the Kerberos password (maximum number of characters is 40). • Kerberos Password (16-30). Characters 16 to 30 of the Kerberos password (maximum number of characters is 40). • Kerberos Password (31-40). Characters 31 to 40 of the Kerberos password (maximum number of characters is 40). Reset Kerberos Password Resets the Kerberos password to an empty string. KDC Port Number KDC (Key Distribution Center) port number is the 2-byte UDP/TCP port used for Kerberos Communication. The range is 0-65535, and the factory default is 88. Clock Skew Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in seconds or minutes that Kerberos authentication will tolerate before assuming that a Kerberos message is valid. The range for Seconds is 60-900, and the default is 300. The range for Minutes is 1-15, and the default is 5. Ticket Lifetime Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in Seconds, Minutes, Hours, or Days that a ticket obtained from the Kerberos server is valid before getting a new one. 122 • Seconds. The range is 300-259200, and the default is 43200. • • • • Minutes. The range is 5-4320, and the default is 720. Hours. The range is 1-72, and the default is 12. Days. The range is 1-3, and the default is 1. Ticket Lifetime (Sec). The ticket lifetime unit in seconds. The default is 43200. WLAN LEAP Renew Lifetime Sets the maximum allowable amount of time in Seconds, Minutes, Hours, or Days before warning that a new Kerberos password is needed. • • • • • Seconds. The range is 0-604800, and the default is 0. Minutes. The range is 0-10080, and the default is 0. Hours. The range is 1-168, and the default is 0. Days. The range is 0-7, and the default is 0. Renew Lifetime Units. Renew lifetime unit in seconds. The default is 0. WLAN LEAP * = Factory Default 1 = Only if a Symbol radio card is installed. 2 = Only if a Cisco radio card is installed. WLAN LEAP 2 (from page 108) Auth Method Open* Shared Kerberos 1 LEAP 2 LEAP Username LEAP Username (01-15) LEAP Username (16-30) LEAP Username (31-32) Reset LEAP User LEAP Password Reset LEAP Password LEAP Password (01-15) LEAP Password (16-30) LEAP Password (31-32) Auth Method This feature allows the user to select the authentication method used for the wireless network interface. • • • Open (the default). Selects open authentication. • LEAP. Selects LEAP authentication (for use with a Cisco RF card installed). 123 Shared. Selects shared key authentication. Kerberos. Selects Kerberos authentication (for use when a Symbol RF card is installed). Chapter 4 NETWORK SETUP MENU LEAP Username • LEAP Username (01-15). The first 15 characters of the LEAP user name (maximum number of characters is 32). • LEAP Username (16-30). Characters 16 to 30 of the LEAP user name (maximum number of characters is 32). • LEAP User (31-32). Characters 31 to 32 of the LEAP user name (maximum number of characters is 32). Reset LEAP User Resets the LEAP user name to an empty string. LEAP Password • LEAP Password (01-15). The first 15 characters of the LEAP password (maximum number of characters is 32). • LEAP Password (16-30). Characters 16 to 30 of the LEAP password (maximum number of characters is 32). • LEAP Password (31-32). Characters 31 to 32 of the LEAP password (maximum number of characters is 32). Reset LEAP Password Resets the LEAP password to an empty string. 124 ACTIVEWLAN (IGP) EMUL LEAP ACTIVE (IGP) EMUL * = Factory Default ACTIVE (IGP) EMUL (from page 70) IGP/PGL* IGP/VGL (not shown if any below are installed) ANSI (if installed) PCL-II (if installed) LG (if installed) LP+ (with any above) This ACTIVE (IGP) EMUL function allows you to activate the desired emulation. There are two methods for selecting the desired emulation. The first is by selecting the emulation directly from the printer menu. The second is by sending a host command which will switch the emulation automatically (see the appropriate Programmer's Reference Manual for details). When changing from one emulation to the other, the printer will load the power-up configuration and the new emulation parameters. Any configuration settings performed before selecting these emulations that are not saved in NVRAM will be lost. IMPORTANT To configure an IGP emulation, the IGP emulation must be selected in the ACTIVE (IGP) EMUL menu. The IGP emulation that is not selected will not appear in the EMULATION menu (see “Main Menu” on page 70). 125 Chapter 4 IGP/PGL Emulation IGP/PGL Emulation The PGL emulation is the software based Intelligent Graphics Processor (IGP) for the line matrix family of printers. It is based upon, and is compatible with, the IGP-100/200/400 board using the PGL. The IGP graphics processing features are detailed below. Features On-Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels with a “preprinted” look for each application. IGP programs control all graphic functions, dramatically reducing host computer programming and processing time. Graphic capabilities include boxes, vertical and horizontal lines with user-selectable thickness, logos, and special alphanumeric print features. Forms and graphic designs can be duplicated horizontally and vertically. Alphanumeric data can appear as prepositioned “fixed” information (entered when the form is created), be overlayed onto the form (positioned in a specific location after the form is created), or can be dynamically merged with the form. Selectable Barcodes provide you with the appropriate barcode for your application using standard wide-to-narrow ratios. A wide selection of barcodes is available: Code 39, Interleaved 2 of 5, UPC-A, UPC-E, MSI A through D, Code 128 Subset A, B, and C, EAN/UCC-128, EAN 8, EAN 13, POSTNET, PostBar, Royal Mail, and PDF417. UPC and EAN barcodes can specify add-on data. Expanded and Compressed Character Print attract attention where needed. Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a wide range of character sizes up to 113 times the standard character size (up to 11.3 inches wide and tall). Compressed print sizes of 10, 12, 13, 15, 17, and 20 characters per inch (cpi) are available. Logos are created using alphanumeric commands and add many print and shading features for a “customized” appearance to forms, reports, and labels. 126 IGP/PGL EMULATION Features Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design. Normal, expanded, and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise, or they can be printed upside down. Reversed Print permits highlighting and contrasting by printing white characters on a dark background. Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability allows batch form processing. Individual alphabetic, numeric, and barcode data fields can be identified and automatically incremented or decremented by any amount, beginning from a specified reference point. Scaling Capability permits graphic elements, such as corners or boxes, to retain their physical shapes and sizes when printed in a horizontal and vertical density other than the base density of 60 x 72 dpi. Multinational Character Sets provide many international character sets, each 96 characters in length. This feature also allows you to create your own character sets using characters defined and stored in memory. Extended Character Sets provide 33 extended character sets, also containing 96 characters in length. These are also stored in memory. 127 Chapter 4 IGP/PGL Emulation Configuring The Emulation With The Control Panel You can select PGL default parameters directly from the control panel or by control codes as explained in the IGP/PGL Programmer's Reference Manual. The PGL parameters are described on the following pages. Parameters marked with an asterisk (*) indicate the default value. The printer must be offline to enter the configuration structure. Pressing an invalid key to enter a parameter value may move you to another level in the configuration or exit the configuration menu completely. Configure the IGP/PGL according to your specific requirements. IMPORTANT 128 BEFORE you reconfigure the IGP/PGL, print a configuration sheet to see all of the current settings. IGP/PGL Submenu IGP/PGL Submenu * = Factory Default EMULATION (from page 70) IGP/PGL Define CR Code Define LF Code Autowrap PGL SFCC CR = CR* CR = CR + LF LF = LF* LF = CR + LF Disable* Enable 126* (1-255) Select Font Slash 0 Select LPI Auto Uppercase (see page 145) Disable* Enable Power On IGP/PGL Enable* Disable Compressed CPI Disable* Light Font Dark Font Ext Execute Copy Disable* Enable Ignore Char Ignore Mode Disable* Enable Select Char 0* (0-255) 6.0* 8.0 9.0 10.0 PI Slew Range 16* 15 Barcode Options (see page 136) Compatbl. Mode None* MVP L150 P3000 P6000 P9000 Enable* Disable Host Form Length Disable* Enable Disable* Enable Skip Cmd Prefix Disable* Enable Var Form Adjust 00.0 inches* (.1 - 3.0 inches) Expanded Font Scalable* Block Alt Block 1 Alt Block 2 CR Edit Forms Handling Disable* Auto Eject Auto TOF Var Form Type Add Nothing* Add; 0 Add; X Scalable Size Normal* Block 129 Chapter 4 IGP/PGL Emulation * = Factory Default IGP/PGL (Continued) True Form Slew Enable* Disable 130 Printer PI Line Enable* Disable Print Quality Data Processing* High Best Power-on S-Mode 0* (0 - 5) Trunc Dyn Data Disable* Enable Error Report On* Debug Mode Fault Off IGP/PGL Submenu (with PCL-II) IGP/PGL Submenu (with PCL-II) * = Factory Default EMULATION (from page 70) IGP/PGL Define CR Code Define LF Code Autowrap CR = CR* CR = CR + LF LF = LF* LF = CR + LF Disable* Enable Select Font Select LPI Auto Uppercase 0* 1-33 UPC Descenders Enable* Disable 6.0* 8.0 9.0 10.0 Compressed CPI Disable* Enable Disable* Enable Ignore Char Ignore Mode Disable* Enable Select Char 0* (0-255) PGL SFCC PI Slew Range CR Edit 7E* 16* 15 Disable* Enable Skip Cmd Prefix Power On IGP/PGL Ext Execute Copy Enable* Disable IGP100 Compatbl. Disable* Enable Enable* Disable Optimized Ratio Disable* Enable Disable* Enable Error Report On* Debug Mode Fault Off 131 Chapter 4 IGP/PGL Emulation IGP/PGL Submenu (with LG) * = Factory Default EMULATION (from page 70) IGP/PGL Define CR Code Define LF Code Autowrap CR = CR* CR = CR + LF LF = LF* LF = CR + LF Disable* Enable Select Font Select LPI Auto Uppercase 0* 1-34 UPC Descenders Enable* Disable 132 6.0* 8.0 9.0 10.0 Compressed CPI Disable* Enable Disable* Enable Ignore Char Ignore Mode Disable* Enable Select Char 0* (0-255) PGL SFCC PI Slew Range CR Edit 7E* 16* 15 Disable* Enable Skip Cmd Prefix Power On IGP/PGL Ext Execute Copy Enable* Disable IGP100 Compatbl. Disable* Enable Enable* Disable Optimized Ratio Disable* Enable Disable* Enable IGP/PGL Submenu IGP/PGL Submenu (with LG) Define CR (Carriage Return) Code This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Line Feed code into the data stream whenever a Carriage Return code occurs. This is to be used only if the host computer does not send line feeds to the printer. • CR = CR (default). Does not perform a line feed. The next print position will be print position 1 of the current line. • CR = CR + LF. Performs an automatic line feed. The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line. Define LF (Line Feed) Code This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs. This can be used in most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer. • LF = LF (default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The next print position will be the current print position of the next line. • LF = CR + LF. Performs an automatic carriage return. The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line. Autowrap This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line when the line of text exceeds the right margin. • Disable (default). Truncates the text beyond the right margin until a CR or CR + LF is received. • Enable. Automatically inserts a CR + LF after a full print line. PGL SFCC You can specify which hex code (1-255) will be used as the Special Function Control Code (SFCC). The factory default setting is 126. The SFCC denotes that the following data is a PGL command. 133 Chapter 4 IGP/PGL Emulation PI Slew Range You can specify how many lines the paper will feed. • 15. A paper slew of 1-15 will move 1-15 lines. A paper slew of 0 will move 1 line. • 16. A paper slew of 0-15 will move 1-16 lines. CR Edit This parameter determines if a carriage return will be followed by a line feed. • Disable (default). The printer ignores all carriage returns that are not followed by line feeds. • Enable. The printer processes all carriage returns, even for those that are not followed by line feeds. Select Font Select Font specifies which language is currently selected for use with the PGL. Refer to “IGP/PGL Font Set Menu” on page 145 for available selections. Slash 0 This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash. This option applies to all character sets except OCR A and OCR B. • • 134 Disable (default). Zero is printed without a slash. Enable. Zero is printed with a slash. IGP/PGL Submenu IGP/PGL Submenu (with LG) Select LPI This is the number of lines to be printed per inch. For example, at 6 lpi there is 1/6 inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line. The options are: • • • • 6.0 (default) 8.0 9.0 10.0 Auto Uppercase This parameter enables the printer to print text in all uppercase when using the ALPHA command. • Disable (default). The printer will print text in upper and lowercase. • Enable. The printer will print text in uppercase only. Skip Cmd Prefix This parameter determines if the printer will print any data before a PGL command is received. • Enable (default). The printer ignores all data on the current line before an IGP command. • Disable. The printer will print all data on the current line before an IGP command. Forms Handling This submenu allows the user to handle the form in the following ways: • • Disable (the default). No effect. • Auto TOF. Automatically does a form feed (FF) at the end of each form to the next top of form. Auto Eject. Automatically ejects a page at the end of the job to spill out the last page. 135 Chapter 4 IGP/PGL Emulation Power On IGP/PGL You can set the IGP feature so that it is enabled or disabled when the printer is powered on. • Enable (default). The PGL is enabled when the printer is powered on. (The PGL feature is initialized in the Normal mode.) • Disable. The PGL is disabled when the printer is powered on. (The PGL feature is initialized to the Quiet mode.) Ext Execute Copy • Disable (default). Dynamic data and overlay data are not allowed if the optional Form Count parameter (number of forms to print) is specified as part of the Execute command. (This setting is IGP-100 compatible.) • Enable. Only dynamic data is allowed within a form in which the Form Count parameter is specified in the Execute command. In this case, the exact same form (with identical dynamic data, etc.) is printed for the Form Count. However, incremental data is not incremented since the page that is printing is exactly the same. Also, each form is printed on a separate page. * = Factory Default Barcode Options (from page 129) UPC Descenders Always* Never Only with PDF 136 Optimized Ratio Disable* Enable I-2/5 Selection Leading Zero* Trailing Space X2 DPD Modulo 7 CD AI 00 Spaces Disable* Enable Select SO Char 14* (0-255) User-Def Ratio Enable* Disable IGP/PGL Submenu IGP/PGL Submenu (with LG) Barcode Options The following sub-options help define specific options regarding barcode printing. UPC Descenders This parameter allows you to print barcode descenders when human readable data is not present in the UPC/EAN barcodes. • Always (default). UPC/EAN barcodes are printed with descenders, even if there is no human readable data. • Never. UPC/EAN barcodes are printed without descenders if there is no human readable data. • Only with PDF. UPC/EAN barcodes are printed with descenders only when the PDF command is present. Optimized Ratio This option selects different barcode ratios for certain barcodes including Code 39 and I-2/5. It is included for compatibility with the IGP-X00 printers. • • Disable (default). Use standard barcode ratios. Enable. Select the alternate barcode ratios. 137 Chapter 4 IGP/PGL Emulation I-2/5 Selection This option is added to be compatible with a special IGP-X00 customization. Usually, if I-2/5 barcodes have an odd number of digits, a leading zero is inserted in front of the data. However, this special IGP-X00 customization gives you the option of adding a space character at the end of the barcode instead. • Leading Zero (default). A leading zero is inserted in front of the data. • • Trailing Space. A space is inserted at the end of the data. • Modulo 7 CD. The I-2/5 barcode uses a modulo 7 check digit instead of the default modulo 10 check digit. X2 DPD. When selected, an I-2/5 barcode with an X2 magnification will use the specially configured ratios 3:3:6:5 rather than 3:6:9:12 for compatibility issues. AI 00 Spaces This option is designated for EAN/UCC-128 barcodes whose application identifier (AI) is 00. • Disable (default). The printable data field is printed with the AI enclosed in parentheses. This is the standard EAN/UCC-128 format. • Enable. The printable data field is printed with the UCC fields separated by spaces. This option is IGP-X00 compatible. Select SO Char Allows you to specify a decimal code from 0 through 255 to be used in place of SO (Shift Out) as the control code. This allows access for the alternate set of control function characters. See the description of the Code 128 barcodes in the IGP/PGL Programmer's Reference Manual for details. 138 IGP/PGL Submenu IGP/PGL Submenu (with LG) User-Def Ratio • Enable (default). User-defined ratios are accepted for barcodes. This is the default. • Disable. User-defined ratios are ignored and the magnification X1 is used in its place. Host Form Length Determines whether the form length specified in the CREATE command changes the form length designated in the LP+ menu (see “LinePrinter Plus Emulation” on page 209) when the form is printed by the EXECUTE command. • Disable (default). The LP+ form length is unaffected by the form being printed. • Enable. The LP+ form length changes to match the length of the PGL form being printed. Var Form Adjust (Ranges from 0 - 30). Default is 0. This menu value is tenths of inches. The value of this menu specifies the amount of distance to add to PGL forms that have variable form lengths. Variable length forms are forms that are defined by using a “;0” in the CREATE statement: ~CREATE;FORM;0. Variable form lengths are defined by the contents within the form - the form is only as long as necessary to print the form. Changing this menu value adds additional lengths to the form (in tenths of inches). Again, this only applies to forms that use the “;0” variable length forms. 139 Chapter 4 IGP/PGL Emulation Var Form Type This menu option applies only to the host command, CREATE;NAME or CREATE;NAME;DISK. The option also applies to the host command CREATE;NAME followed by ;0, ;X or a form length number that always overrides the menu option. • • Add Nothing (default). No action. • Add; X. When selected, the form length is the same as the physical page length. Add; 0. When selected, the form length ends at the longest printed element. Same as CREATE;NAME;0. Compressed CPI This parameter allows you to choose a compressed character (60% shorter) for 17 or 20 cpi instead of the normal height character. • Disable(default). The PGL does not use compressed 17 or 20 cpi font. • • Light Font. Uses the standard compressed 17 or 20 cpi font. Dark Font. Uses a darker compressed 17 or 20 cpi font compatible with the IGP-X00 printers. Ignore Char Ignore Mode This parameter instructs the PGL to ignore the character selected under the Select Character menu. • • Disable (default). The PGL does not ignore any characters. Enable. The PGL ignores the characters specified in the Select Character menu. Select Char Instructs the PGL which decimal character (0-255) to ignore from the host. 140 IGP/PGL Submenu IGP/PGL Submenu (with LG) Compatbl. Mode This option instructs the PGL to behave similarly to older versions of the IGP with respect to certain commands. All new users with new applications should select the “None” option. Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave as described in this manual. When replacing an older product operating with an existing application, especially those using the PMODE and SMODE commands, you may need to select a compatibility mode. In this case, select the printer model number option that most closely matches the printer being replaced. The Compatibility Mode options include: • • • • • • None (default) MVP L150 P3000 P6000 P9000 Expanded Font This option defines the type of expanded characters the PGL will select: • Scalable (default). These expanded characters have rounded edges. • Block. These are block characters compatible with the IGP-X00 printers. • Alt Block 1 / Alt Block 2. Reserved block sets used only for compatibility purposes. 141 Chapter 4 IGP/PGL Emulation Scalable Size • Normal (default). Controls the size of scalable characters to be either normal size (as set by the user) or adjusted to match the size of block fonts. This is the default. • Block. Adjusts the size of scalable characters to exactly match its block font alternative. True Form Slew This option is related to slewing within forms when using the PMODE command. Customers with new applications are advised to keep this option enabled. • Enable (default). Form length is accurate according to the form length parameter in the CREATE command. • Disable. Form length is IGP-X00 compatible when using PMODE. Printer PI Line This option enables the IGP to send PI instructions to the printer to slew the form. 142 • Enable (default). Send the PI instructions to the printer (LinePrinter Plus) during form slew. This is IGP-X00 compatible. • Disable. Do not send PI instructions to the printer. LFs are sent instead. IGP/PGL Submenu IGP/PGL Submenu (with LG) Print Quality • Data Processing (default). The emulation prints at 60 x 72 dpi and lets you choose between normal alphanumerics and barcodes and dark mode alphanumerics and barcodes. This mode should be set if you want the highest speed. • High. The emulation prints at 120 x 72 dpi, but all alphanumerics and barcodes are automatically printed in dark mode. • Best. The emulation prints at 120 x 144 dpi and dark mode, which produces a higher resolution, better-looking print image. Power-on S-Mode This option instructs the PGL to behave similarly to older versions of the IGP with respect to certain commands. All new users with new applications should select “0,” the default option. Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave as described in this manual. Power on S-Mode sets the printer in an SMODE compatibility state at power-up. The default is 0 (disabled, no power-on mode). To use this feature, select a mode from 1 through 5, which puts IGP/PGL in an SMODE state according to the compatibility mode set. If the compatibility mode set is None, then MVP is assumed by default. For more information, see the IGP/PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual. Trunc Dyn Data This submenu allows the user to truncate the dynamic data up to the maximum data length specified in Create Mode. • Disable (the default). If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data length, an error will report. • Enable. If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data length, the data truncates. 143 Chapter 4 IGP/PGL Emulation Error Report Sets the error reporting capability for IGP/PGL forms. 144 • On (default). Form boundary error checking reported. Any element which falls off the current page is reported as an error. • Debug Mode. The printer is put in debug mode whenever a form is defined in Create Form mode. Each line of the Create Form is printed along with an error if one occurred. This is the same functionality as if there were a slash (/) entered before the Create Form Name. • Fault. When an error occurs, the error is printed and the message “IGP/PGL ERROR” appears on the printer front panel. The printer then stops printing and goes offline. The error must be cleared before the printer can resume normal operation. • Off. No form boundary checking. Graphic elements appear clipped if they are beyond the page boundaries. IGP/PGL Submenu IGP/PGL Submenu (with LG) IGP/PGL Font Set Menu * = Factory Default Select Font (see page 129) Standard Sets* 0) ASCII* 1) German 2) Swedish 3) Danish 4) Norwegian 5) Finnish 6) English 7) Dutch 8) French 9) Spanish 10) Italian 11) Turkish 12) CP 437 13) CP 850 14-15) Reserved 16-23) Dwn Overlay 24-31) User Def. Hebrew Sets Hebrew Old* Hebrew New Hebrew DEC Latin-1 Hebrew Win. CP 1255 Arabic Sets ASMO 449* ASMO 449+ ASMO 708 ASMO 708+ MS DOS CP710 MS DOS CP720 Sakr CP714 Aptec CP715 CP 786 Arabic CP 864 Arabic CP 1046 Arabic Lam 1 Arabic Lam 2 Win. CP 1256 Farsi 1 Farsi 2 1098 Farsi 1285 Cyrillic Sets Code Page 866* Cyrillic CP 437 Cyrillic 113 Cyrillic 8859-5 ISO 915 Code Page 855 7-bit Cyrillic Ukrainian Bulgarian Win. CP 1251 Latin 2 8859-2* Latin 2 852 Mazovia Kamenicky Roman 8 PC-437 Slavic Slavic 1250 Code Page 865 Code Page 860 Latin 1 8859-1 Latin 5 8859-9 Latin 9 8859-15 Polish POL1 Win. CP 1250 Win. CP 1252 Win. CP 1257 CP 858 EURO Lith. CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859-4 Misc. Sets Turkish Sets Data Gen. Turk.* DEC Turkish IBM Turkish Siemens Turkish PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Unisys Turkish European Sets NCR Turkish PST Turkish UNIS-1 Turkish Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win. CP 1254 Code Page 857 Greek Sets DEC 256 Greek* ELOT 928 Greek Greek 3 ABY Greek ABG Greek ELOT 927 Greek Greek 851 Greek 437 Greek 8859-7 Win. CP 1253 Greek 813 EURO Greek 869 EURO UTF-8 Block-set 10cpi* Italics Set Scanblock 10cpi PGL Thai Set 145 Chapter 4 IGP/VGL Emulation IGP/VGL Emulation Code V Graphics language (VGL) is an Intelligent Graphics Printing (IGP) software emulation designed for your Line Matrix printer. The IGP Code V emulation of the QMS® Code V Version II programming language produces online forms, barcodes, and alphanumeric text-generation. The graphics processing features are detailed below. Features OnLine Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels with the “preprinted” look for each application. VGL programs control all graphics functions, dramatically reducing host computer programming and processing time. Graphics capabilities include boxes, vertical and horizontal, solid and dashed lines with a variety of thickness, logos, and special alphanumeric print features. Variable Barcodes allow the barcode for your application to print with standard or user-defined ratios in vertical or horizontal orientations. Available barcodes are Codabar, Code 39, Code 93, Code 128 with Subsets A, B, and C, and Code EAN/UCC 128, EAN 8, EAN 13, Interleaved 2 of 5, MSI, UPC-A, UPC-E, POSTNET, PostBar, Royal Mail, and UPC Shipping. POSTNET is available only in the horizontal direction. A dark print mode is included for darker, high-contrast barcodes. The IBARC barcode command prints barcodes in four orientations: horizontal, rotated 90, rotated 180, or rotated 270 degrees. Expanded and Compressed Print draws attention where needed. Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a tremendous range of character sizes up to 9.9 inches wide and tall. Several compressed print sizes are available: 12, 13.33, 15, 17.65, and 20 (cpi), permitting up to 170 columns in an 8.5 inch printed area (20 cpi). Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design. Normal, expanded, and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees clockwise, counterclockwise, or printed upside down. 146 Configuring The Emulation With The Control Panel Logos are easily created using alphanumeric commands and a variety of print and shading features, which provides a “customized” appearance for forms, reports, and labels. The registered trademark, copyright, TUV®, GS-Mark, UL®, and CSA® symbols are provided as standard designs on the VGL, and you can also define custom symbols. Reverse and Shaded Print permit highlighting and contrasting by printing white characters on a dark background or white characters on a gray, shaded background. Various levels or patterns of gray shading and reverse printing may combine with the many other print features to create distinctive designs. Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability allows batch form processing. Individual alphabetic, numeric, and barcode data fields can be identified and automatically incremented or decremented by any amount, beginning from a specified reference point. Standard Character Sets provide you with many different character sets. Based on the Multinational Character Set, you can create your own character sets using characters defined and stored in flash memory. Configuring The Emulation With The Control Panel You can select VGL default parameters directly from the control panel or by control codes as explained in the IGP/VGL Programmer's Reference Manual. The VGL parameters are described on the following pages. Parameters marked with an asterisk (*) indicate the default value. The printer must be offline to enter the configuration structure. IMPORTANT BEFORE you reconfigure the IGP/VGL, print a configuration sheet to see all of the current settings. Pressing an invalid key to enter a parameter value may move you to another level in the configuration menu or exit the menu completely. 147 Chapter 4 IGP/VGL Emulation IGP/VGL Submenu * = Factory Default EMULATION (from page 70) IGP/VGL SFCC & Pwrup VGL SFCC 5E* Power up ^X Disable* Enable Power up ^F Disable* Enable Power up ^PY Disable* Enable Font Set (see page 165) 148 LPI 6* 7 8 9 10 PI Control Printer PI Disable* Enable Host PI Disable* Enable Max PI 16 Enable* Disable Graphics Options Error Handling (see next page) Error Msgs Enable* Disable Error Markers Enable* Disable Offpage Errors Disable* Enable Barcode Errors Enable* Disable Prt to Emulate Disable* MVP/MVP 150B L150 P3040 P6000 P9000 Ignore/DB8 Setup Ignore Chars Disable* Char 1 Char 2 Char 1&2 Ignore Ch#1 0* (0-255) Ignore Ch#2 0* (0-255) Data Bit 8 Enable* Disable IGP/VGL Submenu * = Factory Default Graphics Options (from page 148) Slash 0 Disable* Enable UPC Descenders Enable* Disable LP+ Font Disable* Enable IGP110 Compatbl. Disable* Enable Ignore Dots Disable* Enable Rot. Char Size Adjusted* Not Adjusted MSI Check Digit Print* Don’t Print Auto FF at ^PN Disable* Enable Append Rotated Disable* Enable Ignore Spaces Disable* Enable I25 Selection Truncate Alpha Enable* Disable Midline PY Disable* Enable AI 00 Spaces I25 Odd Data* Disable* Leading Zero Enable Check Digit Convert Alpha Disable* Enable True Vert 1/10 Disable* Enable Print Quality Absorb After ^PY Absorb Motion* Absorb All Disable Expanded Font Data Processing* Scalable* High Block Width Limit Disable* Enable Absorb After ^PN Disable* Enable Ignore ^Lxx Cmd. Disable* Enable 149 Chapter 4 IGP/VGL Emulation IGP/VGL Submenu (with PCL-II) * = Factory Default EMULATION (from page 70) IGP/VGL SFCC & Pwrup Control Char 5E* Ignore Mode Disable* Enable Free Format Disable* Enable Mgnum Conversion Disable* Enable ISO Char Set 0* 1-33 150 LPI 6* 7 8 9 10 PI Control Printer PI Disable* Enable Host PI Disable* Enable Max PI 16 Enable* Disable Graphics Options Error Handling (see next page) Error Msgs Enable* Disable Error Markers Enable* Disable Offpage Errors Disable* Enable Barcode Errors Enable* Disable Ignore/DB8 Setup Ignore Nulls Disable* Enable Data Bit 8 Enable* Disable IGP/VGL Submenu (with PCL-II) * = Factory Default Graphics Options (from page 150) Slashes in Zeros Enable* Disable Rot. Char Size Adjusted* Not Adjusted Ignore Dots Disable* Enable Ignore Spaces Disable* Enable Append Rotated Disable* Enable Midline PY Disable* Enable Truncate Alpha Enable* Disable Convert to U/C Disable* Enable True Vert 1/10 Disable* Enable Absorb After ^PN Disable* Enable UPC Descenders Enable* Disable IGP110 Compatbl. Disable* Enable 151 Chapter 4 IGP/VGL Emulation IGP/VGL Submenu (with LG) * = Factory Default EMULATION (from page 70) IGP/VGL SFCC & Pwrup Control Char 5E* Ignore Mode Disable* Enable Free Format Disable* Enable Mgnum Conversion Disable* Enable Font Set 0* 1-33 152 LPI 6* 7 8 9 10 PCI Control Printer PI Disable* Enable Host PI Disable* Enable Max PI 16 Enable* Disable Graphics Options Error Handling (see next page) Error Msgs Enable* Disable Error Markers Enable* Disable Offpage Errors Disable* Enable Barcode Errors Enable* Disable Ignore/DB8 Setup Ignore Nulls Disable* Enable Data Bit 8 Enable* Disable IGP/VGL Submenu IGP/VGL Submenu (with LG) * = Factory Default Graphics Options (from page 152) Slash 0 Enable* Disable UPC Descenders Enable* Disable Absorb After ^PN Disable* Enable Ignore Dots Disable* Enable Rot. Char Size Adjusted* Not Adjusted Append Rotated Disable* Enable Ignore Spaces Disable* Enable Truncate Alpha Enable* Disable Midline PY Disable* Enable True Vert 1/10 Disable* Enable Dark Barcode Disable* Enable Absorb After ^PY Absorb Motion* Absorb All Disable Width Limit Disable* Enable IGP110 Compatbl. Disable* Enable 153 Chapter 4 IGP/VGL Emulation SFCC & Pwrup This option has several sub-options which define the SFCC and power-up configuration used with VGL. VGL SFCC This option selects the Special Function Control Code. The default value 5E. Run a configuration printout to determine the currently selected VGL SFCC. Power Up ^X • • Disable (default). Enable. Selects the ignore mode as the power-up default and selects the graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default. All characters are ignored until a ^A command is received. Power Up ^F • • Disable (default). Enable. Selects free format mode as the power-up default and selects the graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default. Free format causes the VGL to ignore carriage returns, line feeds, and all characters below hex 20 sent from the host. Power Up ^PY • • Disable (default). Enable. Selects the graphics mode ^PY as the power-up default. LPI The number of lines to be printed per inch. For example, at 6 lpi there is 1/6 inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line. 154 IGP/VGL Submenu IGP/VGL Submenu (with LG) Graphics Options Following are several options which configure printing output. Slash 0 This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash. This option applies to all character sets except OCR-A and OCR-B. • • Disable (default). Zero is printed without a slash. Enable. Zero is printed with a slash. Ignore Dots • • Disable (default). Enable. Causes the VGL to expect position values to be specified in only 1/10ths of an inch. If the dot position is also given, it is treated as text. Append Rotated • Disable (default). Logos and alphanumeric strings are treated as separate elements. • Enable. Appends logos to an alphanumeric string rotated in a clockwise, counterclockwise, or inverted orientation. Truncate Alpha When enabled, this parameter prevents the printing of Error 48 (Element Off Page Error) if alphanumeric data, including spaces, extends beyond the right side of the form. The options include: • • Enable (default) Disable 155 Chapter 4 IGP/VGL Emulation True Vert 1/10 • Enable (default). A vertical 1/10 inch parameter is used as 1/10 inch. Rounding occurs to the nearest 1/72 inch. This can cause vertical moves that have the same value to differ by ± 1/72 inch. • Disable. A vertical 1/10 of an inch parameter is used as 7/72 of an inch. The absolute move is slightly smaller than expected. For example, a one-inch move would be 70/72 of an inch. Vertical moves that have the same value are identical in length. Absorb After ^PY • Absorb Motion (default). The first paper motion following a ^PY command is ignored. • Absorb All. The system ignores all the data and terminator until a host generated motion terminator is detected. • Disable. System terminators following a graphics command are sent to the printer and result in paper motion. UPC Descenders • Enable (default). UPC/EAN barcodes are printed with descenders, even if there is no human readable data. • Disable. UPC/EAN barcodes are printed without descenders if there is no human readable data. Rot. Char Size 156 • Adjusted (default). Rotated (clockwise/counterclockwise), expanded characters have a different size than an unrotated character with the same size parameters. • Not Adjusted. Rotated, expanded characters are the same size as unrotated characters with the same size parameters. IGP/VGL Submenu IGP/VGL Submenu (with LG) Ignore Spaces • Disable (default). Trailing spaces are not deleted from alphanumeric elements in a graphics pass. • Enable. Trailing spaces are deleted from alphanumeric elements in a graphics pass. Midline PY (includes ^PN) • Disable (default). The Graphics mode Enable command, ^PY, must be the first three characters of a line. • Enable. The ^PY or ^PN can occur anywhere in a line. Print Quality • Data Processing (default). ALPHA text and barcodes are printed in normal mode at 60 x 72 dpi. This mode should be set if the highest speed is desired. • High. ALPHA text and barcodes are printed in dark mode at 120 x 72 dpi. Expanded Font • Scalable (default). These expanded characters have rounded edges. • Block. These are block characters compatible with IGP-X10 printers. LP+ Font • Disable (default). The IGP/VGL uses its default half-dot font, which is slightly different from the standard bitmap font used by LP+ at 12, 13, 15 and 17 cpi. • Enable. The IGP/VGL uses the same font as used by LP+ at all cpi. 157 Chapter 4 IGP/VGL Emulation MSI Check Digit • Print (default). The check digit is appended at the end of the printable data field for MSI barcodes. • Don't Print. The check digit for MSI barcodes does not print. I25 Selection • I25 Odd Data (default). When an odd number of data is provided, the default setting, Leading Zero, will add a zero to the beginning of the bar code data. The setting, Check Digit, will add a check digit to the end of the bar code data so that the results add up to an even number of data. • Convert Alpha. Disable is the default. When enabled, each non-digit I25 bar code character will convert to “0.” NOTE: If you use an Interleaved 2/5 barcode that automatically adds the check digit (type code k or l, IBARC type code INT2/5CD or INT2/5CDA), the check digit is added regardless of how this parameter is set. AI 00 Spaces This option is designated for EAN/UCC-128 barcodes whose application identifier (AI) is 00. 158 • Disable (default). The printable data field is printed with the AI enclosed in parentheses. This is the standard EAN/UCC-128 format. • Enable. The printable data field is printed with the UCC fields separated by spaces. This option is IGP-X00 compatible. IGP/VGL Submenu IGP/VGL Submenu (with LG) Width Limit • • Disable (default). Enable. The system will limit the length and width for expanded characters to a limit shown in Table 6, which displays the maximum width allowed for a specific height in the range of 00 through 40 (0.0 through 4.0 inches). Table 6. Width Limit Table Height Param. Max. Width Allowed Height Param. Max. Width Allowed 00 99 21 51 01 99 22 53 02 3 23 56 03 6 24 58 04 8 25 61 05 11 26 63 06 13 27 66 07 16 28 68 08 18 29 71 09 21 30 73 10 23 31 76 11 26 32 78 12 28 33 81 13 31 34 83 14 33 35 86 15 36 36 88 16 38 37 91 17 41 38 93 18 43 39 96 19 46 40 98 20 48 159 Chapter 4 IGP/VGL Emulation Absorb After ^PN • Disable (default). All line terminators that follow the ^PN command are sent to the printer and processed. • Enable. The first motion line terminator that follows the ^PN command is ignored. IGP110 Compatbl. This option instructs the VGL to behave similarly to the IGP-10 with respect to certain commands. All new users with new applications should select the “Disable” option. Selecting this mode insures the printer will behave as described in this manual. • • Disable (default). The IGP does not emulate the IGP-10 mode. Enable. The IGP emulates the IGP-10 version. Auto FF at ^PN • Disable (default). A form feed will not be generated automatically when the ^PN command is encountered. • Enable. A form feed will be generated automatically to slew to the top of the next form when the ^PN command is encountered and when the current vertical position is not at top of form. Ignore ^Lxx Cmd. • • 160 Disable (default). Enable. The ^Lxx command will always be ignored. IGP/VGL Submenu IGP/VGL Submenu (with LG) Error Handling Following are several options which define how errors are reported. Error Msgs • Enable (default). Command syntax is checked and error messages printed when command parameters are incorrect. • Disable. Error checking and error messages are suppressed. Error Markers • Enable (default). Prints the following error markers for those elements that print beyond the page boundaries: >> for elements that begin off the right side of the page; << for elements that begin at the indicated position but end off the page; ♦ for elements where the starting position of the command contains an error other than an off-page error. Offpage Errors • Disable (default). Does not report errors for elements that start or end beyond the right edge of the page. • Enable. Reports errors for elements that start or end beyond the right edge of the page. Barcode Errors • Enable (default). An error message will print when invalid barcode data is encountered. • Disable. VGL will not print an error for illegal barcode data; the barcode will be skipped. NOTE: When the Barcode Errors option is disabled, the VGL emulation will try to make the best use of invalid data by either truncating extra digits or adding zeros to the end of barcode data to meet minimum data length requirements for some barcodes. Not all errors will be corrected. 161 Chapter 4 IGP/VGL Emulation Ignore / DB8 Setup Following are several options which define character filtering and Data Bit 8. Ignore Chars • • Disable (default). Character filtering is not enabled. • Char 2. Character 2 will be filtered. Select the option “Ignore CH#2” to specify character 2. • Char 1 & 2. Characters 1 & 2 will be filtered. Select the options “Ignore CH#1” and “Ignore CH#2” to specify values for these characters. Char 1. Character 1 will be filtered. Select the option “Ignore CH#1” to specify character 1. Ignore CH#1 Specifies character 1 for the character filtering option. Valid decimal values are from 0 through 255. Ignore CH#2 Specifies character 2 for the character filtering option. Valid decimal values are from 0 through 255. 162 IGP/VGL Submenu IGP/VGL Submenu (with LG) Data Bit 8 • Enable (default). The PI line is not passed directly from host to printer; all 8 bits are used for data bits, and characters in the hex 80-FF range can be accessed. • Disable. When the host PI line is enabled, Data Bit 8 internally indicates PI line status. To use the PI line, disable Data Bit 8, and enable the Host PI configuration option (under the PI Control option, below). NOTE: Data Bit 8 is interpreted as either Data Bit 8 or PI signal, but never both. When enabled as Data Bit 8, Data Bit 8 has priority over the PI signal, and all data above hex 7F is used to access character data and not to interpret PI line data. Conversely, when Data Bit 8 is disabled and the PI signal is used, Data Bit 8 of the data is reserved for use as the PI function, and you cannot access characters in the hex 80FF range. Therefore, to access characters in the hex 80-FF range, Data Bit 8 must be enabled. Font Set The Font Set specifies which language is currently selected for use with the VGL. Refer to “IGP/VGL Font Set Menu” on page 165 for available selections. PI Control Printer PI • Disable (default). The ASCII emulation is configured with the PI line disabled. • Enable. The ASCII emulation is configured with the PI line enabled. 163 Chapter 4 IGP/VGL Emulation Host PI • • Disable (default). The host does not send PI signals. Enable. The host sends PI signals. The Data Bit 8 configuration option must be disabled to transmit the PI line to the printer. Max PI 16 • • Enable (default). A paper slew of 0-15 will move 1-16 lines. Disable. A paper slew of 1-15 will move 1-15 lines. A paper slew of 0 will always move 1 line. Prt To Emulate This option allows you to select an earlier model printer/IGP board combination to emulate. When a printer emulation is selected, the scaling command causes the printer to generate a graphic image in the same density as the printer emulation chosen. Five types of printers can be emulated: MVP or MVP 150B, L150, P3040, P6000, and P9000. Once a printer emulation is selected, it remains active until the printer is turned off or another printer emulation is selected. All new users with new applications should select the “Disable” option, which insures the printer behaves as described in this manual. The other compatibility modes are required to emulate the behaviors of older printers which may be inconsistent with the documented VGL functionality. Proper use of this feature requires the printer to be equipped with high resolution hammer bank tips (12 mil). 164 IGP/VGL Submenu IGP/VGL Submenu (with LG) IGP/VGL Font Set Menu * = Factory Default Font Set (see page 148) Standard Sets* 0) ASCII* 1) German 2) Swedish 3) Danish 4) Norwegian 5) Finnish 6) English 7) Dutch 8) French 9) Spanish 10) Italian 11) Turkish 12) CP 437 13) CP 850 Hebrew Sets Hebrew Old* Hebrew New Hebrew DEC Latin-1 Hebrew Win. CP 1255 Arabic Sets ASMO 449* ASMO 449+ ASMO 708 ASMO 708+ MS DOS CP710 MS DOS CP720 Sakr CP 714 Aptec CP715 CP 786 Arabic CP 864 Arabic CP 1046 Arabic Lam 1 Arabic Lam 2 Win. CP 1256 Farsi 1 Farsi 2 1098 Farsi 1285 Cyrillic Sets Code Page 866* Cyrillic CP 437 Cyrillic 113 Cyrillic 8859-5 ISO 915 Code Page 855 7-bit Cyrillic Ukrainian Bulgarian Win. CP 1251 Turkish Sets Data Gen. Turk.* DEC Turkish IBM Turkish Siemens Turkish PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish European Sets Latin 2 8859-2* Latin 2 852 Mazovia Kamenicky Roman 8 PC-437 Slavic Slavic 1250 Code Page 865 Code Page 860 Latin 1 8859-1 Latin 5 8859-9 Latin 9 8859-15 Polish POL1 Win. CP 1250 Win. CP 1252 Win. CP 1257 CP 858 EURO Lith. CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859-4 Greek Sets DEC 256 Greek* ELOT 928 Greek Greek 3 ABY Greek ABG Greek ELOT 927 Greek Greek 851 Greek 437 Greek 8859-7 Win. CP 1253 Greek 813 EURO Greek 869 EURO Misc. Sets Unisys Turkish NCR Turkish PST Turkish UNIS-1 Turkish Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win. CP 1254 Code Page 857 Block-set 10cpi* Italics Set Scanblock 10cpi PGL Thai Set 165 Chapter 4 EMULATION EMULATION The EMULATION menu allows you to select the emulation to be used with your printer. The Proprinter XL, Epson FX, P-Series, P-Series XQ, and Serial Matrix emulations are all part of LinePrinter +. You can configure options for the active emulation via the EMULATION menu. Emulation options are further described in their corresponding Programmer's Reference Manual. * = Factory Default Optional Emulation 1 EMULATION (from page 70) 166 CTHI1 LinePrinter+ 44/48XXANSI1 IGP/PGL1 IGP/VGL1 IPDS1 page 167 page 209 page 248 page 126 page 148 page 257 PCL-II 1 LG 1 page 263 page 269 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation Standard Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation * = Factory Default 1 EMULATION (from page 70) Coax/Twinax Host Interface CTHI1 Standard* Simp Prot Conv Coax Params Twinax Params 3270 Params 5250 Params SPC Coax Params SPC Twinax Params page 169 page 180 page 187 page 196 page 202 page 206 Standard With a standard coax interface, the printer emulates the following IBM coax printer models: • • 3287 Models 1 and 2 4234 Model 1 With a standard twinax interface, the printer emulates the following IBM twinax printer models: • • 4234 Models 2 and 12 5225 Models 1, 2, 3, and 4 NOTE: The standard Coax/Twinax emulation selection will only be available if Coax or Twinax is selected from the HOST INTERFACE menu. See page 85. For more information, refer to the Coax/Twinax Programmer's Reference Manual. The 3270 Params and 5250 Params selection is available only if the TN option is installed. 167 Chapter 4 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation Simple Prot Conv The Simple Protocol Converter (SPC) option allows those who use third party add-on Coax or Twinax protocol converters to produce the same output on a Line Matrix printer with the Coax/Twinax (CTHI) capability as done using a non-CT printer with the third party converter interfaces. The SPC replaces the third party add-on protocol converters attached to older line matrix printers. The SPC gives the printer the operational ability to connect to any PC, or network system supporting parallel or serial interfaces, and to three different IBM host systems: System 3x, AS/400®, and 3270 Mainframes. The SPC will support the following third party models for Twinax: MODE 219, MODE IBM, and MODE PROLINE. The printer emulations supported by the SPC are Twinax 5225 and Coax 3287. The SPC also provides a range of interfaces available in your line matrix printer: Centronics, Dataproducts, Serial, Coax, and Twinax. Also supported are Epson, Proprinter, P-Series, Serial Matrix, IGP/VGL, and IGP/PGL emulations. The SPC has the ability to handle multiple print jobs concurrently through Coax/Twinax and Parallel and Serial interfaces. This is accomplished through the Auto Switching feature (see page 86). Because of hardware restrictions, Coax and Twinax cannot be selected together. For more information, consult the Coax/Twinax Programmer's Reference Manual for the Simple Protocol Converter Option. 168 Coax Emulation Coax Emulation * = Factory Default 1 = Valid only when the printer emulates 3287. CTHI (from page 167) Standard* Coax Params Char Set Select Translation Tbl (see next page) Buffer Reprint Control By Host* Left to Right Right to Left Format Control Disable* Enable Prt Partial Line PA1 PA2 Secondary Set* Enable* Primary Set Disable Early Print Cmpl Disable* Enable Set Text Orientn Active Char Set Image Buf Size1 4K* 2K Max. Print Width 13.2 inches* Printer Width SCS Buffer Cntrl Cancel IGP/DCU Don’t Wait* Enable* Wait Until Done Disable Intervention Req Send To Host* Do Not Send Compatibility Op PTX Transparent Change Case Lead-in Chars Dual Case* Set 1 <%>* Mono Case Set 2 ¬¬$ Set 3 _%_ User Defined Usr Defined HTRN Start Code 1 5F* (40-FF) Start Code 2 5F* (40-FF) Stop Code 5B* (40-FF) Alt. Set 80-9F Printable* Control Code Translate Table (see next page) Default* Downloaded Host Override Disable* Enable Buffer Print Disable* Enable 169 Chapter 4 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation * = Factory Default Char Set Select (from page 169) Primary Sets Secondary Sets 0037 English US* 0037 Eng Nether 0285 English UK 0273 Austr/Germ 0274 Belg. Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0287 Danish Alt 0278 Finnish 0288 Finn. Alt 0297 French 0500 Internat 5 0280 Italian 0281 Japan. Eng 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0289 Span. Alt 0500 Swiss Bil 0500 Belg. New 0803 Hebrew Old 0424 Hebrew 0892 OCR A 0893 OCR B 0420 Arabic 0880 Cyril. Old 0423 Greek Old 0875 Gr New Euro 0871 Icelandic 0290 Japan Kata 0870 Latin 2 0838 Thai 1026 Turkish 0890 Yugos. Old 1097 Farsi 1025 Cyrillic 0905 Turk. Old 0256 Intern. 1 0924 Euro Lat-9 1140 Euro Eng. 1141 Euro Aust. 1142 Euro Dan. 1143 Euro Finn. 1144 Euro Ital. 1145 Euro Span. 1146 Euro UK 1147 Euro Fren. 1148 Euro Swiss 1149 Euro Ice. English US* English UK Austrian/German German (Alt) Belgian Brazilian Canadian French Danish/Norweg. Danish (Alt) Finnish/Swedish Finnish (Alt) French International Italian Japanese Eng. Japanese Katak. Portuguese Portug. (Alt) Spanish Spanish (Alt) Spanish Speak. Swiss Fren/Ger Old Hebrew Hebrew Farsi/Latin Greek Old Greek New Arabic Turkish Turkish Old Latin 2/ROECE Yugoslavian Compatibility Op (from page 169) CR At MPP+1 On* Off Auto Skip At End Off* On 170 NL At MPP+1 On* Off FF After Job Off* On Position Aft FF (4234 only) Last Char = FF Off* On On* Off CR, EM & NL (3287 only) On* Off Null Suppression Off* On FF Validity Off* On Coax Emulation Char Set Select Specifies the print language used by the printer. Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual. Translation Tbl Prints out SCS and DSC/DSE tables of the Coax interface's current character set. This operation is valid only when the Coax interface is selected as the current interface (see “HOST INTERFACE” on page 85). Active Char Set Selects which group of character sets (Primary or Secondary) will be active. Secondary Set is the default. Prt Partial Line • Enable (default). Forces the printer to print if a partial line is in the printer (i.e., line not ending with a LF). • Disable. The last partial line of data will not be printed. PA1 PA1 is only valid when the printer is in the offline state and the coax Systems Network Architecture Character String (SCS) data stream is active. This function displays the “PA1 ENABLED” message when the ENTER key is pressed and sends a special operator request to the host when the printer is put back in Online mode. Refer to the Coax/Twinax Programmer's Reference Manual for more information about SCS. NOTE: Selecting the PA1 menu item again (“PA1 DISABLED” appears on the operator panel) or selecting the PA2 menu item will reset the pending PA1 function. 171 Chapter 4 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation PA2 PA2 is only valid when the printer is in the Offline state and the coax SCS data stream is active. This function displays the “PA2 ENABLED” message when the ENTER key is pressed and sends a special operator request to the host when the printer is put back in online mode. NOTE: Selecting the PA2 menu item again (“PA2 DISABLED” appears on the operator panel) or selecting the PA1 menu item will reset the pending PA2 function. Buffer Reprint This option is valid only when the printer is printing in SCS mode. When the ENTER key is pressed, “Buffer Reprint Enabled” is displayed and an Intervention Required status is sent to the host. Pressing ENTER again cancels the Buffer Reprint function and displays “Buffer Reprint Disabled.” Early Print Cmpl Allows the printer to send print (order) complete status to the host before the printer is actually done printing all data. This option is valid only when the printer is in DSC/DSE mode. • Disable (default). The printer will suppress the Early Print Complete response until all printing is complete. • Enable. The printer will send an acknowledgment to the host when it is able to accept more data. NOTE: When Early Print Complete is enabled and an error occurs, you may lose data. 172 Coax Emulation SCS Buffer Cntrl This option is used in Coax LU1/SCS mode only. • Don’t Wait (default). The printer does not wait for the job to be printed before sending the print completion to the host. • Wait Until Done. The printer waits for the job to print before sending the print completion to the host. This option speeds up the LU1 job printing for short jobs. If you select “Don’t Wait,” there is a risk that you may not be able to recover the print job when the printer has fault. Cancel IGP/DCU • Enable (default). Cancels all buffers when a job is put on hold from the host or when the CANCEL key is pressed. • Disable. Does not cancel any internal buffer in the printer when a job is put on hold from the host or when the CANCEL key is pressed. PTX Transparent Lead-in Chars You can enable additional printer features which are not accessible through standard Coax emulations. To access these features, send text commands in the data stream. The commands must have a start and end code. Four sets are available: • Set 1. start code: <% stop code: > • Set 2. start code:¬¬ stop code: $ • Set 3. start code: _% stop code: _ • User Defined. 173 Chapter 4 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation Usr Defined HTRN This option is used in Twinax SPC emulation. The range is ASCII character. This option allows users to define ther own lead-in characters for the Printronix Specific commands. Select a hex value for the following codes for the User Defined option: • • • Start Code 1 5F Start Code 2 5F Stop Code 5B Alt. Set 80-9F • • Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F. Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code. Change Case Specifies the font as Mono or Dual case. This option is available only in non-SCS mode. The host will be notified of the change when the printer is placed online. Mono Case prints the same as Dual Case if the character set is one of the following “right to left” sets: Katak., Hebrew, Old Hebrew, and Farsi. The default is Dual Case. SCS (System Network Architecture Character String) mode is controlled by the host computer. Set Text Orientn Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page. This allows the printer to print languages which are printed right to left instead of left to right. 174 • Control By Host (default). Allows printers configured as a 4234 to use the “Set Text Orientation” command from the host. • • Left to Right. Right to Left. When a right to left language is selected, the host will be notified of print direction changes when the printer is placed online. Coax Emulation Image Buf Size Allows you to select 2K or 4K as the image buffer size. This option is valid only when the printer emulates the 3287. For the 4234 emulation, the buffer size is fixed at 4K. A POR status is sent to the host when the printer is placed online. Intervention Req • Send to Host (default). The printer sends a signal to the host computer when a printer fault or hold mode time-out occurs. • Do Not Send. No signal will be sent to the host computer. Compatibility Op The Compatibility Options allow you to select special printer functions in the non-SCS mode based on the capabilities of the printer emulated. CR At MPP+1 MPP is Maximum Print Position, which is also known as line length. This option controls a carriage return at the end of a print line and at MPP+1. • On (default). Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the next line. • Off. Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the current line. NL At MPP+1 Controls how many lines are skipped when the carriage returns to a new line. • On (default). Moves to the first print position two lines down from the current position. • Off. Moves to the first print position of the next print line. 175 Chapter 4 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation Position Aft FF (4234 only) Allows you to select the location of the print position after a form feed command is sent. • On (default). Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first print line on the next form. • Off. Sets the printer to print at print position 2 of the first print line on the next form. Last Char = FF Determines the print line position when a form feed command is the last code encountered in the print buffer. • On (default). Moves to the first print position on the second line of the next form. • Off. Moves to the first print position on the first line of the next form. NOTE: This option is ignored if Auto Skip At End is on. If configured as a 3287, and a form feed occurs in the middle of a print buffer, the printer defaults to the first print position on the second line of the next form regardless of the setting of this option. Null Suppression • • Off (default). Ignores nulls. The print position does not move. On. Treats nulls as blank spaces. FF Validity Determines if the position of a form feed command affects its execution. 176 • Off (default). Performs a form feed only if it occurs at the first print position in a line or at Maximum Print Position +1. A form feed command at any other position is recognized as a space. • On. Allows the printer to perform a form feed command anywhere in the data stream. Coax Emulation Auto Skip At End Specifies whether or not to perform an automatic form feed at the end of a print buffer. If form feed is the last character in the print order, the form feed function is supplied by the Auto Skip At End option. • Off (default). Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the next line. • On. Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first line of the next form. FF After Job Determines the print position after an operator-initiated local copy (print screen function). • Off (default). Performs an automatic new line command after completing a print buffer (unless a new line, form feed, or carriage return command was the last one executed). The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the next line. • On. Performs an automatic form feed command unless a form feed was the last one executed. The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the first line on the next form. CR, EM, and NL (3287 only) CR (Carriage Return), EM (Error Message), and NL (New Line) specify that the printer treat the CR, EM, and NL control codes either as spaces or as control codes. • On (default). Treats the CR, EM, and NL commands as control codes. • Off. Treats the CR, EM, and NL commands as spaces. 177 Chapter 4 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation Translate Table Defines which translate table to use for printing. • Default (default). Translates data by using the default table of the current character set. • Downloaded. Translates data from EBCDIC to internal code by using the downloaded translate table. Host Override Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host or continues to use the current operator panel settings. • Disable (default). Allows the following host commands to override operator panel settings: line length, forms length, lines per inch (LPI), characters per inch (CPI), print quality, and text orientation. Note the information appearing on the message display may not match the data stream setting. No values will change upon initial selection of the disable option. • Enable. The operator panel settings override the host commands. Format Control Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after absolute and relative move commands are executed. 178 • Disable (default). Reflects distance, generated by the IGP/VGL feature, IGP/PGL feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the new position (after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed). • Enable. Does not reflect distance, generated by the IGP/VGL feature, IGP/PGL feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the new position (after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed). Coax Emulation Max. Print Width Set the maximum print width at either 13.2 inches or the maximum width of the printer. Buffer Print • • Disable (default). The printer will print normally. Enable. The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received from the host as hex values. Refer to page 315 for information on how to obtain a hex code printout. NOTE: Use of this parameter may alter print attributes set by the host computer. A power cycle may be required after changing Buffer Print from enable to disable. 179 Chapter 4 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation Twinax Params * = Factory Default CTHI (from page 167) Standard* Twinax Params Char Set Select Active Char Set (see next page) Secondary Set* Primary Set 5225 World Trade Standard Char* Extended Char LAC Approx. On* Off 180 Cancel IGP/DCU Enable* Disable Set Text Orientn Prt Partial Line Enable* Disable PTX Transparent Device ID IPDS* 5225 4234-2 Graphic Chek Err Lead-in Chars Enable* Set 1 <%>* Disable Set 2 ¬¬$ Set 3 _%_ User Defined Usr Defined HTRN Start Code 1 5F* (40-FF) Start Code 2 5F* (40-FF) Stop Code 5B* (40-FF) Alt. Set 80-9F Printable* Control Code Host Override Control By Host* Disable* Left to Right Enable Right to Left Format Control Disable* Enable Device Address Address 1* Address (0-6) Graphic Chek Cod LAC Option 60* (40-FE hex) Enable* Disable Max. Print Width 13.2 inches* Printer Width Buffer Print Disable* Enable Twinax Params * = Factory Default Char Set Select (from page 180) Primary Sets Secondary Sets 0037 English US* 0037 Eng Nether 0500 Swiss Bil 0500 Belg. New 0273 Austr/Germ 0274 Belg. Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0278 Finnish 0297 French 0280 Italian 0281 Japan. Eng 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0285 English UK 0892 OCR A 0893 OCR B 0424 Hebrew 0803 Hebrew Old 0420 Arabic 0880 Cyril. Old 0423 Greek Old 0875 Gr New Euro 0871 Icelandic 0290 Japan Kata 0870 Latin 2 0838 Thai 1026 Turkish 0890 Yugos. Old 1097 Farsi 1025 Cyrillic 0256 Intern. 1 1112 Balt Mult 0924 Euro Latin-9 1122 Estonian 1140 Euro Eng. 1141 Euro Aust. 1142 Euro Dan. 1143 Euro Finn. 1144 Euro Ital. 1145 Euro Span. 1146 Euro UK. 1147 Euro Fren. 1148 Euro Swiss 1149 Euro Ice. 0500 Internat 5 English US* Austrian/German Belgian Brazilian Canadian French Danish/Norweg. Finnish/Swedish French Italian Japanese Eng. Japanese Katak. Portuguese Spanish Spanish Speak. English UK Old Hebrew Hebrew Farsi/Latin Greek Old Greek New Arabic Turkish Latin 2/ROECE Yugoslavian Multinational Char Set Select Specifies the print language used by the printer. Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual. Active Char Set This option selects which group of character sets (Primary or Secondary) will be active. Secondary Set is the default. 181 Chapter 4 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation Prt Partial Line • Enable (default). Forces the printer to print a partial line (i.e., line not ending with a LF) before moving to the top of form on the next page. • Disable. The last partial line of data will not be printed. Device ID This parameter defines the printer emulation as 4234-2 or 5225. After the emulation has been changed, a POR status is sent to the host. 4234-2 is the default. Device Address Allows you to set the device address from 0 through 6. The host directs data and commands on the twinax line to a specific device based on its unique device address. After the address has been changed, a POR status is sent to the host. 5225 World Trade The 5225 emulation has a standard multinational character set that serves as a base and 14 extended world trade character set assortments. Cancel IGP/DCU 182 • Enable (default). Cancels all buffers when a job is put on hold from the host or the CANCEL key is pressed. • Disable. Does not cancel any internal buffer in the printer when a job is put on hold from the host or the CANCEL key is pressed. Twinax Params PTX Transparent Lead-in Chars You can enable additional features that are not available in standard Twinax emulations. To access these features, send text commands in the data stream. The commands must have a start and end code. Three sets (each containing a start and end code) are available: • Set 1. start code: <% stop code: > • Set 2. start code:¬¬ stop code: $ • Set 3. start code: _% stop code: _ • User Defined Usr Defined HTRN This option is used in Twinax SPC emulation. The range is ASCII character. This option allows users to define ther own lead-in characters for the Printronix Specific commands. Select a hex value for the following codes for the User Defined option: • • • Start Code 1 5F Start Code 2 5F Stop Code 5B Alt. Set 80-9F • • Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F. Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code. 183 Chapter 4 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation Graphic Chek Err Allows overriding of the host setting for the SGEA (Set Graphic Error Action) command. For more information about the SGEA command, refer to the Coax/Twinax Programmer's Reference Manual. • Enable (default). The host setting for the SGEA used by the printer. If the SGEA command is requested to stop on graphic errors, the printer will stop when a graphic error is detected. • Disable. Ignores the SGEA command from the host. The printer does not stop when an error is detected; instead, it substitutes the character selected in the Graphic Chek Code parameter. Graphic Chek Cod Specifies the replacement character to print in place of any unprintable character that is received from the host. Choose a hex character from 40 through FE. The character becomes the printer default when: • • • the printer is powered off and then powered on; an SGEA command specifies to use the operator panel default; the Graphic Chek Err parameter is disabled. LAC Option Allows the host system to load alternate character images into the printer. This may be used for designing graphics, barcodes, and charts, or for printing in foreign languages. 184 • Enable (default). Prints the LAC character as defined. • Disable. Ignores the LAC definition from the host and prints from the currently selected character set. Twinax Params LAC Approx. A process that reorganizes columns of dots so that clean, readable printing is possible. • On (default). Converts the emulated character cells to standard cells for the P7224 model. • Off. Converts character cells byte by byte and not by LAC approximation. Set Text Orientn Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page. This allows the printer to print languages that are printed right to left instead of left to right. The options include: • • • Control By Host (default) Left to Right Right to Left Host Override Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host or continues to use the current operator panel settings. • Disable (default). Allows the following host commands to override operator panel settings: line length, forms length, lines per inch (LPI), characters per inch (CPI), print quality, and text orientation. Note the information appearing on the message display may not match the data stream setting. No values will change upon initial selection of the disable option. • Enable. The operator panel settings override the host commands. NOTE: Host margin and tab settings will take precedence whether or not Host Override is enabled. 185 Chapter 4 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation Format Control Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after absolute and relative move commands are executed. • Disable (default). Reflects distance, generated by the IGP/VGL feature, IGP/PGL feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the new position (after absolute and relative move commands are executed). • Enable. Does not reflect distance, generated by the IGP/VGL feature, IGP/PGL feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the new position (after absolute and relative move commands are executed). Max. Print Width Set the maximum print width at either 13.2 inches or the maximum width of the printer. The default is 13.2 inches. Buffer Print • • Disable (default). The printer will print normally. Enable. The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received from the host as hex values. Refer to page 315 for information on how to obtain a hex code printout. NOTE: Use of this parameter may alter print attributes set by the host computer. A power cycle may be required after changing Buffer Print from enable to disable. 186 3270 Params 3270 Params 3270 Params (1) (from page 167) Char Set Select Translation Tbl See the following page. PTX Transparent Lead-in Chars Set 1 <%>* Set 2 ¬¬$ Set 3 _%_ User Defined Usr Defined HTRN Start Code 1* Start Code 2 Stop Code Alt. Set 80-9F Printable* Control Code Host Override Disable* Enable Active Char Set Secondary Sets* Primary Sets* Change Case Dual Case* Mono Case Format Control Disable* Enable Set Text Orientn Left to Right* Right to Left Early Print Cmpl Disable* Enable Intervention Req Send to Host* Do Not Send Prt Partial Line Enable* Disable Compatibility Op CR At MPP + 1 NL At MPP + 1 Position Aft FF Last Char = FF Null Suppression FF Validity Auto Skip At End FF After Job CR, EM, & NL Max. Print Width 13.2 inches* Printer Width NOTE: (1) This menu appears only if the TN3270 option is installed. 187 Chapter 4 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation * = Factory Default 3270 Params Char Set Select (from page 187) Primary Sets 0037 English US* 0037 Eng Nether 0285 English UK 0273 Austr/Germ 0274 Belg Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0287 Danish Alt 0278 Finnish 0288 Finn Alt 0297 French 0500 Internat 5 0280 Italian 0281 Japan. Eng 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0289 Span 0500 Swiss Bil 0500 Belg. New 0803 Hebrew Old 0424 Hebrew 0892 ORC A 0893 ORC B 0420 Arabic 0880 Cyril. Old 0423 Greek Old 0875 Gr New Euro 0871 Icelandic 0290 Japan Katak 0870 Latin 2 0838 Thai 1026 Turkish 188 Secondary Sets 0890 Yugos. Old 1097 Farsi 1025 Cyrillic 0905 Turk. Old 0256 Intern. 1 0924 Euro Lat-9 1140 Euro Eng 1141 Euro Aust 1142 Euro Dan. 1143 Euro Finn. 1144 Euro Ital. 1145 Euro Span. 1146 Euro UK 1147 Euro Fren. 1148 Euro Swiss 1149 Euro Ice. English US* English UK German German (Alt) Belgian Brazilian Canadian French Danish/Norweg. Danish (Alt) Finnish/Swedish Finnish (Alt) French International Italian Japanese Eng. Japanese Katak. Portuguese Portug. (Alt) Spanish Spanish (Alt) Spanish Speak. Swiss Fren/Ger Old Hebrew Hebrew Farsi/Latin Greek Old Greek New Arabic Turkish Turkish Old Latin 2/ROECE Yugoslavian 3270 Params Translation Tbl Prints out a table of the Coax interface’s current character set. This operation is valid only when the TN3270 interface is the current interface. Active Char Set Specifies which character language set will be the active set. • • Primary Sets (default) Secondary Sets Prt Partial Line • Enable (default). When this option is enabled, it forces the printer to print if a partial line is in the printer (i.e. line not ending with a LF). • Disable. When disabled, the last partial line of data will not be printed. Early Print Cmpl Early Print Complete allows the printer to send Print Complete status to the host before the printer is actually done printing all data. Early Print Complete is only available if the IPDS feature is installed. • Disable (default). Means the printer will suppress the Early Print Complete response until all printing is complete. • Enable. Means the printer will send an acknowledgement to the host when it is able to accept more data. NOTE: When an Early Print Complete is enabled and an error occurs, the data in the printer will remain in the buffer (regardless of the setting of the Cancel Buffer option). It is recommended that local procedures be followed to recover from the error. Do not select Early Print Complete while a print job is in progress. If this is done you will need to restart the printer. 189 Chapter 4 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation PTX Transparent Lead-in Chars You can enable additional printer features which are not accessible through standard TN3270 emulations. To access these features, send text commands in the data stream. The commands must have a start and end code. Four sets are available: • Set 1. start code: <% (default) stop code: > • Set 2. start code:¬¬ stop code: $ • Set 3. start code: _% stop code: _ • User Defined. Usr Defined HTRN This option is used to set user defined lead-in characters. The range is ASCII character. This option allows users to define ther own lead-in characters for the Printronix Specific commands. Select a hex value for the following codes for the User Defined option: • • • Start Code 1 5F (default) Start Code 2 5F Stop Code 5B Alt. Set 80-9F 190 • Printable (default). Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F. • Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code. 3270 Params Change Case Specifies the font as Mono or Dual case. This option is available only in non-SCS mode. The host will be notified of the change when the printer is placed online. Mono Case prints the same as Dual Case if the character set is one of the following “right to left” sets: Katak., Hebrew, Old Hebrew, and Farsi. SCS (System Network Architecture Character String) mode is controlled by the host computer. • • Dual Case (default) Mono Case Set Text Orientn Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page. This allows the printer to print languages which are printed right to left instead of left to right. • • Left to Right (default). Right to Left. When a right to left language is selected, the host will be notified of print direction changes when the printer is put online. Intervention Req Select from the following: • • Not Send To Host Send To Host (default). The printer sends a signal to the host computer when any of the following occur: • Printer faults occur. • Hold mode time–out occurs. If not selected, the printer will only send the signal on printer faults that cause data loss (paper jam, ribbon stall, online platen open, etc.). 191 Chapter 4 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation Compatibility Op The Compatibility Options allow you to select special printer functions in the non-SCS mode based on the capabilities of the printer emulated. CR At MPP+1 MPP is Maximum Print Position, which is also known as line length. This option controls a carriage return at the end of a print line and at MPP+1. • On (default). Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the next line. • Off. Produces a carriage return to the first print position of the current line. NL At MPP+1 Controls how many lines are skipped when the carriage returns to a new line. • On (default). Moves to the first print position two lines down from the current position. • Off. Moves to the first print position of the next print line. Position Aft FF (4234 only) Allows you to select the location of the print position after a form feed command is sent. 192 • On (default). Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first print line on the next form. • Off. Sets the printer to print at print position 2 of the first print line on the next form. 3270 Params Last Char = FF Determines the print line position when a form feed command is the last code encountered in the print buffer. • On (default). Moves to the first print position on the second line of the next form. • Off. Moves to the first print position on the first line of the next form. NOTE: This option is ignored if Auto Skip At End is on. If configured as a 3287, and a form feed occurs in the middle of a print buffer, the printer defaults to the first print position on the second line of the next form regardless of the setting of this option. Null Suppression • • Off (default). Ignores nulls. The print position does not move. On. Treats nulls as blank spaces. FF Validity Determines if the position of a form feed command affects its execution. • Off (default). Performs a form feed only if it occurs at the first print position in a line or at Maximum Print Position +1. A form feed command at any other position is recognized as a space. • On. Allows the printer to perform a form feed command anywhere in the data stream. 193 Chapter 4 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation Auto Skip At End Specifies whether or not to perform an automatic form feed at the end of a print buffer. If form feed is the last character in the print order, the form feed function is supplied by the Auto Skip At End option. • Off (default). Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the next line. • On. Sets the printer to print at print position 1 of the first line of the next form. FF After Job Determines the print position after an operator-initiated local copy (print screen function). • Off (default). Performs an automatic new line command after completing a print buffer (unless a new line, form feed, or carriage return command was the last one executed). The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the next line. • On. Performs an automatic form feed command unless a form feed was the last one executed. The printer is set to print at print position 1 of the first line on the next form. CR, EM, and NL (3287 only) CR (Carriage Return), EM (Error Message), and NL (New Line) specify that the printer treat the CR, EM, and NL control codes either as spaces or as control codes. 194 • On (default). Treats the CR, EM, and NL commands as control codes. • Off. Treats the CR, EM, and NL commands as spaces. 3270 Params Host Override Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host, or continues to use the current operator panel settings. • Disable (default). Allows these host commands to override operator panel settings: line length, forms length, lines per inch (LPI), characters per inch (CPI), print quality, and text orientation. Note the information appearing on the message display may not match the data stream setting. No values will change upon initial selection of the disable option. • Enable. The operator panel settings override the host commands. Format Control Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after absolute and relative move commands are executed. • Disable (default). Reflects distance, generated by the VGL feature, PGL feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the new position (after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed). • Enable. Max. Print Width Set the maximum print width the printer will print when using a C/T host interface. Set for 13.2 inches when printing files larger than the width of the printer. All data exceeding the width of the maximum Printer Width will be truncated. • • 13.2 inches (default) Printer Width (the maximum width of the printer) 195 Chapter 4 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation 5250 Params 5250 Params (1) (from page 167) Char Set Select Translation Tbl See the following page. Graphic Chek Err Enable* Disable Max. Print Width 13.2 inches* Printer Width 196 Active Char Set Secondary Set* Primary Set Graphic Chek Cod 60* 40-FE Set Text Orientn Left to Right* Right to Left Prt Partial Line Enable* Disable Host Override Disable* Enable PTX Transparent Lead-in Chars Set 1 <%>* Set 2 ¬¬$ Set 3 _%_ User Defined Usr Defined HTRN Start Code 1* Start Code 2 Stop Code Alt. Set 80-9F Printable* Control Code Format Control Disable* Enable NOTE: (1) This menu appears only if the TN5250 option is installed. 5250 Params * = Factory Default 5250 Params Char Set Select (from page 196) Primary Sets 0037 English US* 0037 Eng Nether 0500 Swiss Bil 0500 Belg. New 0273 Austr/Germ 0274 Belg. Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0278 Finnish 0297 French 0280 Italian 0281 Japan. Eng 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0285 English UK 0892 OCR A 0893 OCR B 0424 Hebrew 0803 Hebrew Old 0420 Arabic 0880 Cyril. Old 0423 Greek Old 875 Gr New Euro Secondary Sets 0871 Icelandic 0290 Japan Kata 0870 Latin 2 0838 Thai 1026 Turkish 0890 Yugos. Old 1097 Farsi 1025 Cyrillic 0256 Intern. 1 1112 Balt Mult 0924 Euro Lat-9 1122 Estonian 1140 Euro Eng. 1141 Euro Aust. 1142 Euro Dan. 1143 Euro Finn. 1144 Euro Ital. 1145 Euro Span. 1146 Euro English UK 1147 Euro Fren. 1148 Euro Swiss 1149 Euro Ice. 0500 Internat 5 English US* Austrian/German Belgian Brazilian Canadian French Danish/Norweg. Finnish/Swedish French Italian Japanese Eng. Japanese Katak. Portuguese Spanish Spanish Speak. English UK Old Hebrew Hebrew Farsi/Latin Greek Old Greek New Arabic Turkish Latin 2/ROECE Yugoslavian Multinational Translation Tbl Prints out a table of the TN5250 interface’s current character set. This operation is valid only when the TN5250 interface is the current interface. 197 Chapter 4 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation Active Char Set Selects which group of character sets (Primary or Secondary) will be active. • • Secondary Set (default) Primary Set Prt Partial Line • Enable (default). When this option is enabled, it forces the printer to print if a partial line is in the printer (i.e. line not ending with a LF). • Disable. When disabled, the last partial line of data will not be printed. PTX Transparent Lead-in Chars You can enable additional printer features which are not accessible through standard TN5250 emulations. To access these features, send text commands in the data stream. The commands must have a start and end code. Four sets are available: 198 • Set 1. start code: <% (default) stop code: > • Set 2. start code:¬¬ stop code: $ • Set 3. start code: _% stop code: _ • User Defined. 5250 Params Usr Defined HTRN This option is used to set user defined lead-in characters. The range is ASCII character. This option allows users to define ther own lead-in characters for the Printronix Specific commands. Select a hex value for the following codes for the User Defined option: • • • Start Code 1 5F (default) Start Code 2 5F Stop Code 5B Alt. Set 80-9F • Printable (default). Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F. • Control Code. Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code. Graphic Chek Err Allows overriding of the host setting for the SGEA (Set Graphic Error Action) command. For more information about the SGEA command, refer to the Coax/Twinax Programmer's Reference Manual. • Enable (default). The host setting for the SGEA used by the printer. If the SGEA command is requested to stop on graphic errors, the printer will stop when a graphic error is detected. • Disable. Ignores the SGEA command from the host. The printer does not stop when an error is detected; instead, it substitutes the character selected in the Graphic Chek Code parameter. 199 Chapter 4 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation Graphic Chek Cod Specifies the replacement character to print in place of any unprintable character that is received from the host. Choose a hex character from 40 through FE. The character becomes the printer default when: • • • The printer is powered off and then powered on. An SGEA command specifies to use the operator panel default. The Graphic Chek Err parameter is disabled. The value can be the following: • • 60 (default) 40 – F4 Set Text Orientn Specifies the direction in which characters are printed on the page. This allows the printer to print languages which are printed right to left instead of left to right. • • 200 Left to Right (default) Right to Left. When a right to left language is selected, the host will be notified of print direction changes when the printer is put online. 5250 Params Host Override Determines whether the printer accepts certain commands sent by the host, or continues to use the current operator panel settings. • Disable (default). Allows these host commands to override operator panel settings: line length, forms length, lines per inch (LPI), characters per inch (CPI), print quality, and text orientation. Note the information appearing on the message display may not match the data stream setting. No values will change upon initial selection of the disable option. • Enable. The operator panel settings override the host commands. Format Control Enables the printer to reflect the same spacing as CTPC model printers after absolute and relative move commands are executed. • Disable (default). Reflects distance, generated by the VGL feature, PGL feature, and Hex Transparent control code sequence, in the new position (after horizontal and vertical tabs are executed). • Enable. Max. Print Width Set the maximum print width the printer will print when using a C/T host interface. Set for 13.2 inches when printing files larger than the width of the printer. All data exceeding the width of the maximum Printer Width will be truncated. • • 13.2 Inches (default) Printer Width (the maximum width of the printer) 201 Chapter 4 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation SPC Coax Params * = Factory Default 1 = Option needs to be selected CTHI (from page 167) Simp Prot Conv1 SPC Coax Params Logical Buf Size 1920* 960 2560 3440 3564 PA1 Image Buf Size Intervention Req Buffer Print Translation Tbl Disable* Enable Send to Host* Disable* Do Not Send Enable 4K* 2K PA2 Buffer Reprint Column 132 Wrap SPC Null Supp Disable* Enable SPC Space Supp Disable* Enable Usr Defined HTRN Start Code 1 Start Code 2 Stop Code NL At MPP+1 On* Off Logical Buf Size Refers to the size of the printer buffer, which should be set the same as the host screen (buffer) size. If the host screen size is unknown, use 1920. Do not change this parameter in the middle of a print job. Image Buf Size This option refers to the printer base buffer size. This size must be set to a value greater than or equal to the Logical Buffer Size. 202 SPC Coax Params Intervention Req • Send to Host (default). The printer sends a signal to the host computer when the CANCEL key is pressed or a printer fault or hold mode time-out occurs. • Do Not Send. No signal will be sent to the host computer. Buffer Print • • Disable (default). The printer will print normally. Enable. The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received from the host as hex values. Refer to page 315 for information on how to obtain a hex code printout. Translation Tbl Prints a table of the Coax interface's current character set. This operation is valid only when the Coax interface is selected (see “HOST INTERFACE” on page 85). Column 132 Wrap When enabled, this option causes the printer to line wrap at 132 characters despite the current print density, allowing more characters per line. The options include: • • Disable (default) Enable Usr Defined HTRN This option is used in Twinax SPC emulation. The range is ASCII character. This option allows users to define ther own lead-in characters for the Printronix Specific commands. Select a hex value for the following codes for the User Defined option: • • • Start Code 1 5F Start Code 2 5F Stop Code 5B 203 Chapter 4 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation PA1 PA1 is only valid when the printer is in the offline state and the Coax Systems Network Architecture Character String (SCS) data stream is active. This function displays the “PA1 ENABLED” message when the ENTER key is pressed and sends a special operator request to the host when the printer is placed online. Refer to the Coax/Twinax Programmer's Reference Manual for more information about SCS. PA2 PA2 is only valid when the printer is in the OFFLINE state and the Coax SCS data stream is active. This function displays the “PA2 ENABLED” message when the ENTER key is pressed and sends a special operator request to the host when the printer is placed ONLINE. Buffer Reprint This option is valid only when the printer is printing in SCS mode. When the ENTER key is pressed, “Buffer Reprint Enabled” is displayed and an Intervention Required status is sent to the host. Pressing ENTER again cancels the Buffer Reprint function and “Buffer Reprint Disabled” is displayed. SPC Null Supp 204 • Disable (default). Ignores nulls. The print position does not move. • Enable. Treats nulls as blank spaces. SPC Coax Params SPC Space Supp This option is only available in Coax SPC emulation and is used in LU3/DSC/DSE mode only. • • Disable (default). Treats nulls and spaces normally. Enable. If the entire line consists of spaces and nulls, the line will be discarded. NL At MPP+1 Controls how many lines are skipped when the carriage returns to a new line. • On (default). Moves to the first print position two lines down from the current position. • Off. Moves to the first print position of the next print line. 205 Chapter 4 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation SPC Twx Params * = Factory Default CTHI (from page 167) Simp Prot Conv SPC Twinax Params Device Address SPC Type Translation Tbl Address 1* Address (0-6) Buffer Print Disable* Enable MODE 219* Printer Type Impact/P-Series* STD Centronics IGP/VGL IGP/PGL SFCC Char Logical Not* Caret (^) User Defined HTRN Start Code 1 Start Code 2 Stop Code EVFU Enable* Disable SPC Char Set Multinational* Austrian/German Belgian Canadian French Danish/Norweg. French Spanish English US MODE P5000 SPC Char Set 0500 Internat 5* 0037 English US 0273 Austr/Germ 0274 Belg. Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0278 Finnish 0297 French 0280 Italian 0281 Japan. Eng 0290 Japan Kata 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0285 English UK SFCC Char Logical Not* Caret (^) User Defined User Defined HTRN Start Code 1 Start Code 1 Stop Code MODE IBM SPC Char Set 0500 Internat 5* 0037 English US 0273 Austr/Germ 0274 Belg. Old 0275 Brazilian 0260 Canad Fren 0277 Danish 0278 Finnish 0297 French 0280 Italian 0281 Japan. Eng 0290 Japan Kata 0282 Portuguese 0284 Span Speak 0285 English UK SFCC Char Logical Not* Caret (^) User Defined User Defined HTRN Start Code 1 Start Code 1 Stop Code NOTE: To access the SPC Twinax Params menu, be sure to select the Twinax option in the Host Interface menu. 206 SPC Twx Params Device Address Allows you to set the device address from 0 through 6. The host directs data and commands on the twinax line to a specific device based on its unique device address. After the address has been changed, a POR status is sent to the host. SPC Type Allows you to select a specific type of Simple Protocol Convertor (SPC) Twinax emulation: MODE 219 for Model 219 protocol convertor, MODE P5000 for Printronix protocol convertor, and MODE IBM for the IBM protocol convertor. Printer Type Determines the SPC Twinax emulation “Mode.” When set to Std Centronics, IGP/VGL, or IGP/PGL, the Set Line Density and Set Print Density commands are translated into a Carriage Return (CR), and vertical format commands are ignored unless the EVFU is enabled. SFCC Char Determines what character is printed when an EBCDIC Logical Not character ¬ (Hex 5F) is received from the host. User Defined HTRN This option is used in Twinax SPC emulation. The range is ASCII character. This option allows users to define ther own lead-in characters for the Printronix Specific commands. Select a hex value for the following codes for the User Defined option: • • • Start Code 1 Start Code 2 Stop Code 207 Chapter 4 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation EVFU • Enable. The EVFU parameter allows vertical format control by the host in all four printer type modes. • Disable. Vertical format control is only allowed in IMPACT/P-SERIES mode. SPC Char Set Allows you to select the print language character set. Translation Tbl Prints out a table of the Twinax interface's current character set. This operation is valid only when the Twinax interface is selected. Buffer Print • • 208 Disable (default). The printer will print normally. Enable. The printer prints the EBCDIC data and control codes received from the host as hex values. Refer to page 315 for information on how to obtain a hex code printout. LinePrinter Plus Emulation SPC Twx Params LinePrinter Plus Emulation NOTE: When the printer is set to SPC Twx Params or SPC Coax Params, no LP+ menu items will take effect on the same offline. The LP+ Emulation resets when the printer is taken offline. * = Factory Default EMULATION (from page 166) LinePrinter+ Printer Protocol CPI/LPI Select (see next page) Select LPI 6.0 LPI* 8.0 LPI 10.3 LPI P/S Mode CPI Changed* Unchanged Select CPI 10.0 CPI* 12.0 CPI 13.3 CPI 15.0 CPI 17.1 CPI 20.0 CPI Reset Cmd CFG Ld Disable* Power up config Current config Factory config Host Command Enable* Ignore All Ignore CPI Ignore LPI Ignore Unidir. Set Substitution Inactive* Active Font Attributes Page Format Print Char. Set (see next page) (see page 211) Barcode x-offset Disable* Enable 209 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation * = Factory Default Printer Protocol (from page 209) P-Series* P-Series XQ Serial Matrix Proprinter XL Epson FX (see page 219) (see page 228) (see page 232) (see page 236) (see page 241) Font Attributes (from page 209) Typeface Prop. Spacing Data Processing* Disable* NLQ Enable OCR-A OCR-B High Speed NLQ Sans Serif High Speed 100 NLQ 200 DP 200 High Speed 64 BARCODE 145 BARCODE 160 210 Bold Print Disable* Enable Italic Print Slashed Zero Disable* Disable* Forward Slant Enable Backward Slant Text Position Top of Line* Bottom of Line LinePrinter Plus Emulation SPC Twx Params * = Factory Default 1These menus do not appear if the Coax or Twinax host interface is selected. See page 85. 2 This value is 132 if the Coax or Twinax host interface is selected. Page Format (from page 209) Form Length Abs. Length IN1 11.0* inches (0.1-24) Abs. Length MM 1 279.4* mm (0.1-609.6) Funct. of Lines 66* lines (1-192) Form Width Abs. Width IN1 13.6* inches (0.1-13.6) Abs. Width MM1 345.4* mm (0.1-345.4) Function of CPI 136*2 characters (1-272) Margins Left Margin1 0* columns (0-369) Right Margin1 0* columns (0-369) Bottom Margin 0* lines (0-451) Perforation Skip1 Disable* 1/2 Inch 2/3 Inch 5/6 Inch 1 inch 211 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (with PCL-II) LinePrinter Plus Emulation (with PCL-II) NOTE: When the printer is set to SPC Twx Params or SPC Coax Params, no LP+ menu items will take effect on the same offline. The LP+ Emulation resets when the printer is taken offline. * = Factory Default EMULATION (from page 166) LinePrinter+ Printer Protocol Print Char. Set (see page 209) Reset Cmd CFG Ld Disable* Power up config Current config Factory config 212 CPI/LPI Select Select CPI 10.0 CPI* 12.0 CPI 13.3 CPI 15.0 CPI 17.1 CPI 20.0 CPI Select LPI 6.0 LPI* 8.0 LPI 10.3 LPI Font Attributes (see next page) Page Format LinePrinter Plus Emulation PCL-II) SPC (with Twx Params * = Factory Default Font Attributes (from page 212) Typeface Data Processing* NLQ OCR-A OCR-B High Speed NLQ Sans Serif Prop. Spacing Disable* Enable Bold Print Disable* Enable Italic Print Disable* Forward Slant Backward Slant Slashed Zero Disable* Enable Printer Protocol Select the LinePrinter+ protocol you wish to use. Refer to the LinePrinter Plus Programmer's Reference Manual for more information. CPI/LPI Select This parameter lets you specify the characters per inch (cpi) and lines per inch (lpi) values. Host Command This parameter allows you to block certain host commands from being acknowledged by the printer. • Enable (default). All host commands are acknowledged by the printer. • • Ignore All. All host commands are ignored by the printer. Ignore CPI. All CPI commands sent by the host are ignored by the printer. 213 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (with PCL-II) • Ignore LPI. All LPI commands sent by the host are ignored by the printer. • Ignore Unidir. All Unidirectional commands sent by the host are ignored by the printer. Font Attributes Typeface 214 • Data Processing. A general purpose font printing out at 120 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically. The width of the font will vary with each cpi. • NLQ. A high quality font printing at 180 dpi horizontally and 96 dpi vertically. This font has serifs and the width of the font varies with the cpi. • OCR-A / OCR-B. Optical character recognition fonts printing at 120 dpi horizontally and 144 dpi vertically. Both fonts print only at 10 cpi. • High Speed. A draft quality font printing at 120 dpi horizontally and 48 dpi vertically. The width of the font varies with the cpi. • NLQ Sans Serif. A high quality font printing at 180 dpi horizontally and 96 dpi vertically. This font prints without serifs. The width of the font varies with the cpi. • High Speed 100. A draft quality font printing at 100 dpi horizontally and 48 dpi vertically. When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 10 cpi. The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change. • NLQ 200. This NLQ font prints at 200 dpi horizontally and 96 vertically. When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 12 cpi. The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change. • DP 200. This Data Processing font prints at 200 dpi horizontally and 72 vertically. When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 12 cpi. The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change. LinePrinter Plus Emulation SPC Twx Params • High Speed 64. This font prints at 120 dpi horizontally and 64 vertically. When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 10 cpi. The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change. • BARCODE 145. This Data Processing font prints at 145 dpi horizontally and 72 vertically. When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 12 cpi. The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change. • BARCODE 160. This Data Processing font prints at 160 dpi horizontally and 72 vertically. When chosen from the front panel, it defaults to 13 cpi. The cpi can then be varied, but the width will not change. Prop. Spacing (Proportional Spacing) Each printed character is contained inside a character cell. The width of the character cell includes the character and the space around the character. • Disable. Each character cell is printed with the same width. Each column in the printed text will line up. • Enable. The width of each character cell varies with the width of the character. For example, [i] takes less space to print than [m]. Using proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed documents, which gives text a typeset appearance. 215 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (with PCL-II) Bold Print • • Disable. Text is printed normally. Enable. Text is printed with a heavy line thickness. Italic Print • • • Disable. Text is printed normally. Forward Slant. Text is printed with a forward slant. Backward Slant. Text is printed with a backward slant. Slashed Zero This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash. This option applies to all character sets except OCR-A and OCR-B. • • Disable. Zero is printed without a slash. Enable. Zero is printed with a slash. Text Position Specifies where the text will be positioned in the line space. When set to Top-of-Line, text will be positioned at the top of the line space. When set to Bottom-of-Line, the text will be positioned as if it were at the bottom of a 6 lpi line space. The following example shows both Top-of-Line and Bottom-of-Line text positions: Dot Row Top of Linespace 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Bottom of 8 LPI Linespace 9 10 11 Bottom of 6 LPI Linespace12 1 Text Position Text Position Top-of-Line Top of Line 216 Text Position Text Position Bottom-of-Line Bottom of Line LinePrinter Plus Emulation SPC Twx Params Page Format Form Length Forms length is the number of lines that can be printed on a page. You can set the form length in inches, millimeters (mm), or as a function of the current lpi (lines per inch). Form Width The form width can be specified in inches, millimeters, or as a function of the current cpi (characters per inch). The forms width set should not exceed the actual paper width. Margins • Left Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far left edge of the page, and column numbering increments from left to right. • Right Margin. Set in columns. Column zero is defined as the far right edge of the page, and column numbering increments from right to left. • Bottom Margin. Defined in lines, starting from line zero at the bottom of the page and incrementing from the bottom up. Perforation Skip • • Disable. Allows printing on page perforation. You may set up a skip-over margin of 1/2 inch, 2/3 inch, 5/6 inch, or 1 inch. For example, a skip-over margin of 1 inch allows a 1 inch margin at the bottom of the page. Print Char. Set When this selection is displayed and the ENTER key is pressed, the current character set is printed. 217 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (with PCL-II) Reset Cmd CFG Ld When the printer receives a host data stream reset command (ESC @ or ESC[K) in addition to resetting printer variables, the selected configuration is loaded. • Disable (default). The active emulation parameters are loaded when the reset command is executed. • Power-Up Config. The power-up configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed. • Current Config. The currently selected configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed. • Factory Config. The factory installed configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed. Set Substitution When this option is activated, the character set overlay in RAM is activated. This can also be accomplished through a host command of SFCC RX. In either case, a flag is set indicating that the substitution table is active. If the power-up configuration has Ld Set at Pwrup and Set Substitution both enabled, the character set overlay is automatically activated at power-up or during a soft reset. See the LinePrinter Plus Programmer's Reference Manual for more information. Barcode X-Offset • • 218 Disable (default) Enable. Allows text to print next to a barcode when xxxx and yyyy are not set to the origin. P-Series Emulation P-Series Emulation * = Factory Default Printer Protocol (from page 209) P-Series Control Code 06 8.0 LPI* 10.3 LPI 6.0 LPI P-Series SFCC 1* (0-7F hex) Control Code 08 Elongated* Backspace VFU Select EVFU* DVFU CVFU Disable Define CR Code CR = CR* CR = CR + LF Alt. Set 80-9F Control Code* Printable Auto LF Disable* Enable Character Set Overstrike Enable* Disable SFCC d Command (see page 225) Even dot plot* Double high Define LF Code LF = CR + LF* LF = LF PSeries Dbl High Normal* P3/4/6/9 Compat FF valid at TOF Enable* Disable 219 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (with PCL-II) P-Series Emulation (with PCL-II) * = Factory Default Printer Protocol (from page 209) P-Series Control Code 06 8.0 LPI* 10.3 LPI 6.0 LPI P-Series SFCC 1* (0-7F hex) 220 Control Code 08 Elongated* Backspace EVFU Select Enable* Disable Define CR Code CR = CR* CR = CR + LF Auto LF Disable* Enable Alt. Set 80-9F Character Set Control Code* Printable (see page 226) Overstrike Enable* Disable Define LF Code LF = CR + LF* LF = LF P-Series Emulation (with LG) P-Series Emulation (with LG) * = Factory Default Printer Protocol (from page 209) P-Series Control Code 06 8.0 LPI* 10.3 LPI 6.0 LPI P-Series SFCC 1* (0-7F hex) Control Code 08 Elongated* Backspace CR = CR* CR = CR + LF EVFU Select Enable* Disable Auto LF Define CR Code Disable* Enable Character Set Alt. Set 80-9F Control Code* Printable Overstrike Enable* Disable Define LF Code LF = CR + LF* LF = LF SFCC d Command (see page 227) Even dot plot* Double high Control Code 06 Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8, or 10.3 LPI. Control Code 08 Control Code 08 defines the function of ASCII code hex 08 (BS). You can define the code to output the following character: • • Elongated (default). Backspace. 221 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (with PCL-II) Define CR Code This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a carriage return, it inserts an additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host computer sends Line feeds to the printer. • CR = CR (default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return. • CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return. The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line. Auto LF This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the forms width setting. • • Disable (default). Discards any data past the forms width. Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width, causing the excess text to print on the next line. Overstrike This option enables you to print bold characters. • Enable (disable). Turns on bold print. When enabled, overstrike printing slows down the printer. • Disable. Turns off bold print. Define LF Code 222 • LF = CR + LF (default). Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed command. The next print position is print position 1 of the next line. • LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The next print position will be the current print position of the next line. P-Series Emulation P-Series Emulation (with LG) P-Series SFCC This parameter allows you to select which ASCII codes will function as the Special Function Control Code (SFCC) command delimiter. P-Series codes can use hex 00 through hex 7F. Options include the following: • • • • • ESC (hex 1B) SOH (hex 01) ETX (hex 03) CIRCUMFLEX (hex 5E)—also called caret (^) TILDE (hex 7E)—(~) NOTE: SOH, ETX, and ESC are non-printables. The characters (^) and (~) are printable; however, do not use them as printables in the host data stream if either is chosen as a delimiter because print errors will occur. VFU Select Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting. • EVFU (default). Enables the VFU and selects P-Series compatible Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU). • DVFU. Enables the VFU and selects the Dataproducts compatible Direct Access Vertical Format Unit (DVFU). • CVFU. Enables the VFU and selects the Centronics compatible Direct Access Vertical Format Unit (CVFU). • Disable. Disables all VFU processing. Alt. Set 80-9F Determines whether the printer processes ASCII codes hex 80 through hex 9F as control codes or as printable characters. The options include: • • Control Code (default) Printable. 223 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (with PCL-II) Character Set Specifies a character set as shown in the “P-Series Character Set Menu” on page 225. To use one of these sets, choose the desired group heading (such as European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the desired set within that group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the group and the desired set will be starred to indicate your selection. Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual. SFCC d Command • Even dot plot (default). This option interprets SFCC d Command as even dot plot. • Double High. This option interprets SFCC d Command as double high. Select this option for backward compatibility. PSeries Dbl High Allows printing compatibility between current and older model printers. • Normal (default). This is normal, double-high printing for current model printers. • P3/4/6/9 Compat. Where older printers print two dot rows higher, this option allows for compatibility by raising the print two dot rows to match the current models dot row value (two dot rows lower). FF Valid at TOF 224 • Enable (default). Performs a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form. • Disable. Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form. P-Series Emulation P-Series Emulation (with LG) P-Series Character Set Menu Character Set (from page 219) Arabic Sets ASMO 449* ASMO 449+ ASMO 708 ASMO 708+ MS DOS CP710 MS DOS CP720 Sakr CP714 Aptec CP715 CP 786 Arabic CP 864 Arabic CP 1046 Arabic Lam 1 Arabic Lam 2 Win. CP 1256 Farsi 1 Farsi 2 1098 Farsi 1285 * = Factory Default Cyrillic Sets Cyrillic 866* Cyrillic CP 437 Cyrillic 113 Cyrillic 8859-5 ISO 915 Code Page 855 7-bit Cyrillic Ukrainian Bulgarian Win. CP 1251 Turkish Sets Misc. Sets Data Gen. Turk.* DEC Turkish IBM Turkish Siemens Turkish PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Unisys Turkish NCR Turkish PST Turkish UNIS-1 Turkish Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win. CP 1254 Code Page 857 Block-set 10cpi* Italics Set Scanblock 10cpi PGL Thai Set European Sets Latin 2 8859-2* Latin 2 852 Mazovia Kamenicky Roman 8 PC-437 Slavic Slavic 1250 Code Page 865 Code Page 860 Latin 1 8859-1 Latin 5 8859-9 Latin 9 8859-15 Polish POL1 Win. CP 1250 Win. CP 1252 Win. CP 1257 CP 858 EURO Lith. CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859-4 Greek Sets DEC 256 Greek* ELOT 928 Greek Greek 3 ABY Greek ABG Greek ELOT 927 Greek Greek 851 Greek 437 Greek 8859-7 Win. CP 1253 Greek 813 EURO Greek 869 EURO Hebrew Sets Hebrew Old* Hebrew New Hebrew DEC Latin-1 Hebrew Win. CP 1255 UTF-8 225 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (with PCL-II) P-Series Character Set Menu (with PCL-II) * = Factory Default Character Set (from page 220) IBM PC* Primary Subset ASCII (USA)* French German English Danish Swedish Italian Spanish Japanese French Canadian Latin American Danish II Spanish II Latin Am II Extended Subset Code Page 437 Code Page 850 Extended Subset Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Mult. OCR-A OCR-B Latin 2 8859-2 Latin 2 852 Bulgarian Latin 9 8859-15 Polish POL1 DEC 256 Greek ELOT 928 Greek Greek 3 ABY Greek ABG Greek ELOT 927 Greek Greek 437 Greek 8859-7 PC851 LtGk [12G] Greek-7 [12N] Greek-8 [8G] Hebrew Old Hebrew New Hebrew DEC 226 P-Series Emulation P-Series Emulation (with LG) P-Series Character Set Menu (with LG) Character Set (from page 220) IBM PC* Primary Subset ASCII (USA)* French German English Danish Swedish Italian Spanish Japanese French Canadian Latin American Danish II Spanish II Latin Am II Extended Subset Code Page 437 Code Page 850 Multinational ASCII (USA)* EBCDIC ECMA Latin 1 Primary Subset ASCII (USA)* German Swedish Danish Norweigian Finnish English Dutch French Spanish Italian Turkish Japanese Extended Subset Multinational* Barcode 10 CPI Mult. DP 10 CPI Mult. DP 12 CPI Mult. LQ 10 CPI Greek DP 10 CPI Greek DP 12 CPI Greek LQ 10 CPI Grap. DP 10 CPI Grap. LQ 10 CPI Sci. DP 10 CPI Sci. DP 12 CPI Sci. LQ 10 CPI * = Factory Default DEC Mult. ASCII (USA)* French German English Norw./Danish Swedish Italian Spanish Japanese French Canadian Dutch Finnish Swiss OCR-A OCR-B Latin 2 8859-2 Latin 2 852 Bulgarian Latin 9 8859-15 CP 858 Euro 227 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (with PCL-II) P-Series XQ Emulation * = Factory Default Printer Protocol (from page 209) P-Series XQ Control Code 06 8.0 LPI* 10.3 LPI 6.0 LPI HS Print char 02 STX* char 03 ETX char 09 HT Define CR Code CR = CR* CR = CR + LF VFU Select EVFU* DVFU CVFU Disable Auto LF Disable* Enable Upr. Case Select Disable* Enable Define LF Code Compressed LF = CR + LF* LF = LF char 01 SOH* char 03 ETX char 09 HT Elong/Alt. Font Elng=BS Font=SO* Elng=SO Font=BS Slew Relative 1-16 lines* 1-15 lines Control Code 06 Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8, or 10.3 LPI. 228 P-Series XQ Emulation Define CR Code This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer. • CR = CR (default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return. • CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return. The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line. Auto LF This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the forms width setting. • • Disable (default). Discards any data past the forms width. Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width. Define LF Code • LF = CR + LF (default). Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed command received. The next print position is print position 1 of the next line. • LF = LF. Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed command is received. The next print position will be the current print position of the next line. 229 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (with PCL-II) Compressed Print Controls which host command sets compressed printing. • • • Char 01 SOH (default) Char 03 ETX Char 09 HT Elong/Alt. Font Controls which host command sets elongated (double high) fonts and extended character set. • • Elng=BS Font=SO (default) Elng=SO Font=BS HS Print (High Speed Print) Controls which host command sets high speed printing. • • • Char 02 STX (default) Char 03 ETX Char 09 HT VFU Select Controls how the printer handles vertical formatting. The choices are: 230 • EVFU (default). Enables the VFU and selects P-Series compatible Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU). • DVFU. Enables the VFU and selects the Dataproducts compatible Direct Access Vertical Format Unit (DVFU). • CVFU. Enables the VFU and selects the Centronics compatible Direct Access Vertical Format Unit (CVFU). • Disable. Disables all VFU processing. P-Series XQ Emulation Upr. Case Select Controls how the printer handles lowercase characters it receives from the host computer. When enabled, all characters will be printed in uppercase. • Disable (default). Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as lowercase, and prints uppercase characters received from the computer as uppercase. • Enable. Prints lowercase characters received from the host computer as their corresponding uppercase equivalents; uppercase characters received from the computer print as uppercase. Slew Relative “Slewing” is rapid vertical paper movement. This parameter determines the number of lines slewed (either 1-15 lines or 1-16 lines) when an EVFU Slew Relative command is received. The options include: • • 1-16 Lines (default) 1-15 Lines 231 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (with PCL-II) Serial Matrix Emulation * = Factory Default Printer Protocol (from page 209) Serial Matrix Control Code 06 8.0 LPI* 10.3 LPI 6.0 LPI Alt. Set 80-9F Control Code* Printable Define CR Code CR = CR* CR = CR + LF Character Set Auto LF Enable* Disable Overstrike Enable* Disable Define LF Code LF = LF* LF = CR + LF Printer Select Disable* Enable ESC d command (see page 235) Even dot plot* Double high Control Code 06 Control Code 06 defines the function of ASCII code hex 06 (ACK). You can select an alternate line spacing of 6, 8, or 10.3 LPI. 232 Serial Matrix Emulation Define CR Code This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer. • CR = CR (default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return. • CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return. The next print position will be print position 1 of the next line. Auto LF The Auto LF option defines the printer action when print data is received past the forms width setting. • Enable (default). Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width. • Disable. Discards any data past the forms width. Overstrike This option enables you to print bold characters. • Enable (default). Turns on bold print. When enabled, overstrike printing slows down the printer. • Disable. Turns off bold print. Define LF Code • LF = LF (default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a line feed command is received. The next print position will be the current print position of the next line. • LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each line feed command received. The next print position is print position 1 of the next line. 233 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (with PCL-II) Printer Select • Disable (default). Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes. • Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received. Alt. Set 80-9F • Control Code (default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code. • Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F. Character Set Specifies a character set as shown in the “Serial Matrix Character Set Menu” on page 235. To use one of these sets, choose the desired group heading (such as European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the desired set within that group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the group and the desired set will be starred to indicate your selection. Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual. ESC d command 234 • Even dot plot (default). Interprets the ESC d command as even dot plot. • Double high. Interprets the ESC d Command as double high. Select this option for backward compatibility. Serial Matrix Emulation Serial Matrix Character Set Menu * = Factory Default Character Set (from page 232) Cyrillic Sets Arabic Sets ASMO 449* ASMO 449+ ASMO 708 ASMO 708+ MS DOS CP710 MS DOS CP720 Sakr CP714 Aptec CP715 CP 786 Arabic CP 864 Arabic CP 1046 Arabic Lam 1 Arabic Lam 2 Win. CP 1256 Farsi 1 Farsi 2 1098 Farsi 1285 Cyrillic 866* Cyrillic CP 437 Cyrillic 113 Cyrillic 8859-5 ISO 915 Code Page 855 7-bit Cyrillic Ukrainian Bulgarian Win. CP 1251 Turkish Sets Misc. Sets Data Gen. Turk.* DEC Turkish IBM Turkish Siemens Turkish PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Unisys Turkish NCR Turkish PST Turkish UNIS-1 Turkish Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win. CP 1254 Code Page 857 Block-set 10cpi* Italics Set Scanblock 10cpi PGL Thai Set European Sets Latin 2 8859-2* Latin 2 852 Mazovia Kamenicky Roman 8 PC-437 Slavic Slavic 1250 Code Page 865 Code Page 860 Latin 1 8859-1 Latin 5 8859-9 Latin 9 8859-15 Polish POL1 Win. CP 1250 Win. CP 1252 Win. CP 1257 CP 858 EURO Lith. CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859-4 Greek Sets DEC 256 Greek* ELOT 928 Greek Greek 3 ABY Greek ABG Greek ELOT 927 Greek Greek 851 Greek 437 Greek 8859-7 Win. CP 1253 Greek 813 EURO Greek 869 EURO Hebrew Sets Hebrew Old* Hebrew New Hebrew DEC Latin-1 Hebrew Win. CP 1255 UTF-8 235 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (with PCL-II) Proprinter XL Emulation * = Factory Default Printer Protocol (from page 209) Proprinter XL Define CR Code CR = CR* CR = CR + LF Auto LF Enable* Disable Define LF Code LF = LF* LF = CR + LF FF valid at TOF Enable* Disable Character Set Alt. Char Set (see page 239) Set 1* Set 2 20 CPI Condensed Enable* Disable Define CR Code This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer. 236 • CR = CR (default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return. • CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return. Proprinter XL Emulation Auto LF This option defines the printer action when print data is received past the forms width setting. • Enable (default). Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width. • Disable. Discards any data past the forms width. Define LF Code • LF = LF (default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return when a Line Feed command is received. The next print position will be the current print position of the next line. • LF = CR + LF. Forces an automatic carriage return with each Line Feed command received. The next print position is print position 1 of the next line. FF Valid at TOF • Enable (default). Performs a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form. • Disable. Will not perform a form feed when the host sends a Form Feed command and the printer is at the top of form. Character Set Specifies a character set as shown in the “Proprinter XL Character Set Menu” on page 239. To use one of these sets, choose the desired group heading (such as European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the desired set within that group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the group and the desired set will be starred to indicate your selection. Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual. 237 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (with PCL-II) Alt. Char Set This option determines if data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F should be interpreted as a control code or as a printable character. • Set 1 (default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code. • Set 2. Prints data for the characters at hex locations 03, 04, 05, 06, 15, and 80 through 9F. 20 CPI Condensed Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set. This is helpful for applications where you need to print the maximum amount of information on a page. 238 • Enable (default). Prints characters about 60 percent the width of normal characters when compressed print is chosen by the host computer. • Disable. Does not compress print widths, even if condensed print is chosen by the host. Proprinter XL Emulation Proprinter XL Character Set Menu * = Factory Default Character Set (from page 236) Standard Sets* Arabic Sets ASMO 449* ASMO 449+ ASMO 708 ASMO 708+ MS DOS CP710 MS DOS CP720 Sakr CP714 Aptec CP715 CP 786 Arabic CP 864 Arabic CP 1046 Arabic Lam 1 Arabic Lam 2 Win. CP 1256 Farsi 1 Farsi 2 1098 Farsi 1285 Cyrillic Sets Cyrillic 866* Cyrillic CP 437 Cyrillic 113 Cyrillic 8859-5 ISO 915 Code Page 855 7-bit Cyrillic Ukrainian Bulgarian Win. CP 1251 European Sets Latin 2 8859-2* Latin 2 852 Mazovia Kamenicky Roman 8 PC-437 Slavic Slavic 1250 Code Page 865 Code Page 860 Latin 1 8859-1 Latin 5 8859-9 Latin 9 8859-15 Polish POL1 Win. CP 1250 Win. CP 1252 Win. CP 1257 CP 858 EURO Lith. CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859-4 Turkish Sets Data Gen. Turk.* DEC Turkish IBM Turkish Siemens Turkish PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Code Page 437* Code Page 850 Greek Sets DEC 256 Greek* ELOT 928 Greek Greek 3 ABY Greek ABG Greek ELOT 927 Greek Greek 851 Greek 437 Greek 8859-7 Win. CP 1253 Greek 813 EURO Greek 869 EURO Misc. Sets Unisys Turkish NCR Turkish PST Turkish UNIS-1 Turkish Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win. CP 1254 Code Page 857 OCR-A OCR-B Hebrew Sets Hebrew Old* Hebrew New Hebrew DEC Latin-1 Hebrew Win. CP 1255 UTF-8 Block-set 10cpi* Italics Set Scanblock 10cpi PGL Thai Set Multinational CP 858 EURO ASCII (USA)* EBCDIC 239 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (with PCL-II) Proprinter XL Character Set Menu (with PCL-II) Character Set (from page 236) * = Factory Default Code Page 437* Code Page 850 OCR-A OCR-B Latin 2 8859-2 Latin 2 852 Bulgarian Latin 9 8859-15 Polish POL1 Multinational DEC 256 Greek ELOT 928 Greek Greek 3 ABY Greek ABG Greek ELOT 927 Greek Greek 437 Greek 8859-7 PC851 LtGk [12G] Greek-7 [12N] Greek-8 [8G] Hebrew Old Hebrew New Hebrew DEC Proprinter XL Character Set Menu (with LG) Character Set (from page 236) Code Page 437* Code Page 850 OCR-A OCR-B Code Page 210 Code Page 220 Code Page 852 Code Page 855 Code Page 857 Code Page 862 Code Page 866 Lithuanian 1 Lithuanian 2 Hebrew New Hebrew Dec Hebrew Old Latin 9 8859-15 CP 858 Euro 240 * = Factory Default Epson FX Emulation Epson FX Emulation * = Factory Default Printer Protocol (from page 209) Epson FX Define CR Code CR = CR* CR = CR + LF Auto LF Enable* Disable Define LF Code LF = LF* LF = CR + LF Printer Select Disable* Enable Character Set 20 CPI Condensed (see page 244) Enable* Disable Alt. Set 80-9F Control Code* Printable Define CR Code The Define CR Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a carriage return, it inserts an additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer. • CR = CR (default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return. • CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return. 241 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (with PCL-II) Auto LF This option defines the printer actions when print data is received past the forms width setting. • Enable (default). Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the forms width. • Disable. Discards any data past the forms width. Define LF Code The Define LF Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Line Feed code (hex 0A) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a Line Feed, it inserts an additional Carriage Return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This feature is required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer. • LF = LF (default). Does not add a carriage return with a line feed. • LF = CR + LF. Adds an extra carriage return with each line feed. Printer Select 242 • Disable (default). Ignores the ASCII DC1 and DC3 control codes. • Enable. Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received. Epson FX Emulation Character Set This parameter selects a character set for the Epson emulation, as shown in the “Epson FX Character Set Menu” on page 244. Note that when OCR-A or OCR-B is selected as the print language, the Font Attribute Typeface option under the LinePrinter Plus menu (page 214) is changed to OCR-A or OCR-B, respectively. To use one of these sets, choose the desired group heading (such as European Sets) and press ENTER. Then choose the desired set within that group (such as Roman 8) and press ENTER. Both the group and the desired set will be starred to indicate your selection. Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual. 20 CPI Condensed Compressed print characters are narrower than the normal character set. This is helpful for applications where you need to print the maximum amount of information on a page. • Enable (default). Prints about 60 percent of the width of normal characters when compressed print is chosen by the host computer. For example, a 12 CPI Draft font will compress to 20 CPI. • Disable. Does not compress print widths, even if condensed print is chosen by the host. Alt. Set 80-9F • Control Code (default). Interprets data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F as a control code. • Printable. Prints data in the range of hex 80 through hex 9F. 243 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (with PCL-II) Epson FX Character Set Menu * = Factory Default Character Set (from page 241) Standard Sets* (See next page) 244 Arabic Sets Cyrillic Sets ASMO 449* ASMO 449+ ASMO 708 ASMO 708+ MS DOS CP710 MS DOS CP720 Sakr CP714 Aptec CP715 CP 786 Arabic CP 864 Arabic CP 1046 Arabic Lam 1 Arabic Lam 2 Win. CP 1256 Farsi 1 Farsi 2 1098 Farsi 1285 Cyrillic 866* Cyrillic CP 437 Cyrillic 113 Cyrillic 8859-5 ISO 915 Code Page 855 7-bit Cyrillic Ukrainian Bulgarian Win. CP 1251 Turkish Sets Misc. Sets Data Gen. Turk.* DEC Turkish IBM Turkish Siemens Turkish PTT Turkish IBC Turkish Bull Turkish AS400 Turkish Unisys Turkish NCR Turkish PST Turkish UNIS-1 Turkish Code Page 853 INFO Turkish Win. CP 1254 Code Page 857 Block-set 10cpi* Italics Set Scanblock 10cpi PGL Thai Set European Sets Latin 2 8859-2* Latin 2 852 Mazovia Kamenicky Roman 8 PC-437 Slavic Slavic 1250 Code Page 865 Code Page 860 Latin 1 8859-1 Latin 5 8859-9 Latin 9 8859-15 Polish POL1 Win. CP 1250 Win. CP 1252 Win. CP 1257 CP 858 EURO Lith. CP 773 Serbo Croatic 1 Serbo Croatic 2 CP 774 CP 775 ISO 8859-4 UTF-8 Greek Sets DEC 256 Greek* ELOT 928 Greek Greek 3 ABY Greek ABG Greek ELOT 927 Greek Greek 851 Greek 437 Greek 8859-7 Win. CP 1253 Greek 813 EURO Greek 869 EURO Hebrew Sets Hebrew Old* Hebrew New Hebrew DEC Latin-1 Hebrew Win. CP 1255 Epson FX Emulation * = Factory Default Character Set (from page 244) Standard Sets* Epson Set* ASCII (USA)* French German English Danish I Swedish Italian Spanish I Japanese Norwegian Danish II Spanish II Latin Am I French Canadian Latin Am II OCR-A OCR-B Multinational ASCII (USA)* EBCDIC Code Page 850 CP 858 EURO IBM PC 245 Chapter 4 LinePrinter Plus Emulation (with PCL-II) Epson FX Character Set Menu (with PCL-II) * = Factory Default Character Set (from page 241) Epson Set* ASCII (USA)* French German English Danish I Swedish Italian Spanish I Japanese Norwegian Danish II Spanish II Latin Am I French Canadian Latin Am II OCR-A OCR-B Latin 8859-2 Latin 2 852 Cyrillic 866 Bulgarian Latin 9 8859-15 Polish POL1 Multinational ASCII (USA)* EBCDIC DEC 256 Greek ELOT 928 Greek Greek 437 Greek 8859-7 PC851 LtGk [12G] Greek-7 [12N] Greek-8 [8G] Hebrew Old Hebrew New Hebrew DEC IBM PC 246 Epson FX Emulation Epson FX Character Set Menu (with LG) * = Factory Default Character Set (from page 241) Epson Set* ASCII (USA)* French German English Danish I Swedish Italian Spanish I Japanese Norwegian Danish II Spanish II Latin Am I French Canadian Latin Am II OCR-A OCR-B Code Page 250 Code Page 220 Code Page 852 Code Page 855 Code Page 857 Code Page 862 Code Page 866 Lithuanian 1 Lithuanian 2 Hebrew Old Hebrew New Hebrew Dec Latin 9 8859-15 CP 858 Euro IBM PC 247 Chapter 4 ANSI Emulation ANSI Emulation * = Factory Default EMULATION (from page 166) 44/48XXANSI CPI/LPI Select Font Attributes Page Format Define CR Code Select CPI 10.0* CPI 12.0 CPI 13.3. CPI 15.0 CPI 16.7 CPI 17.1 CPI Select LPI 6.0* LPI 8.0 LPI 3.0 LPI 4.0 LPI (see next page) (see next page) CR = CR* CR = CR + LF Character Set Printer Select (see next page) Pos. on BC/OvrSz Set to top* Set to bottom 248 ON=DC1/ OFF=DC3* Disable BC Check Digit By host* By printer ESC c Sequence Enable* Disable Reset Cmd CFG Ld Disable* Enable Received CR Observe* Disable* Power up config. Ignore Current config Factory config. Barcode darkmode Enable* Disable Auto LF PUM Default Decipoints* Lines/columns Define LF Code LF = CR + LF* LF = LF Received DEL Observe* Ignore Truncate PI Slew Truncate at TOF* Disable Private Mode Set 2* Set 1 ETX/ACK Disable* Immediate After Print ANSI Epson FX Emulation * = Factory Default Font Attributes (from page 248) Typeface Prop. Spacing Data Processing* Disable* Gothic NLQ Enable Char. Graphics High Speed Italics NLQ Courier NLQ OCR-A OCR-B Bold Print Disable* Enable Form Length Left Margin 0 columns* (0-369) Right Margin 0 columns* (0-369) Top Margin 0 lines* (0-451) Bottom Margin 0 lines* (0-451) Funct. of lines 66 lines* (1-192) Disable* Enable Character Set (from page 248) Page Format (from page 248) Margins Slashed Zero Form Width Function of CPI 136 Characters* (1-272) Latin 1 8859-1* Cyrillic 8859-5 IBM PC-2 CP 437 IBM PC-2 CP 850 Slavic CP 852 Cyrillic CP 855 Fr. Can. CP 863 Russian CP 866 Greek CP 851 Turkish CP 853 Portug. CP 860 Arabic CP 864 Nordic CP 865 Latin 2 8859-2 Latin 3 8859-3 Latin 4 8859-4 Lat. Ara. 8859-6 Lat. Gre. 8859-7 Lat. Heb. 8859-8 Latin 5 8859-9 Turkish2 CP867 Pol. Maz. CP8576 Turkish CP 8577 Greek CP 8573 Italian CP 23 Spanish CP 24 Latin 9 8859-15 DEC 256 Greek Turkish CP 857 USA German French A French B French Canadian Dutch Netherlds Italian United Kingdom Spanish Danish/Norw. A Danish/Norw. B Danish/Norw. C Danish/Norw. D Swed./Finnish A Swed./Finnish B Swed./Finnish C Swed./Finnish D Swiss USA Yugoslavian United Kingdm A Turkish Greek DEC Mult. Roman 8 249 Chapter 4 ANSI Emulation CPI/LPI Select Defines the default values for the horizontal and vertical character spacing. The number of characters per inch can range from 10.0 through 17.1. The number of lines per inch can range from 3.0 through 8.0. Font Attributes Typeface Choose a typeface from the available options. Prop. Spacing (Proportional Spacing) Each printed character is contained inside a character cell. The width of the character cell includes the character and the space around the character. • Disable. Each character cell is printed with the same width. Each column in the printed text will line up. • Enable. The width of each character cell varies with the width of the character. For example, [i] takes less space to print than [m]. Using proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed documents, giving text a typeset appearance. Bold Print • • 250 Disable. Text is printed normally. Enable. Text is printed with a heavy line thickness. ANSI Epson FX Emulation Slashed Zero This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash. This option applies to all character sets except OCR-A and OCR-B. • • Disable. Zero is printed without a slash. Enable. Zero is printed with a slash. Page Format Margins • Left Margin. Defines where the first print column is located. The left margin is specified as the number of characters from the left edge of the form. • Right Margin. Defines where the last print column is located. The right margin is specified as the number of characters from the right edge of the form. • Top Margin. Defines the location of the first print line on the page. The top margin is specified as the number of lines from the top of the form's position. • Bottom Margin. Defines the location of the last print line on the page. The bottom margin is specified as the number of lines from the bottom of the form's position. Form Length Specifies the form length in lines. The maximum form length in lines depends on the current LPI setting; it is equal to the maximum form length in inches multiplied by the current LPI setting. For example, at 6 LPI the maximum form length is 6 LPI x 24 inches = 144 lines. Only valid form length values will be accepted. If you select a length that is larger than the maximum length for the current LPI, the maximum length will be used. If you need a longer page length, you must first change the LPI. 251 Chapter 4 ANSI Emulation IMPORTANT If the form length is set in lines and you change the LPI, the effective page length changes to the form length in characters divided by the new LPI. NOTE: Receipt of a data stream control code which changes the form length overrides the form length previously specified via the operator panel. Form Width Allows you to input the form width in characters from 1 through 272. The maximum form width in characters depends on the current CPI setting; it is equal to the maximum form width in inches multiplied by the current CPI setting. Only valid form width values will be accepted. If a width is selected that is larger than the maximum width for the current CPI, then the maximum width will be used. If a larger width value is desired, then the CPI value must be changed first. Table 7 lists the maximum number of characters that can be printed for a given Characters Per Inch (CPI) setting. IMPORTANT If the form width is set in characters and the CPI is changed, the effective page width is changed to be equal to the form width in characters divided by the new CPI. Table 7. Form Width 252 CPI Setting Maximum Form Width (in characters) 10.0 136 12.0 163 13.3 181 15.0 204 16.7 227 17.1 272 ANSI Epson FX Emulation Define CR Code The Define CR Code option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a carriage return, it inserts an additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer. • • CR = CR (default). No extra line feeds are inserted. CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return. Auto LF Defines the printer actions when print data is received past the form width setting. • • Disable (default). Discards any data past the form width. Enable. Performs an automatic carriage return and line feed when data is received past the form width. Define LF Code Controls the action of the printer when it receives a Line Feed code (hex 0A) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a line feed, it inserts an additional carriage return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This feature can be used in most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer. • LF = CR + LF (default). Adds an extra carriage return with each line feed. • LF = LF. Does not add a carriage return with a line feed. 253 Chapter 4 ANSI Emulation Character Set This parameter selects a character set for the ANSI emulation. Note that when 0876 OCR-A or 0877 OCR-B is selected as the print language, the Font Attributes Typeface parameter is changed to OCR-A or OCR-B, respectively. Character sets are shown in detail in the Character Sets Reference Manual. Printer Select • ON = DC1/OFF = DC3 (default). Disables the printer when a DC1 control code is received, and enables the printer when a DC3 control code is received. • Disable. Ignores the DC1 and DC3 control codes. ESC c Sequence • Enable (default). An ESC c code received from the host resets the printer parameters to the factory defaults. • Disable. An ESC c code received from the host is ignored. Reset Cmd CFG Ld When the printer receives a host data stream reset command (ESC @ or ESC[K) in addition to resetting printer variables, the selected configuration will be loaded. 254 • Disable (default). The active emulation parameters are loaded when the reset command is executed. • Power-Up Config. The power-up configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed. • Current Config. The currently selected configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed. • Factory Config. The factory installed configuration is loaded when the reset command is executed. ANSI Epson FX Emulation Received CR • Observe (default). A CR code received from the host is handled as a carriage return. • Ignore. A CR code received from the host is ignored. Received DEL • Observe (default). A DEL code received from the host is handled as a Delete command. • Ignore. A DEL code received from the host is ignored. Private Mode Determines the default type of character set (Set 1 or Set 2). This can also be set by ESC sequences ESC [>5h and ESC [>5l. Refer to these descriptions in the ANSI Programmer's Reference Manual for further details. Pos. on BC/OvrSz • Set to top (default). The paper is fed back to the top of barcodes or oversized characters after they are printed. This allows printing on the same line. • Set to bottom. The printer will continue printing without backing up. BC Check Digit • By host (default). The host calculates the barcode check digit and sends it along with the barcode. The check digit is not verified by the printer but printed as it was received. • By printer. The barcode is sent without the check digit, and the printer calculates and adds it in. 255 Chapter 4 ANSI Emulation Barcode Darkmode • Enable (default). The barcodes are printed at a higher resolution. • Disable. The barcodes are printed at lower resolution but at a higher speed. PUM Default This is the Unit of Measure (UOM) as it is used within the ANSI emulation. Coordinates received in ESC sequences can be sent in two UOMs: • • Decipoints (default). A unit of 1/720 inch Lines or columns. Uses the current LPI and CPI values. The UOM used is determined by this configuration setting. Truncate PI Slew • Truncate at TOF (default). The slew is terminated when the next Top-of-Form is reached. (This function applies to the ANSI EVFU only.) • Disable. PI slews will be completed independent of their length. ETX/ACK End of Text/Acknowledge. The host controls the flow of communcation to the printer by sending a block of data and ending the block with an End of Text (ETX) signal. When the printer receives the ETX signal, it acknowledges the ETX, thereby acknowledging it has received the entire block of data. • • • 256 Disable (default) Immediate Afterprint IPDS Epson FX Emulation IPDS Emulation * = Factory Default EMULATION (from page 166) IPDS Font Size Print Quality Graphics Quality Barcode Quality Barcode Speed Select By Host* Standard Compressed char 01 SOH* char 03 ETX char 09 HT Select By Host* Default Font High* Select By Host Low High* Select By Host Low High* Select By Host Low Barcode Size Early Print Comp Graphics Scaling Graphic Charsize 4234* 67XX 64XX 4224 Off* On Rounded* Exact Default Code Pag Internat. Set 5* English/USA/Can Austrian/German Belgian Old Brazilian Canadian/French Danish/Norw. Finnish/Swedish French Azerty Italian Japanese/Eng. Katakana 4234* 67XX I 2/5 Checksum Standard (1/3)* Special (4/9) Code Page Subset Portuguese Spanish Spanish Speak. English (UK) Arabic Greek Icelandic Turkish Latin 5 Latin 2/Roece Cryllic Old Thai Hebrew Farsi Yugoslavian Latin 9 Euro US/CAN. Euro Aust/Germ. Euro Dan/Norw. Euro Fin/Swed. Euro Italian Euro Spanish Euro UK/Ireland Euro French Euro Internat. Euro Icelandic Thai Version 0* Version 1 Version 2 257 Chapter 4 IPDS Emulation * = Factory Default IPDS Emulation (from page 257) Default Font DRAFT 10* DRAFT 12 DRAFT 13 DRAFT 15 DRAFT 17 DRAFT 18 DP 10 DP 12 DP 13 DP 15 DP 17 DP 18 NLQ 10 NLQ 12 NLQ 13 NLQ 15 NLQ 17 NLQ 18 OCRA OCRB PSM VPA Check Enable* Disable Hexdump Mode Print IPDS Fonts Disable* Enable Your IPDS printer emulates the IBM 4234 twinax models 008 and 012. IPDS Twinax printers can only print IPDS data streams and nothing else. Even a simple job, such as a screen print, is IPDS data in a twinax attachment. Because the printer definition on a twinax host is either set automatically (by auto configuration) or manually, the printer type is already known. NOTE: A general discussion about starting and stopping IPDS can be found in the IBM 4234 Product and Programming Reference Manual (GC31-3879). Sending a non-IPDS data stream to an IPDS printer and vise versa will result in a hung spool file or writer. 258 IPDS Epson FX Emulation Font Size This parameter chooses the font size which will be used by IPDS. • Select By Host (default). The font ID is only affected by host commands. • • Standard. The font ID is converted to a decompressed font ID. Compressed. The font ID is converted to a compressed font ID. Print Quality This parameter chooses the print quality. • Select By Host (the default). The application decides the print quality. • Default Font. The default font the printer uses. Graphics Quality This parameter chooses the print quality of graphics. • • High (default). Graphics are printed at 144 dot rows per inch. • Low. Graphics are printed at 72 dot rows per inch. Select By Host. The application decides the quality of the graphics. Barcode Quality This parameter chooses the horizontal print quality of barcode labels. • • High (default). Label is printed at 144 dots per inch. • Low. Label is printed at 72 dots per inch. Select By Host. The application decides the quality of the labels. 259 Chapter 4 IPDS Emulation Barcode Speed This parameter chooses the vertical print quality of barcode labels. • High (default). Barcodes are printed with less vertical dots, increasing printing speed, but decreasing print quality. • Select By Host. The application decides the quality of the labels. • Low. Barcodes are printed with more vertical dots, decreasing printing speed, but increasing print quality. Barcode Size This parameter will emulate the barcode sizes of the selected printer model. • • • • 4234 (default). IBM 4234 67XX. Decision Data 67XX 64XX. IBM 6400 series 4224. IBM 4224 Early Print Comp (Complete) This parameter chooses when to send a Print Comp to the controller. • • Off (default). Print Comp is sent if page is printed completely. On. Print Comp is sent immediately. The next page will be created. This improves the print performance when starting the next page. NOTE: When Early Print Comp is enabled and an error occurs, you may lose data. 260 IPDS Epson FX Emulation Graphics Scaling This parameter chooses the scaling factor for graphics when the Mappin. Control option of the IPDS Write Graphics Control command is SCALE TO FIT: • Rounded (default). Calculations are rounded up in the desired output resolution. • Exact. Graphics will be scaled as accurately as possible. Graphic CharSize This parameter will emulate the graphic character size of the selected printer model. • 4234 (default). IBM 4234 • 67XX. Decision Data 67XX I 2/5 Checksum This parameter defines the printer checksum calculation method for Interleaved 2 of 5 barcodes. • Standard (1/3) (default). The odd numbers will be multiplied by 3 and the even numbers by 1 for calculation of the checksum. • Special (4/9). The odd numbers will be multiplied by 4 and the even numbers by 9 for calculation of the checksum. NOTE: “Odd” refers to the 1st, 3rd, 5th... character in the barcode, while “even” refers to the 2nd, 4th, 6th... character in the barcode. Default Code Pag Choose which code page to use with the IPDS emulation. This option is independent of the Character Set selection in the CTHI emulation. 261 Chapter 4 IPDS Emulation Code Page Subset When the Thai code page is selected as the default, either from the front panel or by a host command, you may choose from three different versions. Default Font Choose a font quality and size from the available selections. All fonts in the Default Font menu are available in standard and compressed vertical resolution (see page 257). VPA Check • Enable (default). The printer checks for dots that fall outside the intersection of the logical and physical pages. If dots fall outside the area, the printer reports an error to the host if the IPDS Exception Handling Control command setting requires error reporting. • Disable. The printer does not report dots outside the valid printable area. Hexdump Mode A hex code printout (or hex dump) translates all incoming data to hexadecimal equivalents. A hex dump lists each ASCII data character received from the host computer, together with its corresponding two-digit hexadecimal code. Hex dumps can be used to troubleshoot some types of printer data reception problems. Print IPDS Fonts This feature allows you to print a list of all resident fonts currently available in the active IPDS emulation 262 PCL-II Epson FX Emulation PCL - II Emulation * = Factory Default EMULATION (from page 166) PCL-II Primary Char. Set Second Char. Set ID ID 0* - 109, xx Symbol Set See next page Pitch 10*, 12, 13.3 Density Data Processing* NLQ OCR-A OCR-B High Speed 0* - 109, xx Symbol Set See next page Pitch 10*, 12, 13.3 Density Data Processing* NLQ OCR-A OCR-B High Speed Symbol Set Delay Disable* Enable PTX Linefeed Disable* Enable Graphics Density 60 DPI* 70 DPI LPI Adjust 6 LPI* 8 LPI Page Length Rep. Max Line Width Inches/Page* Lines/Page 13.2 inches* 13.6 inches Perforation Skip Disable* Enable Display Functns Disable* Enable Page L./Lines Page L./Inches 66 Lines* 12 - 96 Lines 11.0 Inches* Face CPI Delay Enable* Disable Line Terminator LF After CR CR After LF CR After FF CR After VT 263 Chapter 4 PCL - II Emulation PCL-II (Continued) Config. Print Symbol Set Print Reset Cmd CFG Ld Current Config* Factory Config Disable Power Up Config Primary Char. set (from previous page) Secondary Char. Set (from previous page) Symbol Set Symbol Set Roman-8[8U]* Turkish-8[8T] Arab-8[8V] Cyrillic[8R] PC858 MtLi[13U] MC Text[12J] Roman-9[4U] Latin-9[9N] Win3.0Lat-1[9U] Japan Postnet Katakana Post ASCII[0U] Math Sym[0A/0M] LineDraw[0B/0L] IS0 Den/Nor[0D] Roman Ext.[0E] IS0 UK[1E] IS0 France[0F] IS0 German[0G] Hebrew[0H] Japan ASCII[0K] Katakana[1K] Block Char[1L] 264 OCR-A[0O] OCR-B[1O] ISO Swe/Fin[0S] ISO Spain[1S] ISO Italian[0I] ISO Portugu[4S] Latin-1[0N] Latin-2[2N] Latin-5[5N] Latin-6[6N] Baltic[19L] PC8 DanNor[11U] PC8 Cd437[10U] PC850 MtLi[12U] PC851 LtGk[12G] PC852 Lat2[17U] PC Turkish[9T] PC Hebrew[15H] PC Lat/Ara[10V] PC Cyrillic[3R] Win3.1Lat1[19U] Win3.1Lat-2[9E] Win3.1Lat-5[5T] Math-8[8M] PS Math[5M] Greek-7[12N] Postnet4[15Y] Postnet11.25 Greek-8[8G] Hebrew-8[8H] Katakana-8[8K] DEC 256 Greek ELOT 928 Greek Greek 3 ABY Greek ABG Greek ELOT 927 Greek Greek 437 Greek 8859-7 (same as Primary Character Set) PCL-II Epson FX Emulation Primary Char. Set You can select one of 92 pre-defined character sets by ID (although character sets range from 0 - 109, not all sets are available on the LJ500 printer), or you can select pitch, symbol set, and typeface individually. If the combination you choose matches one of the 92 predefined sets, the ID submenu will reflect that selection. If not, the ID menu will display xx to indicate that the current character set does not match a pre-defined set. Set 0 is the default, and its attributes are 10 cpi, Data Processing typeface, and Roman 8 symbol set. Second Char. Set Your printer can store an additional character set. To toggle between them, send the Shift In (Decimal 15, to select the Primary character set) or Shift Out (Decimal 14, to select the Secondary character set). Page Length Rep. • Inches/Page (default). All page length calculations are based on the inches displayed on the panel. • Lines/Page. All changes in LPI or density will be changed accordingly. The length of the page is the number of lines per inch, or lpi. For example, if the form in use is 82 lines at 6 lpi, the page is physically 13.67 inches. Since 13.67 inches is not selectable from the Length in Inches menu, change the representation to lines, then set the number of lines to 82. The inches menu will display 13.6 inches although the printer internally keeps the exact form length of 13.67 inches. Max Line Width Set the maximum line width at 13.2 inches (the default) or 13.6 inches. 265 Chapter 4 PCL - II Emulation Face CPI Delay Allows the combination of different font densities on the same line. • Enable (default). Different font densities can be used on the same line. • Disable. Only the same font densities are allowed on the same line. Graphics Density Graphics can be printed in 60 DPI (the default) or 70 DPI. Perforation Skip • • Disable (default). Allows printing on page perforation. Enable. You may set up a skip-over margin. For example, a skip-over margin of one inch creates a one inch margin at the bottom of the page. Display Functions • Disable (default). The default. Control characters are not printed. • Enable. Control characters are printed before they get executed. This is a useful debugging tool. Line Terminator You can define the action of the line. Four options are available: LF after CR, CR after LF, CR after FF, and CR after VT. Each of these options may be enabled or disabled independent of one another. 266 PCL-II Epson FX Emulation PTX Linefeed • Disable (disable). The default. Linefeed is to be performed as calculated from the bottom of the graphics or barcode, thereby disrupting the vertical text alignment. • Enable. The Linefeed moves to the next line as calculated from the Top of Form position, thereby retaining vertical text alignment. When printing graphics or bar codes, you may want to set the PTX Linefeed parameter to Enable to maintain text alignment. PTX Linefeed Enabled LINE 1 LINE 1 LINE 2 PTX Linefeed Disabled Linefeed LINE 2 Linefeed LINE 3 LINE 3 LPI Adjust This parameter lets you specify the lines per inch (lpi) values: 6 LPI (the default) or 8 LPI. Page L./Lines This parameter lets you set physical page length in lines from 12 to 96 at 6 lpi, or 16 to 128 at 8 cpi. The default is 66 lines at 6 lpi. NOTE: If 6 lpi is selected, you will be able to scroll the menu to 128 (an invalid length). However, when you press ENTER to select this value, the menu will return with the maximum lines for 6 lpi (i.e., 96 lines). Similarly, selecting too few lines for 8 lpi will cause the menu to return with 16 lines. 267 Chapter 4 PCL - II Emulation Page L./Inches This parameter allows you to set physical page length from 2 to 16 inches, in increments of half an inch. The default is 11 inches. Config Print This option prints the emulation's parameters and the currently selected values. Symbol Set Print This option prints a list of all the available sets. The character set number prints to the left of the character set sample. Reset Cmd CFG Ld When the printer receives a host data stream reset command in addition to resetting printer variables, the selected configuration will be loaded. 268 • Power-Up Config (default). The power-up configuration is loaded when the reset command is received. • Current Config. If you have preset and presaved multiple configurations, then the currently selected presaved configuration is loaded when the reset command is received. • Disable. The printer ignores the reset command when it is received and continues to use the currently loaded configuration. • Factory Config. The factory installed configuration is loaded when the reset command is received. Epson LG FX Emulation LG Emulation * = Factory Default EMULATION (from page 166) LG Font See next page. LF = LF* = CR + LF Vert Forms Bot Frm 66/6 Top Mrg 0/6 Bot Mrg 66/6 FF = FF* = CR + FF Horiz Forms Left Mrg 66.0 Right Mrg 13.2 Unsolicited Rpt No* Single Big Autowrap No* Yes Print Mode Opt Enable* Disable CR = CR* = CR + LF Plot Mode Opt Enable* Disable I-2/5 Guard Bars Enable* Disable 269 Chapter 4 LG Emulation Font (from previous page) Style DP 10 6* DP 10 8 DP 12 6 DP 12 8 DP 15 6 DP 15 8 DP 15 10 HS 10 6 Corespon 5 6 Corespon 5 8 Corespon 6 6 Corespon 6 8 Corespon 10 6 Corespon 10 8 Corespon 12 6 Corespon 12 8 Corespon 15 6 Corespon 15 8 Corespon 15 10 OCR A OCR B Compress 6 6 Compress 6 8 Compress 8 6 Compress 8 8 Compress 13 6 Compress 13 8 Compress 13 10 Compress 16 6 Compress 16 8 Compress 16 10 DP 56 DP 58 DP 66 DP 68 270 Character Set GL Char Set U.S. ASCII* DEC Finnish French DEC Fr. Can. German Italian JIS Roman DEC Nor./Dan. Spanish DEC Swedish DEC Great Brit. ISO Nor./Dan. DEC Dutch DEC Swiss DEC Portuguese VT100 Graphics DEC Suppl. DEC Technical ISO Katakana 7-Bit Hebrew 7-Bit Turkish Greek Suppl. Hebrew Suppl. Turkish Suppl. GR Char Set DEC Suppl.* DEC Technical VT100 Graphics ISO Katakana ISO Latin 1 ISO Latin 2 ISO Latin 9 ISO Cyrillic ISO Greek ISO Hebrew Hebrew Suppl. Turkish Epson LG FX Emulation Font Select a default font style and character set for the LG emulation, as follows: • Style. This option allows you to specify a print quality that includes a characters per inch (cpi) and lines per inch (lpi) setting, in the format Type cpi lpi. The default setting is DP 10 6 (Data Processing, 10 cpi, 6 lpi). The print quality types you may choose from are as follows: DP = Data Processing (standard quality) CORESPON = Correspondence (near letter quality) COMPRESS = Compressed (vertically compressed for printing long graphs and charts) OCR A & OCR B = Optical Character Recognition, sets A and B HS = High Speed (Draft quality for high speed printing) • Character Set. This option allows you to select a character set. The character set you select can be any of the Digital Multinational sets, which include the U.S. ASCII set and several foreign language and special character sets. Vert Forms • Bot Frm 66/6 (default). This option sets the bottom margin for the forms. You must specify the bottom margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch), ranging from 0 to 198 lines (33 inches). The default setting is 66. Press the right arrow to increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. Selecting a value for this option resets the top margin to 0, so the top margin must be redefined after this option is selected. 271 Chapter 4 LG Emulation • Top Mrg 6/0.This option sets the top margin for the forms. You must specify the top margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch), ranging from 0 to 198 lines (33 inches). The default setting is 0. Press the right arrow to increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The margins will automatically adjust so that the top and bottom margins do not cross each other. • Bot Mrg 66/6. This option sets the bottom margin for the forms. You must specify the bottom margin in lines (at 6 lines per inch), ranging from 0 to 198 lines (33 inches). The default setting is 66. Press the right arrow to increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. Selecting a value for this option resets the top margin to 0, so the top margin must be redefined after this option is selected. Horiz Forms • Left Mgr 0.00 (default). This sets the left margin for the forms. You must specify the left margin in 1/10 inch increments, from 0 to 13.1 inches. The default value is 0. Press the right arrow to increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The margins will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross each other. • Right Mrg 13.2. This sets the right margin for the forms. You must specify the right margin in 1/10 inch increments, from 0.1 to 13.2 inches. The default value is 13.2. Press the right arrow to increase the value, left arrow to decrease the value, and ENTER to change units. The margins will automatically adjust so that the left and right margins do not cross each other. Autowrap This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line when the line of text exceeds the right margin. 272 • No (default). Any print data received past the forms width setting is discarded. • Yes. An automatic carriage return and line feed is performed when data is received past the forms width setting. Epson LG FX Emulation CR This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage Return code (hex 0D) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host computer sends line feeds to the printer. • = CR (default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each carriage return. • = CR + LF. If this feature is enabled, each time the printer receives a Carriage Return, it inserts an additional Line Feed code (hex 0A) into the data stream. (Do not use this feature if the host computer sends Line Feeds to the printer with each Carriage Return.) LF This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs. This can be used in most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer. • = LF (default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The next print position will be the current print position of the next line. • = CR + LF. Each time the printer receives a Line Feed, it inserts an additional Carriage Return code (hex 0D) into the data stream. This feature can be used in most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send Carriage Returns to the printer. 273 Chapter 4 LG Emulation FF This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code into the data stream whenever a Form Feed code occurs. This can be used in most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send carriage returns to the printer. • = FF (default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return. The next print position will be the current print position of the next form. • = CR + FF. Performs an automatic carriage return. The next print position will be print position 1 of the next form. Unsolicited Rpt This option enables or disables Printer Device Status Reports to be sent to the host when a reportable status or error condition has occurred. • No (default). Disables all unsolicited status reports from the printer. • Small. Enables brief unsolicited status reports and sends an extended status report to the host. • Big. Enables extended, unsolicited status reports and sends an extended status report to the host. Print Mode Opt When enabled, this option affects the SPI, SHS, and DECSHORP commands. The printer will no longer be forced into these commands and print speed improves significantly when in portrait orientation. For SHS and DECSHORP, the character size will change with the selected pitch. In addition, SGR attributes such as bold, crossed-out, and italics, will be done in print mode with greater efficiency. 274 • Disable (default). Disables the fpirnt mode option. This provides compatibility with older LG printer products. • Enable. Enables the print mode option. Epson LG FX Emulation Plot Mode Opt When enabled, this option will plot with greater efficiency, particularly with respect to the Postnet barcode. Postnet is printed in the same density as the current print mode font so that reverse motion will be inhibited when possible. • Disable (default). Disables the print mode option. This provides compatibility with older LG printer products. • Enable. Enables the print mode option. I-2/5 Guard Bars • Disable (default). Interleaved 2/5 bar codes are printed normally, with no guard bars. • Enable. Horizontal guard bars are printed above and below each Interleaved 2/5 bar code. This option only applies to Interleaved 2/5 bar codes. 275 Chapter 4 PRINTER CONTROL PRINTER CONTROL * Factory Default Not available in LG or PCL-II PRINTER CONTROL (from page 70) Ribbon End Point Darker +6 Darker +5 Darker +4 Darker +3 Darker +2 Darker +1 Normal* Lighter -1 Lighter -2 Lighter -3 Lighter -4 Lighter -5 Lighter -6 Lighter -7 Lighter -8 Lighter -9 Lighter -10 Unidirectional Disable* Enable 276 1 Eject Function Standard* Simple Tear Form Saver Out 3 Back 2 Out 4 Back 2 Disable Display Language English German French Italian Spanish Portuguese Open Platen @BOF Disable* Enable Accented Char 1 Standard* Tall Bar Code Quality Dark* Draft Tear Bar Dist. 7.46 inches.* (4.5 - 10.5) PRINTER Epson FX CONTROL Emulation Ribbon End Point This parameter adjusts the point at which the system will declare the ribbon as being expended. The life count will always be from 100% to 0%, but if a darker setting is selected 0% will be reached more quickly. If a lighter setting is selected, the system will extend the time it takes to reach 0%. The range of values are as follows: • • • Normal (default) Darker +1 through Darker +6 Lighter -1 through Lighter -10 NOTE: This value can be adjusted at any time and the display will automatically adjust to show the correct percentage relative to the new end point. Eject Function Enables and defines the eject function to be used. When activated, the function is used by holding down the VIEW/EJECT key for more than one second in offline mode. • Standard (default). Slews the paper two 11” pages when VIEW/EJECT is pressed for more than one second. Pressing VIEW/EJECT a second time retracts two pages. • Simple Tear. Allows demand printing for specially designed forms which require a header of at least 2.66 inches in height. This leader prevents the paper from falling out of the tractors when the demanded sheet is removed. Press the VIEW/EJECT key. The printer slews the bottom of the last printed form to the tear position. Tear the paper, then press the VIEW/EJECT button again. The paper reverses the exact amount of paper it slewed, placing the print position to the next available page. See “Demand Printing” on page 329 for detailed information on Simple Tear. 277 Chapter 4 PRINTER CONTROL • Form Saver. Allows near demand printing for forms that do not have pre-printed headers or special application designs. At least one blank page is required to load the paper so that it does not slip out of the tractors. For shorter form lengths, two or more blank pages may be necessary. When you press VIEW/EJECT, the bottom of the printed page is slewed to the tear position. When pressed again, the paper moves to the top of the next printable page available. See “Demand Printing” on page 329 for detailed information on Form Saver. • Out 3 Back 2. A page eject command moves to top-of-form three times then positions backward for two pages, giving the effect of a single page eject. • Out 4 Back 2. A page eject command moves to top-of-form four times then positions backward for two pages, giving the effect of a single page eject. • Disable. Prevents the use of the eject function. Open Platen @ BOF (Bottom of Form) Some special forms have perforation areas that are too thick to pass through the print station. This parameter, when enabled, opens and closes the platen when the perforations move across the platen. When enabling this parameter, you must set the forms length to match the physical distance between perforations. 278 PRINTER Epson FX CONTROL Emulation Bar Code Quality Determines the bar code resolution for all emulations, except IPDS. (See “IPDS Emulation” on page 257 to set the bar code quality for IPDS.) • • Dark (default). Bar code resolution is set at 120 x 72. Draft. Bar code resolution is set at 60 x 72. Tear Bar Dist. (Distance) Allows fine and course adjustment of the tear bar position. For a pedestal model printer using the top paper exit, the default (7.46 inches) is used. You can specify 4.5 to 10.5 inches in .01 inch increments to accommodate variations in cover and form design. Unidirectional The Unidirectional feature affects both print quality and printing speed. By setting this feature, you can configure the printer to print in both directions of the shuttle sweep (bidirectional), or to print in one direction only (unidirectional). • Disable (default). The printer will print all data in both directions of the shuttle sweep (bidirectional printing). This choice produces higher printing speed. • Enable. The printer will print all data in only one direction of the shuttle sweep (unidirectional printing). Although enabling this feature reduces print speed, it enhances the vertical alignment of dots and produces cleaner, sharper barcodes and text. 279 Chapter 4 PRINTER CONTROL Display Language This parameter chooses the language that will appear on the LCD: English, German, French, Italian, Spanish, or Portuguese. The factory default is English. Accented Char Selects whether the accented characters are standard or tall. See Figure 23 for an example. Selecting tall will slow print speed and may cause the printer to back up during printing. Standard Tall Figure 23. Accented Characters 280 ADVANCED USER Epson FX Emulation ADVANCED USER * = Factory Default 1 If you have the CT option, Enable is the default value. 2 If installed 3 Not available in PCL-II 4 Not available in LG or PCL-II ADVANCED USER (from page 70) PTX Setup Option 3 Setup Parse Disable* Enable Ignore Setup SFCC 21h* (1-FF hex) Hex Dump Mode Disable* Enable Power-up State Ld Char at Pwrup Disable* Enable Delete frm Flash Load from Flash Save to Flash Delete from RAM Enable* Disable Alarm On* Cont. Beep Off Auto Locking Disable* Enable File System Overwrite Files Enable* Disable View File List Delete Files Flash Avail. Optimize&Reboot Print File List Power Saver Time 15 minutes* (1 min - 240 min) Instant (5 sec - 30 sec) Pwr Save Control Enable* Disable PMD Fault Enable* Disable Online* Offline Char Operations Auto Elevator2 Downloaded Fonts 4 Set Operations Delete frm Flash Load from Flash Save to Flash Delete from RAM Set Sharing Disable* Enable Power Stacker2 Enable* Disable Ld Set at PwrUp Disable* Enable Shuttle Timeout 5 Seconds* 1-60 Seconds Slow Paper Slew Disable* Enable Cancel Key1 Disable* Enable 281 Chapter 4 ADVANCED USER ADVANCED USER (Continued) Set Lock Key Ribbon Action Stop RBN End* Ignore RBN End Ink Saver Mode Disable* Enable PTX Setup Option Selects the Special Function Control Code for the PTX_SETUP command and functions. • • Setup Parse. Disables or enables the PTX_SETUP command. Setup SFCC. Allows you to choose the hex value of the ASCII character you wish to use as the SFCC for the PTX_SETUP command. Valid hex values are 01-FF. The default value is hex 21, which corresponds to the “!” character. Hex Dump Mode A hex code printout (or hex dump) translates all incoming data to hexadecimal equivalents. A hex dump lists each ASCII data character received from the host computer, together with its corresponding two-digit hexadecimal code. Hex dumps can be used to troubleshoot some types of printer data reception problems. The options include: • • Disable (default) Enable Figure 27 on page 315 shows a hex dump sample. 282 ADVANCED USER Epson FX Emulation Power-Up State • • Online (default). The printer powers up in the online state. Offline. The printer powers up in the offline state. NOTE: This option is not available in the PCL-II or LG emulation. Downloaded Fonts Allows you to download a substitution table to replace any character in the current character set with a different character in the same font. • Char Operations. Allows you to delete a character from flash, load a character from flash, save a character to flash, and delete a character from RAM. • Ld Char at Pwrup. Allows you to disable or enable loading a character at power up. • Set Operations. Allows you to delete a character set from flash, load a character set from flash, save a character set to flash, and delete a character set from RAM. • Ld Set at PwrUp. Allows you to disable or enable loading a character set at power up. NOTE: This option is not available in the PCL-II or LG emulation. PMD (Paper Motion Detection) Fault CAUTION • Enable (default). In the event of a paper jam, an audible alarm beeps, “CLEAR PAPER JAM” appears on the message display, and the printer stops printing. • Disable. You should disable PMD only if special paper requires it. Once PMD is disabled, paper motion is not monitored. If a paper jam occurs, the printer ignores the condition and continues to print, possibly causing damage to the printer. 283 Chapter 4 ADVANCED USER Power Stacker This parameter allows you to enable or disable the power paper stacker (provided this option is installed). Auto Elevator This parameter exists only on printers with the power paper stacker installed. The power stacker has a sensor which detects paper movement and raises the stacker as the printed paper stack grows. If the printer has been printing for three minutes continually and the sensor has not detected any growth in the paper stack, the stacker raises itself 1/4 inch automatically. • Enable (default). The automatic elevator on the power stacker operates normally. • Disable. The stacker does not raise automatically every three minutes and is entirely dependent on the sensor. Diable is used with extremely high-quality print jobs that take a long time to print. Auto Locking • • 284 Disable (default). The ENTER key must be locked manually. Enable. The printer automatically locks the ENTER key five minutes after the last front panel key press. ADVANCED USER Epson FX Emulation File System • Overwrite Files. Allows you to prevent files from being overwritten by disabling the overwrite function. • View File List. Displays the list of files in the file system. Pressing the DOWN key displays the file size. • Delete Files. Displays the list of files in the file system. Pressing the ENTER key deletes the file displayed on the front panel. Flash Avail. The amount of flash available for the user to save or download files into flash. • Optimize&Reboot. Reclaims flash space from deleted flash files. After pressing ENTER, wait for the printer to reboot. NOTE: When the Optimize&Reboot option is executed, the message, “Optimizing Flash Files” does not display before printer rebooting takes place. • IMPORTANT Print File List. Prints a summary of the files stored in flash memory and several statistics on File System usage. Do not turn the printer off until it has completely rebooted and is either back online or offline. Set Sharing This option allows character sets to be shared between the active LP+ protocol and the active IGP emulation. If CT is installed and active, choosing a character set in the CT activates that character set in the active IGP and LP+ protocols. (These changes will not be visible on the front panel.) If Set Sharing is not selected, only the LP+ will share the CT's character set. Switching host interfaces from CT to Centronics when the Set Sharing is enabled will cause the LP+ character set to be activated to the same character set of the active IGP, if possible. 285 Chapter 4 ADVANCED USER In a non-CT system, changing characters sets in LP+ causes the active IGP to change to the same character set if the selected set exists in IGP. If the active IGP has no access to the selected set, no changes are made. Selecting a new character set in the active IGP causes the LP+ to change to the same character set if the selected character set exists in the active LP+ protocol. Not all sets are shared between emulations in the Standard group of character sets. As a result, selecting a set in the Standard group of LP+ or IGP emulation may or may not cause the other emulation to have the same set. NOTE: The front panel option, Set Sharing, has no effect on the LP+ and CT/LP+ builds. The option only applies to the builds with IGP. This option is not available in the PCL-II or LG emulation. Shuttle Timeout The amount of time the shuttle continues moving after no data is received. If your host is slow, setting the number to a higher value will prevent the printer from spending time shuttling up and down between data bursts. Slow Paper Slew • Disable (default). The paper will slew and stack paper at maximum speed. • Enable. Causes the paper to stack at a slower rate. This ensures that certain forms will stack neatly. Alarm 286 • On (default). An audible alarm sounds (3 beeps) when a fault occurs, such as a paper jam. • Cont. Beep. A continuous audible alarm sounds when a fault occurs, which can be stopped by pressing CLEAR. • Off. No audible alarm will sound. ADVANCED USER Epson FX Emulation Power Saver Time The time interval you specify for this parameter sets the amount of idle time before the printer goes into Power Saver mode. When Instant is chosen, the printer goes into Power Saver mode as soon as it is able to stop the shuttle properly. The time allotted to perform this function depends upon the shuttle timeout value which can be set in the menu. Pressing any key will remove the power saver message from the control panel. Sending a print job to the printer will turn off power saver mode. Pwr Save Control Allows you to enable or disable the Power Save (Energy Star) mode. • Enable (default). Allows you to enable the Power Save (Energy Star) mode. • Disable. Allows you to disable the Power Save (Energy Star) mode. Cancel Key • • Disable (default) Enable. The CANCEL key may be used to clear all data in the print buffer without printing any of the data. 287 Chapter 4 ADVANCED USER Set Lock Key Normally, to lock or unlock the printer menu, the UP and DOWN keys are pressed at the same time. The Set Lock Key parameter lets you choose different keys to lock or unlock the printer menu. You may choose almost any group of keys as the new lock and unlock keys. You cannot use the ENTER key or any key combinations which are already used for another function. There is no limit to how many keys you can select. To set the new lock key, follow these steps: 1. Work your way through the configuration menu until the display reads “Set Lock Key” (follow the menu structure on page 281). 2. Press ENTER. The display reads, “Select a new lock key.” 3. Press the combination of keys you want to be the new lock key. Make sure you press all keys selected at the same time. 4. If the selection is valid, the display will read, “Enter the new lock key again.” If the selection is invalid, the display will read, “Invalid key selection.” Return to step 2 and start over. 5. Press the same combination of keys a second time. If the new lock key combination is entered again correctly, the display will read, “Lock key has been changed.” If it was entered incorrectly, the display will read “Verification failed.” Start over at step 2. 6. After entering the new lock combination successfully, press the ON LINE key to put the printer back online. NOTE: The new lock combination will remain even if the printer is powered off and back on. Ribbon Action 288 • Stop Ribbon End (the default). Stops ribbon action when ribbon life reaches 0%. • Ignore Ribbon End. When selected, the ribbon life display remains on the control panel, and the printer continues to monitor ink consumption. EpsonDIAGNOSTICS FX Emulation Ink Saver Mode The overall image density setting will be maintained at a lower level, equivalent to approximately 0.2 PCS below the default setting. The factory default setting is Disable. Select Enable and press the ENTER key to activate the Ink Saver Mode. DIAGNOSTICS * = Factory Default If Ethernet adapter is present 2 Not available in PCL-II or LG 3 Not available in LG DIAGNOSTICS (from page 70) 1 Printer Tests Shift Recycle* All E’s E’s + TOF All H’s All Underlines All Black Shuttle Slow Shuttle Fast Shuttle Only Phase Printer Paperout Adj. DRAM Avail. 20722480 Bytes Test Width Full Width* Burnin Test Print Error Log 3 80 col. Print Ribbon Log Clear Error Log 3 Adapter Test1 Ethernet Test Acoustic 2 Demo Dice Five Paper Out Dots 40 dots* (4-76) System Memory 32 Megabytes Print Statistics On: 144.9 Hrs. Print: 8.3 Hrs Print Strokes: 233441 Print Lines: 28250 11 inch Pages: 614 Flash Avail. 4973757 Bytes Test Width Set this parameter to run the self-tests at full width or 80 columns. 289 Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS Printer Tests These tests are used to check the print quality and operation of the printer. NOTE: Your authorized service representative will typically run the tests. They are described in more detail in the Maintenance Manual. 290 • Shift Recycle. A sliding alphanumeric pattern which identifies missing or malformed characters, improper vertical alignment, or vertical compression. • All E's. A pattern of all uppercase E's which identifies missing characters, misplaced dots, smeared characters, improper phasing problems, or light/dark character variations. • E's + TOF. A pattern of all E's followed by a form feed to the next page top-of-form, which identifies paper motion or feeding problems. • All H's. A pattern of all uppercase H's used to detect missing characters, misplaced dots, smeared characters, or improper phasing. • All Underlines. An underline pattern useful for identifying hammer bank misalignment. • All Black. A condition where all dot positions are printed, creating a solid black band. • Shuttle Slow. Verifies proper operation by exercising shuttle and ribbon motion at low speed. • Shuttle Fast. Verifies proper operation by exercising shuttle and ribbon motion at fast speed. • Shuttle Only. Exercises only the shuttle at fast speed. • Phase Printer. Checks for wavy print. The initial phase value is set in the factory. Run the test and check the quality. (The phase value prints on the left margin.) If the print looks too wavy, change the Phase Value parameter while the test is running. While the phase printer test runs, press the DOWN key. To change the value, press the PREV or NEXT key until the desired value displays and then press ENTER. EpsonDIAGNOSTICS FX Emulation • Paperout Adj.. Verifies the current Paper Out Dots setting, which determines where the last line of text will print when there is a paper out condition. Setting this parameter correctly prevents printing on the platen. • • Burnin Test. Reserved for factory use. • Print Ribbon Log. Prints log of ribbons that have been used in the printer. • • Clear Error Log. Clears entries in the error log. • Ethernet Test. Prints the Ethernet statistics stored on the Ethernet (if present). • Acoustics. A particular test pattern that is used to measure acoustics. • • Demo. Demonstration of various print attributes. Print Error Log. Prints the current log of errors. Most nonroutine faults (ribbon stall, voltage faults) are stored in the error log. Adapter Test. Prints the Ethernet adapter statistics stored on the Ethernet adapter (if present). Dice Five. Pattern used to measure print density. Paper Out Dots CAUTION Only authorized service representatives should set this parameter. This parameter is used to adjust the paper out distance from the perforation; you can specify where the last line on the page will print when there is a paper out condition. Setting this parameter correctly prevents printing on the platen. System Memory Displays the amount of RAM installed. 291 Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS Print Statistics You can view various printer statistics and refer to them for preventive maintenance purposes. Printer statistics accumulate continuously; they do not reset when you turn off the printer. All of the printer statistics are set to zero at the factory after burn-in testing. • On. The cumulative time in hours the printer has been powered on. The range is 0 to 30,000 hours. • Print. The cumulative time in hours the printer has actually been printing. The range is 0 to 30,000 hours. • Print Strokes. The cumulative number of back-and-forth shuttle strokes the printer has printed during normal printer operation. The range is 0 to 2,147,483,647 shuttle strokes. • Print Lines. The cumulative number of lines the printer has printed. The range is 0 to 2,147,483,647 print lines. • 11 inch Pages. The cumulative number of pages the printer has printed. The range in print pages is 0 to 2,147,483,647 total inches of paper movement divided by 11. DRAM Avail. The number of volatile DRAM memory bytes available to the application for variable workspace and page rendering. Flash Avail. The number of non-volatile Flash memory bytes available for the printer Flash File System. 292 5 Interfaces Overview This chapter describes the host interfaces provided with the printer. The printer interface is the point where the data line from the host computer plugs into the printer. The interface processes all communications signals and data to and from the host computer. Plus, with the Auto Switching feature, you can configure the printer to accept several interfaces at the same time (see “Auto Switching Submenu” on page 86). This chapter describes the interfaces provided with the printer. Standard Host Interfaces: • • • Centronics parallel IEEE 1284 parallel bidirectional High Speed Serial Port (RS-232/RS-422) NOTE: RS-422 is optional. Optional Host Interfaces: • • • • Coax / Twinax Dataproducts Long Lines Dataproducts parallel Ethernet 10/100BaseT In addition to descriptions for the multi-line interfaces, this chapter also provides instructions for configuration of terminating resistors for the parallel interfaces. 293 Chapter 5 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Dataproducts Parallel Interface Table 8. Dataproducts Parallel Interface Connector Pin Assignments (with a 50-pin AMP HDH-20 Data Cable Connector) Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin DATA LINE 1 Return 19 3 READY Return 22 6 CABLE VERIFY 45, 46 DATA LINE 2 Return 20 4 ONLINE Return 21 5 GROUND 39 DATA LINE 3 Return 1 2 DEMAND/DATA REQ. Return 23 7 DATA LINE 4 Return 41 40 PARITY ERROR 27 11 DATA LINE 5 Return 34 18 DATA LINE 6 Return 43 42 DATA LINE 7 Return 36 35 DATA LINE 8 Return 28 44 DATA STROBE Return 38 37 PAPER INSTRUCTION Return 30 14 BUFFER CLEAR Return 31 15 NOTE: Pins not listed are not connected. The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not exceed 40 feet (12 meters). 294 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals Data Lines 1 through 8. Provides eight standard or inverted levels from the host that specify character data, plot data, or a control code. Data Line 8 allows access to the extended ASCII character set. You can enable or disable this line via the Data Bit 8 parameter on the Dataproducts submenu (see page 94). Data Strobe. Carries a high true pulse from the host when data is ready. The data strobe remains high until the Data Request line goes false. The active edge of the strobe signal can be configured as leading, middle (default), or trailing. Paper Instruction (PI). Carries a DVFU signal from the host with the same timing and polarity as the data lines. Ready. Carries a high true signal from the printer when AC power and DC voltages are present, paper is loaded properly, and the printer is not in a check condition. Online. Carries a high true signal from the printer when the Ready Line is true and the ON LINE key on the control panel has been pressed. When the printer is in online mode, it may accept data from the host. Demand/Data Request. Carries a high true signal from the printer when the printer is ready to accept character data from the host. This signal changes to false shortly after the leading edge of the data strobe signal. Cable Verify. Two pins on the interface connector are jumpered together to allow the user to verify proper installation of the interface connector. Buffer Clear. A high true level from the host to indicate the printer should perform a reboot. Parity Error. Always carries a low false signal from the printer indicating there is no parity error. 295 Chapter 5 Centronics Parallel Interface Centronics Parallel Interface Table 9. Centronics Interface Connector Pin Assignments Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin DATA LINE 1 Return 2 20 ACKNOWLEDGE Return 10 28 CHASSIS GROUND 17 DATA LINE 2 Return 3 21 ONLINE Return 13 28 GROUND 30 DATA LINE 3 Return 4 22 FAULT Return 32 29 Spares 14 DATA LINE 4 Return 5 23 PAPER EMPTY Return 12 28 No Connection 34,35, 36 DATA LINE 5 Return 6 24 BUSY Return 11 29 +5 Volts 18 DATA LINE 6 Return 7 25 DATA LINE 7 Return 8 26 DATA LINE 8 Return 9 27 DATA STROBE Return 1 19 PAPER INSTRUCTION Return 15 29 PRIME Return 31 30 The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not exceed 15 feet (5 meters). 296 Centronics Parallel Interface Signals Centronics Parallel Interface Signals Data Lines 1 through 8. Provides eight standard or inverted levels from the host that specify character data, plot data, or a control code. Data Line 8 allows access to the extended ASCII character set. You may enable or disable this line via the Data Bit 8 parameter on the Centronics submenu (see page 91). Data Strobe. Carries a low true, 100 ns minimum pulse from the host that clocks data into the printer. Acknowledge. A low true pulse from the printer indicating the character or function code has been received and the printer is ready for the next data transfer. Online. A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer is ready for data transfer and the ON LINE key on the control panel has been activated. When the printer is in online mode, it may accept data from the host. Paper Empty (PE). A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer is in a paper empty or paper jam fault. Busy. A high true level from the printer to indicate the printer cannot receive data. Prime. A high true level from the host to indicate the printer should perform a warm start (printer is reset to the power-up configuration values). Paper Instruction (PI). Carries a CVFU signal from the host with the same timing and polarity as the data line. Fault. A low true level from the printer indicates a printer fault. 297 Chapter 5 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface The 1284 supports three operating modes, which are determined by negotiation between the printer and the host. Compatibility Mode This mode provides compatibility with Centronics-like host I/O (see Table 10). Data is transferred from the host to the printer in 8-bit bytes over the data lines. Compatibility Mode can be combined with Nibble and Byte Modes to provide bidirectional communication. Nibble Mode Eight bits equals one byte. When a byte of data is sent to the printer, the eight bits are sent over eight data lines. Some devices cannot send data over their eight data lines. To bypass this, the 1284 permits data to be sent as half a byte over four status lines. (Half a byte equals one nibble.) Two sequential four-bit nibbles are sent over the lines. Data is transferred from printer to host in four-bit nibbles over the status lines, and the host controls the transmission. Byte Mode The printer and host send data to each other along eight data lines (one bit per line). If bidirectional communication is supported by the printer and the host, the host will take control of the data transfer. 298 Signals Signals Table 10 lists each of the signals associated with the corresponding pins on the 1284 interface. Descriptions of the signals follow. Table 10. 1284 Signals Type of Mode Pin Source of Data Compatible 1 Host nStrobe 2 Host/Printer Data 1 (LSB) 3 Host/Printer Data 2 4 Host/Printer Data 3 5 Host/Printer Data 4 6 Host/Printer Data 5 7 Host/Printer Data 6 8 Host/Printer Data 7 9 Host/Printer Data 8 (MSB) 10 Printer 11 Nibble Byte HostClk Host/Clk nAck PtrClk PtrClk Printer Busy PtrBusy PtrBusy 12 Printer PError AckDataReq AckDataReq 13 Printer Select Xflag Xflag 14 Host nAutoFd Host Busy HostAck 15 Not Defined 16 Logic Grid 17 Chassis Grid 18 Printer Peripheral Logic High 299 Chapter 5 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface Table 10. 1284 Signals (continued) Type of Mode Pin Source of Data Compatible Nibble Byte 19 Signal Ground (nStrobe) 20 Signal Ground (Data 1) 21 Signal Ground (Data 2) 22 Signal Ground (Data 3) 23 Signal Ground (Data 4) 24 Signal Ground (Data 5) 25 Signal Ground (Data 6) 26 Signal Ground (Data 7) 27 Signal Ground (Data 8) 28 Signal Ground (PError, Select, nAck) 29 Signal Ground (Busy, nFault) 30 Signal Ground (nAutoFd, nSelectIn, nInit) 31 Host nInit 32 Printer NFault 33 Not Defined 34 Not Defined 35 Not Defined 36 Host nSelectIn nDataAvail aDataAvail 1284 Active 1284 Active NOTE: The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer should not exceed 32 feet (10 meters). 300 Signals Host Clock / nWrite. Driven by host. Data transferred from host to printer. When printer sends data, two types are available. If Nibble mode, signal is set high. If Byte mode, signal is set low. Data 1 through Data 8. These pins are host-driven in Compatibility mode and bidirectional in Byte mode. They are not used in Nibble mode. Data 1 is the least significant bit; Data 8 is the most significant bit. Printer Clock / Peripheral Clock / Interrup. Driven by the printer. A signal from the printer indicating the character or function code has been received and the printer is ready for the next data transfer. Printer Busy / Peripheral Acknowledge / nWait. Driven by the printer. Indicates the printer cannot receive data. (Data bits 4 and 8 in Nibble mode.) Acknowledge Data Request / nAcknowledge Reverse. Driven by the printer. Indicates the printer is in a fault condition. (Data bits 3 and 7 in Nibble mode.) Xflag. Driven by the printer. A high true level indicating the printer is ready for data transfer and the printer is on line. (Data bits 2 and 6 in Nibble mode.) Host Busy / Host Acknowledge / NDStrobe. Driven by the host. Activates auto-line feed mode. Peripheral Logic High. Driven by the printer. When the line is high, the printer indicates all of its signals are in a valid state. When the line is low, the printer indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state. nReverse Request. Driven by the host. Resets the interface and forces a return to Compatibility mode idle phase. nData Available / nPeripheral Request. Driven by the printer. Indicates the printer has encountered an error. (Data bits 1 and 5 in Nibble mode.) 1284 Active / nAStrobe. Driven by the host. A peripheral device is selected. 301 Chapter 5 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface Host Logic High—Driven by the host. When set to high, the host indicates all of its signals are in a valid state. When set to low, the host indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state. nInit —Resets init interface from the host. Terminating Resistor Configurations The factory equips the printer with several resistors that are used for parallel interface configurations and are suitable for most applications. These 470 ohm pull-up and 1K ohm pull-down terminating resistors are located at RP1 and RP2, shown in Figure 24. If the values of these terminating resistors are not compatible with the particular interface driver requirements of your host computer, you may need to install resistors with different pull-up and pull-down values. RP1 Default: 470 Ohm Alt 1: 220 Ohm Alt 2: 1K Ohm RP2 Default: 1K Ohm Alt 1: 330 Ohm Alt 2: None Figure 24. Resistor Locations 302 Terminating Resistor Configurations The shipping kit for this printer includes 220 ohm pull-up and 330 ohm pull-down alternate terminating resistors. If you install the 220 ohm pullup resistor, you must also install the 330 ohm pull-down resistor. Table 11 lists the three terminating resistor configurations you can install: Table 11. Terminating Resistor Configurations Configuration Pull-Up (RP1) Pull-Down (RP2) Factory Default 470 ohm 1K ohm Alternate 1 220 ohm 330 ohm Alternate 2 1K ohm none Removal And Installation The procedure for removing and installing terminating resistors is provided in your Maintenance Manual. CAUTION This is an involved maintenance procedure. To avoid damage to the equipment, only a trained technician should perform this procedure. 303 Chapter 5 RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interfaces RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interfaces NOTE: The RS-232 and RS-422 serial interface circuit characteristics are compatible with the Electronic Industry Association Specifications EIA-232-E and EIA-422-B. The RS-232 and RS-422 serial interfaces enable the printer to operate with bit serial devices that are compatible with an RS-232 controller. The input serial data transfer rate (in baud) is selectable from the printer's control panel. Baud rates of 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 baud rates are available. NOTE: If you select a baud rate that is greater than 19200, you may need to use RS-422 to prevent data loss. The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not exceed 50 feet (15 meters) for RS-232 or 4000 feet (1220 meters) for RS-422. (A copper conductor, twisted-pair telephone cable with a shunt capacitance of 16 pF/foot [52.5 pF/meter] terminated in a 100 ohm resistive load must be used for the RS-422.) 304 RS-232 RS-232 Table 12. Standard 500, 1000, 1500 lpm Models RS-232 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Receive Data (RXD) 3 Transmit Status & Control Data (TXD) 2 Chassis Ground 1 Clear To Send (CTS) 5 Request To Send (RTS) 4 Signal Ground 7 Data Set Ready (DSR) 6 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) 20 Data Carrier Detect (DCD) 8 Table 13. RS-232 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Receive Data (RXD) 2 Transmit Status & Control Data (TXD) 3 Chassis/Signal Ground 5 Clear To Send (CTS) 8 Request To Send (RTS) 7 Data Set Ready (DSR) 6 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) 4 Data Carrier Detect (DCD) 1 Receive Data (RXD). Serial data stream to the printer. Transmit Data (TXD). Serial data stream from the printer for transmitting status and control information to the host. Subject to protocol selection. Request To Send (RTS). Control signal from the printer. Subject to configuration. 305 Chapter 5 RS-232 And RS-422 Serial Interfaces Clear To Send (CTS). Status signal to the printer indicating the host is ready to receive data/status signals from the printer. Data Set Ready (DSR). Status signal to the printer indicating the host is in a ready condition. Data Carrier Detect (DCD). Status signal to the printer. The ON condition is required for the printer to receive data. Data Terminal Ready (DTR). Control signal from the printer. Subject to configuration. RS-422 Table 14. PSA3 RS-422 Serial Interface Connector Pin Assignments Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin - Receive Data (-RXD) 1 - Transmit Data (-TXD) 3 Chassis/Signal Ground 5 + Receive Data (+RXD) 6 + Transmit Data (+TXD) 8 +RXD, -RXD.Serial data stream differentially received by printer. +TXD, -TXD.Differentially driven serial data stream for transmitting status and control information to the host. Subject to protocol selection. NOTE: 306 ±RXD and ±TXD form signal and return paths of a differential line signal. 6 Reprogramming The Security Key Reprogramming The Security Key The security key on the PSA3 controller board can be reprogrammed with a Software Program Exchange (SPX) module. The SPX is an intelligent module that plugs into the debug port on the back of printers equipped with the PSA3 “Hurricane” controller board. The SPX is used only once; it automatically overwrites itself after successfully reprogramming a security key. This allows the end user or a service technician to enable features such as new emulations without having to remove covers and install a new security key on the controller board. The SPX is used at power-up only and is not left in the printer during normal operation. Because it is a single-use disposable item the user is not required to return it to the vendor or manufacturer. How To Program The Security Key 1. Power off the printer. 2. On cabinet models, open the rear door. On pedestal models, refer to Figure 25 to locate the debug port at the rear of the printer. 3. Insert the SPX into the debug port as shown. 307 Chapter 6 Reprogramming The Security Key A A SPX Debug Port Figure 25. Inserting The SPX into the Debug Port 4. Power on the printer. The printer will begin its boot-up sequence. 5. When the printer detects a valid SPX, the control panel displays: “NEW SPX DETECTED PRESS ENTER” NOTE: If an error message displays, find the message in the Message List in Chapter 7 and follow the troubleshooting instructions. 6. Press the ENTER key to activate the reprogramming sequence. The display will read: “PROGRAMMING. PLEASE WAIT.” 7. When the security key is reprogrammed, the display will read: “REMOVE USED SPX THEN PRESS ENTER” 8. Remove the SPX from the debug port at the rear of the printer. 308 How To Program The Security Key 9. Press the ENTER key. The printer will reboot itself and you may resume normal printing. 10. You may need to download a new program file to use the new feature. 11. You may need to set additional menu parameters for any new features that have been added or enabled. 309 Chapter 6 Reprogramming The Security Key 310 7 Troubleshooting Cleaning Requirements Clean the printer every six months or after every 1000 hours of operation, whichever occurs first. If the printer is located in a dusty area or is used for heavy duty printing, clean it more often. WARNING Disconnect the power source before cleaning the printer. Vor dem Säubern des Druckers ist die Netzverbindung zu unterbrechen. Débranchez l’alimentation avant de nettoyer l’imprimante. Desconecte la fuente de energía antes de limpiar la impresora. Staccare la fonte di energia prima della pulitura della stampante. Exterior Cleaning Clean the outside of the cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth and mild detergent soap. (Dishwashing liquid works well.) Do not use abrasive powders or chemical solvents. Clean the windows with plain water or mild window cleaner. Always apply the cleaning solution to the cloth; never pour cleaning solution directly onto the printer. 311 Chapter 7 Cleaning Requirements Interior Cleaning Over time, particles of paper and ink accumulate inside the printers. This is normal. Paper dust and ink build-up must be periodically removed to avoid degraded print quality. Most paper dust accumulates around the ends of the platen and ribbon path. Barcode Ribbon Ribbon Spool Date Code Label Splined Shaft Paper Support Tractor (2) Ribbon Hub Hammer Bank Cover and Ribbon Mask Vertical Position Knob Blue Tractor Lock (2) Platen Lever Barcode Sensor Platen Stop Ribbon Guide (2) Figure 26. Interior Printer Components 312 Interior Cleaning To clean the interior of the printer perform the following steps. 1. Power off the printer and unplug the printer power cord. 2. Open the printer cover. 3. Fully raise the platen lever. 4. Unload the paper. 5. Unlatch the ribbon and ribbon spool and carefully lift them off the hubs. 6. Lift the ribbon out of the ribbon path. 7. Brush the paper dust and ribbon lint off the tractors, shuttle cover assembly, base casting, and ribbon guides with a softbristled, non-metallic brush (such as a toothbrush). Vacuum up the residue. CAUTION Vacuum carefully around the hammer bank and surrounding area to avoid damage. To avoid corrosion damage, use only alcohol when cleaning the printer mechanical elements. Solutions used to clean mechanical elements must contain no water. 8. Wipe the splined shaft with a soft cloth. 9. Check the ribbon mask and hammer bank cover for bits of torn paper or ribbon lint. 10. Remove dust and ink from the platen using a soft cloth lightly moistened with anhydrous alcohol. (The platen is the thick silver bar behind the hammer bank cover that rotates when the platen lever is rotated.) Clean the ribbon guides. CAUTION When cleaning the platen, be very careful not to get any alcohol in the hammer bank, because alcohol will cause severe damage to the hammer bank. Only a trained service technician should clean the shuttle assembly. 313 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems 11. Brush and vacuum the accumulated dust or residue inside the lower cabinet. 12. Wipe the lower cabinet interior with a clean, lint-free cloth dampened (not wet) with water and mild detergent or window cleaning solution. Dry the lower cabinet interior by wiping it down with a clean, lint-free cloth. 13. Install the ribbon and load paper. Diagnosing Problems This section is designed to help you fix problems which may arise with normal printer operation. Bar Code Verification The most important consideration when printing a bar code is to ensure that the bar code will be scanned properly. Incorporating a bar code quality procedure in the printing process is the best way to ensure that bar codes are being printed correctly. A properly implemented verification procedure will increase overall bar code quality, reduce waste from misprinted bar codes, and achieve high first-time read rates. A high first-time read rate is an increasingly important factor in newer, more efficient systems where manually entered data is not acceptable as a backup function. Verification also minimizes the costs of returned products due to poor reading or unaccountable bar codes. RJS designs and manufactures the world’s most complete line of bar code verification products, including their portable Inspector and Laser Inspector models, On-Line Inspector and AutoScan II series. For more information on RJS bar code verifiers, visit their web site at www.rjs1.com. 314 Printing A Hex Dump Printing A Hex Dump A hex code printout (or hex dump) is a translation of all host interface data to its hexadecimal equivalent, listing all ASCII character data received from the host computer with their corresponding two-digit hexadecimal codes. Hex dumps are used to troubleshoot printer data reception problems. Printable characters print as the assigned symbol; nonprintable characters are indicated by a period (.). Figure 27 shows an example of a hex dump. Figure 27. Hex Dump Sample 315 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Fault Messages If a fault condition occurs in the printer, the status indicator on the control panel flashes on and off, and the message display indicates the specific fault. Fault messages are summarized in Table 15. Displayed faults fall into one of two categories: • • Operator correctable Field service required For the operator-correctable faults, follow the suggested solution in Table 15. After correcting the displayed fault, press the CLEAR key to clear the error message and status indicator and resume printing. If the fault message reappears, contact your authorized service representative. NOTE: The Maintenance Manual provides more detailed information and procedures for resolving fault conditions. However, many of the procedures described there must be performed only by your authorized service representative. Fault Messages Requiring Field Service Attention If a fault is not correctable by the operator, the fault message is followed by an asterisk (*). This usually indicates that an authorized service representative is needed. You may try two steps to clear the fault before calling your authorized service representative: 1. Set the printer power switch to O (Off), wait 15 seconds, then turn the printer on again. Run your print job again. If the message does not appear, it was a false indication and no further attention is required. 2. If the message reappears, press the CLEAR key. If the message disappears, it was a false indication and no further attention is required. If the message reappears, call your authorized service representative. 316 Fault Messages Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? 06 HOST REQUEST Yes Host attention message. The host computer or printer controller requires attention. 08 HOLD PRINT TIMEOUT Yes Printer was offline more than 10 minutes, and the “Intervention Required” parameter is set to “Send to Host.” Press ON LINE to put printer in online state. 8.5V PWR FAIL* No Internal power failure. Contact your authorized service representative.1 15 COMM CHECK Yes Line not active (twinax interface). Check cable connection. 15V CTL FAIL* No Controller voltage failure. Contact your authorized service representative.1 22 INVALID ADDR Yes Unit address not recognized by printer. (Twinax interface) Ensure that printer address matches host setting. 23.5V CTL FAIL* No Controller voltage failure. Contact your authorized service representative.1 31 PAPER OUT TIMEOUT Yes A timeout message is sent to the host if paper is not loaded 10 minutes after CLEAR was pressed to clear the paper out fault. Load paper. Explanation Solution 317 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? Explanation Solution 32 PAPER JAM TIMEOUT Yes A timeout message is sent to the host if no paper motion has occurred for 10 minutes after CLEAR was pressed to clear the jam fault. Clear paper jam and reload paper. 33 PLATEN OPEN TIMEOUT Yes Platen lever has been open for at least one minute. Close platen lever. 34 RIBBON STALL TIMEOUT Yes In the CT emulation with a coax interface, the ribbon has not moved for 10 minutes after CLEAR was pressed to clear the ribbon drive fault. Reload the ribbon. 48V PWR FAIL* No Internal power failure. Contact your authorized service representative.1 A TO D OVERUN* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 ACCESS NULL PTR* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 318 Fault Messages Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? ACTIVATE LOST No Printer detects twinax protocol communication errors. The printer reports the error. B10 ERROR: NO DRAM DETECTED* No SDRAM DIMM may not be properly installed. Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.1 B11 ERROR: RAM TEST FAILED* No RAM test failure. SDRAM DIMM may not be properly installed. Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.1 B12 ERROR: PROGRAM MISSING* No Program not downloaded to the printer. Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.1 B13 ERROR: NOT COMPATIBLE* No Attempting to download a program that is not intended for this printer. Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.1 Explanation Solution 319 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? Explanation Solution B19 ERROR: DC RETURNED* No The boot code calls the DC (the printer software that runs on the PowerPC) and then the DC code should run and never return back to the boot code. If the DC code returns back to the boot code then this message will be displayed. Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.1 B20 STATUS :00% DOWNLOAD MODE No Status message informing the operator that software is being downloaded. Percentage figure indicates approximate amount loaded into the printer. No action is required. B21 STATUS: PRINTER RESET No Status message informing the operator that the printer is undergoing a system reset. No action is required. B22 ERROR: DECOMPRESS SIZE* No FLASH SIMM may not be properly installed. Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.1 320 Fault Messages Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? Explanation Solution B23 ERROR: DECOMPRESS CKSUM* No FLASH SIMM may not be properly installed. Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.1 B30-STATUS: INITIALIZING N/A Status message informing the operator that software is being downloaded through one of the printer’s I/O ports using the two-key download activation. No action is required. B35-STATUS: WAITING FOR EC STATUS N/A Waiting for EC/DC Powerup handshake. No action is required. B40 ERROR: SDRAM EEPROM CKSUM BAD* No SDRAM DIMM may not be properly installed. Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.1 B41 ERROR: DIM MEMORY NOT SDRAM* No SDRAM DIMM is not compatible with the computer. SDRAM DIMM may not be properly installed. Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.1 B42 ERROR: SDRAM ROWS NOT ALLOWED* No SDRAM DIMM is not compatible with the computer. SDRAM DIMM may not be properly installed. Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.1 321 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? Explanation Solution B43 ERROR: SDRAM TOO MANY BANKS* No SDRAM DIMM is not compatible with the computer. SDRAM DIMM may not be properly installed. Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.1 B44 ERROR: SDRAM NOT 64 BITS WIDE* No SDRAM DIMM is not compatible with the computer. SDRAM DIMM may not be properly installed. Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.1 B45 ERROR: SDRAM IS WRONG VOLTAGE* No SDRAM DIMM is not compatible with the computer. SDRAM DIMM may not be properly installed. Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.1 B46 ERROR: SDRAM HAS MIXED SIZES* No SDRAM DIMM is not compatible with the computer. SDRAM DIMM may not be properly installed. Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.1 B47 ERROR: SDRAM LARGER THAN 256M* No SDRAM DIMM is not compatible with the computer. SDRAM DIMM may not be properly installed. Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.1 322 Fault Messages Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? Explanation Solution B49 ERROR: SDRAM # LOGICAL BANKS* No SDRAM DIMM is not compatible with the computer. SDRAM DIMM may not be properly installed. Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.1 B50 ERROR: SDRAM LOGIC COMB BANKS* No SDRAM DIMM is not compatible with the computer. SDRAM DIMM may not be properly installed. Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.1 B50 STATUS: XX% CLEAR FLASH No Emulation software sucessfully loaded in RAM. Old program being deleted from flash memory. No action is required. B51: ERROR SDA LINE STUCK LOW No Problem with I2C bus. Either SDRAM or PCI card shorting out the bus. Contact your authorized service representative.1 B51 STATUS: XX% PROGRAMMING... No Status message file sucessfully loaded and is being saved in flash memory. No action is required. B55 STATUS: SEND PROGRAM TO EC No EC program downloaded and being programed in EC. No action is required. 323 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? Explanation Solution BARCODE DAMAGED Reverse Spools Yes Barcode detected, but not fully decoded. If barcode appears damaged, reverse ribbon spools. If barcode label is present and undamaged, clean sensor lens using damp cloth or swab. Check that platen gap may be too tight constricting ribbon motion. Loosen gap if needed. BARCODE MISSING Install New RBN Yes No barcode seen on the ribbon spool. Indicates missing label or damaged or dirty sensor. If label is missing, install new ribbon. If barcode label is present and undamaged, clean sensor lens using damp cloth or swab. BUFFER OVERRUN Yes Receive overrun (serial interface). Check printer serial port configuration setup. Ensure the baud rate and data protocol match both host and printer settings. CLEAR PAPER JAM Yes No paper motion. Clear jam and reload paper. If this message recurs, contact your authorized service representative.1 324 Fault Messages Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? Explanation Solution CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH No Status message: emulation software successfully loaded into printer RAM and the checksum matched. The old program is now being deleted from flash memory. No action is required. CLOSE PLATEN Yes The platen lever is open. Close the platen lever. COIL HOT No One or more hammer coils are overheating. Contact your authorized service representative.1 CTL VOLT FAIL* No Controller voltage failure. Contact your authorized service representative.1 DIAGNOSTIC PASSED No Status message: the printer passed its memory and hardware initialization tests. No action is required. DO NOT POWER OFF No This is a standard warning message that displays while the printer is downloading software. Do not power off the printer until downloading is complete. DRVR CIR BAD* No Hammer coil count test failed. Contact your authorized service representative.1 325 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? Explanation Solution E NET TEST UNAVAILABLE Yes The Ethernet PCBA did not initialize correctly. Cycle power. Wait for “E Net Ready” to display, then retry operation. If the fault message appears again, contact your authorized service representative.1 ERROR: DC PROGRAM NOT VALID Yes The printer cannot find the data controller program or the validation checksum is corrupt. Download the program again. If the message appears, replace the flash memory SIMM. ERROR: DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX No The printer found a defective memory location. Contact your authorized service representative.1 ERROR: EC PROGRAM NOT VALID No The printer cannot find the engine controller program or the validation checksum is corrupt. Contact your authorized service representative.1 ERROR: EC STOPPED AT STATE XXXX No XXXX is a number from 0000 to 0010. The Engine Controller has stopped and is in the state identified by the number displayed. Contact your authorized service representative.1 326 Fault Messages Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? Explanation Solution ERROR: FLASH DID NOT PROGRAM Yes The printer encountered an error trying to program flash memory. Download the program again. If the message displays again, contact your authorized service representative.1 ERROR: FLASH NOT DETECTED No The printer could not find flash memory. Contact your authorized service representative.1 ERROR: LOCKED SN=nnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnn No nnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnn is the serial number of the printer’s security key. The SPX serial number does not match the printer’s serial number and cannot be used with the printer. Contact your authorized service representative.1 ERROR: NO DRAM DETECTED No The printer could not find any DRAM. Contact your authorized service representative.1 ERROR: NVRAM FAILURE No The non-volatile SRAM on the controller board has failed. Contact your authorized service representative.1 327 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? Explanation Solution ERROR OCCURRED FLUSHING QUEUES* No An interim message that displays while the printer discards host data it cannot use because a fault condition exists. Contact your authorized service representative.1 ERROR: PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM No The printer requires more DRAM to run the downloaded program. Contact your authorized service representative.1 ERROR: PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH No The printer requires more flash memory to run the downloaded program Contact your authorized service representative.1 ERROR: PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE Yes The printer is not compatible with the downloaded program. Use the correct emulation software options(s) for this printer model. ERROR: PROGRAM NOT VALID Yes The printer does not see a program in flash memory. There is no program in printer memory. Download the emulation. ERROR: SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED No The security key is not present or failed. Contact your authorized service representative.1 ERROR: SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX No Hardware failure in SDRAM or controller circuitry. Contact your authorized service representative.1 328 Fault Messages Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? Explanation Solution ERROR: WRITING TO FLASH No Hardware or software fault in flash memory. Contact your authorized service representative.1 ERROR: WRONG CHECKSUM No The printer received the complete program but the checksum did not match. Contact your authorized service representative.1 ERROR: WRONG OEM OR PRINTER TYPE No The SPX inserted in the debug port is not intended for this model printer or this OEM. Contact your authorized service representative.1 ETHERNET ADAPTER BEING INITIALIZED N/A Status message indicating that the Network Interface Card is processing the boot procedure. No action is required. ETHERNET DETECTED N/A Status message indicating that the Network Interface Card has established connection. No action is required. EXCESS RBN WEAR Install New RBN Yes Displayed when ribbon reaches end of life Install a new ribbon. 329 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? Explanation Solution EXHAUST FAN FLT (Cabinet model only) Yes Sensors cannot detect current in fan circuit. Power off the printer and remove the paper path (see Maintenance Manual). Check that the fan cable connector is connected. Check for obstruction of vents and fan airway, and remove any obstructions. Check for items beneath the printer blocking cabinet vents. Power back on the printer. If this message appears again, contact your authorized service representative.1 FIRMWARE ERROR* No Application software tried to perform an illegal printer function or damaged memory detected on board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 FM HEADER ERROR* No Applications software has violated header parameters. Contact your system administrator. FRAMING ERROR Yes Serial framing error (serial interface). Check your printer serial interface parameter settings; if necessary, adjust them so that they match the settings of the attached host. 330 Fault Messages Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? FREEFORM OFF Yes A control panel key is stuck in the down position. Press the key again. FREEFORM ON: OFF HOLD KEY @ PWRUP No This message appears if the freeform feature is enabled. This feature is for manufacturing use only and is never used by the customer or field maintenance personnel. Contact your authorized service representative.1 GRF CHK ERROR PRESS STOP Yes Printer has received a nonprintable character. Press CLEAR and then ON LINE. HAM. COIL OPEN* No Electrical malfunction of one or more hammer coils. Contact your authorized service representative.1 HAMMER COIL BAD* #, #, #, ...etc No Hammer coil # failed current test at power up. Contact your authorized service representative.1 HB NOT INSTALLD* No Self-test does not detect hammer coils. Contact your authorized service representative.1 Explanation Solution 331 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? Explanation Solution HMR BANK FAN FLT Yes Sensors cannot detect current in fan circuit. Check that fan cable is connected. Check for obstruction of vents and fan airway; remove any obstructions. Check for items beneath the printer blocking cabinet vents. Power back on the printer. If this message recurs, contact your authorized service representative.1 ILL EXT BUS ACC* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 ILLGL OPR ACCSS* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 INCOMPAT E-NET Yes Incompatible network interface card (NIC) is installed. Install a compatible NIC to the printer then reboot. If this message still appears, contact your authorized service representative.1 INTAKE FAN FAULT Yes Sensors cannot detect current in fan circuit. See description for HMR BANK FAN FLT. 332 Fault Messages Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? Explanation Solution INTERRUPT UNUSED VECTOR 00 No The controller board receives an interrupt it does not understand. Cycle power. If this message occurred once and never again, you can ignore it. If the message reappears or appears consistently, contact your authorized service representative.1 INVALID ACTIVATE No Printer detects twinax protocol communication errors. The printer reports the error. INVALID COMMAND No Printer detects twinax protocol communication errors. The printer reports the error; host action is required. LO DRV. SHORT * No Circuit(s) on the hammer bank or in the hammer bank power cable shorted to ground. Contact your authorized service representative.1 LOAD PAPER Yes Printer is out of paper. Load paper. LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX% No Status message: the new emulation program is loading into printer RAM. XX% indicates how much of the program has loaded. No action is required. 333 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? Explanation Solution LOADING PROGRAM INTO FLASH No The printer has deleted the previous program from flash memory and is loading the new program into flash memory. No action is required. NEW SPX DETECTED PRESS ENTER No The printer detects an SPX installed at the debug port and the SPX is valid for the printer. Contact your authorized service representative.1 NON VOLATILE MEMORY FAILED No The flash memory is defective. Contact your authorized service representative.1 OLD RIBBON Install New RBN Yes Ribbon was previously declared end of life on the installed machine. Install a new ribbon. ON LINE N/A Printer state message: printer is online and in communication with host. No action is required. ONLINE 28 CU NOT ENAB Yes Poll timeout error. The printer was not polled for one minute. (Coax interface.) Check cable connection and host system. ONLINE 8344 FAILED* No Link-level code test detects hardware failure. Contact your authorized service representative.1 334 Fault Messages Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? Explanation Solution ONLINE CU TIMED OUT Yes Enable poll timeout. The printer was not enabled for one minute. (Coax interface) Check cable connection and host system. PAP BAD TABLE* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 PAP BSY TOO LNG* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 PAP FIFO OVERFL* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 PAP FIFO UNDRFL* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 PAP ILLGL ST* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 PAP INCMPL ENER* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 PAP INVLD CMD* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 PAP INVLD PARM* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 335 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? PAP NOT SCHED* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 PAP NT AT SPEED* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 PAP UNEXP INT* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 PARAMETER ERROR* No Illegal parameter value received in command code. Contact your system administrator. PARITY ERROR Yes Parity error (serial interface) Check your printer serial interface parameter settings; if necessary, adjust them so that they match the settings of the attached host. PLAT INV CMD* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Platen Invalid Command. Contact your authorized service representative.1 PLAT INV PARM* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Platen Invalid Parameter. Contact your authorized service representative.1 PLAT INV STATE* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Platen Invalid State. Contact your authorized service representative.1 336 Explanation Solution Fault Messages Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? Explanation Solution PLEASE WAIT... RESET IN PROGRESS N/A The printer finished loading the program into flash memory and is automatically resetting itself. No action is required. POWER SAVER MODE N/A Status message: printer is in lowenergy idle state, all fans and higher voltages are off, only +5Vdc logic circuits are active. No action is required. POWER SUPPLY HOT Yes Power supply sensors report high temperatures. Check printer environment. If hot or dusty, relocate printer. Contact your authorized service representative if this occurs frequently.1 PRINTER HOT Yes Controller board sensors report high temperatures on the board. Check printer environment. If hot or dusty, relocate printer. Contact your authorized service representative if this occurs frequently.1 PRINTER UNDER REMOTE CONTROL Yes Another user is accessing the printer remotely with the remote management software utility. Wait until the remote user has finished their remote management session, or press any key to disable the Printer Manger and gain control of the printer. 337 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? Explanation Solution PROTECTED INSTR* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 PWR SUPP VOLT * No Power supply failed. Replace power supply board. QUEUE OVERRUN No In CT twinax emulation, the print buffer has overflowed. Contact your authorized service representative.1 RBN SENSOR ERROR See User Manual No Failure of the barcode reader sensor. Contact your authorized service representative.1 REMOVE USED SPX THEN PRESS ENTER No Status message: An SPX is depleted because it has successfully reprogrammed the security key on the controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 RESTORING BOOT CODE No Normal download initialization message. No action is required. RIB INVLD CMD* Yes Ribbon Invalid Command. Firmware error on the controller board. Cycle power. Run the print job again. If the message appears, download the emulation software again. If the message appears again, contact your authorized service representative.1 338 Fault Messages Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? RIB INVLD STATE* No Ribbon Invalid State. Contact your authorized service representative.1 RIBBON DRIVE No The controller board does not detect a ribbon drive motor. Contact your authorized service representative.1 RIBBON UNDER 2% Change RBN Soon Yes Message is displayed when ribbon life reaches 2% level. Install a new ribbon. RBN AT END POINT Change Ribbon Yes Software has determined that the ribbon life is at end point. Install a new ribbon. RIBBON NOT RECOGNIZED Yes The printer does not detect correct ribbon type. Use the ribbons specified for the printer. RIBBON STALL Yes The controller board does not detect ribbon movement. Check the ribbon path for jams; if necessary, install a new ribbon. SCS COMMAND ERROR* No Printer received undefined control character. Contact your system administrator. SECURITY CODE VIOLATION* No Security code of PAL on controller board does not match code of firmware on the controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 Explanation Solution 339 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? Explanation Solution SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED No The security key is not present or has failed. Contact your authorized service representative.1 SENDING PROGRAM TO EC PROCESSOR No Status message: the printer is loading the engine controller program into the engine controller. No action is required. SHUTL INV CMD* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 SHUTL INV PARM* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 SHUTL OVR SPEED* No The shuttle is running over speed. Contact your authorized service representative.1 SHUTTLE JAM Yes No shuttle movement or shuttle moving at wrong speed. Check for obstruction to shuttle, a twisted ribbon, or platen lever closed too tightly. If fault source is not apparent, contact your authorized service representative.1 340 Fault Messages Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? SHUTTLE STALL Yes The shuttle is not moving. Set the platen lever to match the thickness of paper, but not too tightly. Check and adjust the platen gap. Inspect the ribbon mask for deformation that snags and interferes with shuttle movement. If fault source is not apparent, contact your authorized service representative.1 SOFTWARE ERROR* CYCLE POWER No Application software tried to perform illegal printer function, or damaged logic circuits found on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 SPX FOUND, ERROR: KEY NOT DETECTED No The controller board does not have a security key. Contact your authorized service representative.1 SPX NOT NEEDED OPTIONS ENABLED No Options included on the SPX are already installed on the host printer. Contact your authorized service representative.1 STACK OVERFLOW* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 STACK UNDERFLOW* No Firmware error on the controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 Explanation Solution 341 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? STACKER FAULT Yes Stacker is not functioning correctly. Check for obstructions in the stacker area. If fault persists, contact your authorized service representative.1 STACKER FULL Yes Power stacker is full of paper. Remove paper. STACKER JAM Yes This message is triggered if there is paper inside the throat of the stacker elevator, but the elevator is not moving. 1. Open the cabinet rear door and check for obstructions preventing elevator movement. Remove any obstructions. 2. Run the print job again. If the message appears again, contact your authorized service representative.1 TABLE MISMATCH DOWNLOAD AGAIN No Indicates that the software update has failed and should be reloaded. Contact your authorized service representative.1 TCB CORRUPTED* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 TCP PORT BUSY Yes Error message reported by the Printer Manager when ethernet interface option is installed. Refer to the Printronix P7000 PSA3 Printers Maintenance Manual. 342 Explanation Solution Fault Messages Table 15. LCD Message Troubleshooting Table Displayed Message Can User Correct? Explanation Solution UNDEF INTERRUPT* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 UNDFNED OPCODE* No Fatal firmware error on controller board. Contact your authorized service representative.1 UNKNOWN RBN1 Install New RBN Yes Ribbon was not a Printronix coded barcode. Install a new ribbon. UNKNOWN RBN2 Install New RBN Yes Ribbon not authorized. Install a new ribbon. UP DRV. SHORT* No Hammer drive circuits on the boards shorted to ground. Cycle power to see if the message clears, if not, contact your authorized service representative.1 WAITING FOR ETHERNET ADAPTER N/A Appears when the printer is first powered on if the optional Network Interface Card is installed. No action is required. 1 Before contacting an authorized service representative, power off the printer, wait 15 seconds, then power it back on and rerun your print job. If the message reappears, press CLEAR. If the fault message still displays, then contact your authorized service representative. 343 Chapter 7 Diagnosing Problems 344 A Printer Specifications Ribbon Specifications Standard Ribbons Part Number P7000 Ultra Capacity (recommended for most text and barcode OCR) 179499-001 P7000 High Label (recommended for coated or shiny label stock) 179488-001 Specialty Ribbons P7000 Red Ribbon 179490-001 P7000 Blue Ribbon 179491-001 P7000 Green Ribbon 179492-001 P7000 Security Ribbon 179493-001 P7000 Quick Dry Ribbon 179494-001 P7000 Tamper Evident 179496-001 P7000 UV Ribbon 179497-001 P7000 Laundry Ribbon 179498-001 345 Appendix A Paper Specifications Paper Specifications 346 Type: Edge-perforated, fan-fold, 3 to 17 inches (7.62 to 43.18 cm) wide, 2 to 12 inches (5.08 to 30.48 cm) long. SureStak Power Stacker option works with forms 5 to 12 inches (12.7 to 30.48 cm) long and up to 16 inches (41 cm) wide without the paper tent or 15.5 inches (39.5 cm) wide with the paper tent installed. Thickness: Single-part: 15 to 100 pound (6.80 to 45.36 kg) stock; Multi-part: 1- to 6-part forms (maximum 12 lb [5.44 kg] ply of upper plies) Sheet Thickness: 0.025 inch (0.064 cm) maximum Drive: Adjustable tractors (6-pin engagement) Paper Specifications Labels On Backing: One-part continuous perforated fanfold back form. Labels must be placed at least 1/6 inch (0.42 cm) from the fan-fold perforation. Backing adhesive must not be squeezed out during printing. Sheet Size: 3 to 17 inches (7.62 to 43.18 cm) wide, including the two standard perforated tractor feed strips. A maximum sheet length of 16 inches (40.64 cm) between top and bottom perforations. NOTE: A 16 inch rear door is needed for the cabinet model. Power Paper Stacker option is 5 to 12 inches (12.7 to 30.48 cm) long. Thickness: Not to exceed 0.025 inch (0.064 cm) (including backing sheet) 347 Appendix A Printer Weight And Dimensions Printer Weight And Dimensions Cabinet Type Dimensions Weight Height Width Depth Unpacked Packaged Floor Cabinet 42.5 inches 27 inches 29 inches* 225 lbs. 285 lbs.* Pedestal 35 inches* 26 inches 21 inches 105 lbs.** 115 lbs.** * With a power stacker, the weight increases by 21 lbs. and the depth increases by 4.75 inches for a deeper rear door. ** With the ZTP option, the weight increases by 12 lbs. and the height is increased by 7 inches. Environmental Characteristics Temperature: Operating: 50° to 104° F (10° to 40° C) up to 5000 feet (1524 meters) 50° to 90° F (10° to 32° C) up to 8000 feet (2438 meters) Storage: -40° to 158° F (- 40° to 70° C) Relative Humidity 348 Operating: 15% to 80% (noncondensing) Storage: 15% to 90% (noncondensing) Electrical Characteristics Acoustic Noise Level Acoustic Noise Levels per ISO 9296 Printing Standby Cabinet Models Pedestal Models 50 dB (500 lpm/1000 lpm) 52 dB (1500 lpm) 54 dB (2000 lpm) 65 dB 65 dB NA NA 6.8 Bel 8.0 Bel 48 dB 50 dB 6.3 Bel 6.5 Bel 52 dB 52 dB (1500 lpm) 54 dB (2000 lpm) 65 dB 65 dB NA NA 6.8 Bel 8.0 Bel 48 dB 50 dB 6.3 Bel 6.5 Bel Geraeuschemission nach ISO 9296 Druckend Betriebsbereit Energy Star The printers described in this User’s Manual comply with the requirements of the ENERGY STAR® Office Equipment Program of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. When in the reduced-power idle state, the printer displays “Power Saver Mode.” 349 Appendix A Electrical Characteristics Electrical Characteristics Voltage (+/-10%) P7005 P7010 P7015 P7205 P7210 P7215 P7220 Freq (+/-10%) Amps Watts BTU/Hr AC 100-120V 50-60 Hz 3A 275W 940 AC 200-240V 50-60 Hz 1.5A 275W 940 AC 100-120V 50-60 Hz 3.5V 300W 1025 AC 200-240V 50-60 Hz 1.6A 300W 1025 AC 100-120V 50-60 Hz 4.5A 430W 1469 AC 200-240V 50-60 Hz 1.9A 430W 1469 AC 100-120V 50-60 Hz 3.5A 350W 1195 AC 200-240V 50-60 Hz 1.6A 350W 1195 AC 100-120V 50-60 Hz 3.5A 350W 1195 AC 200-240V 50-60 Hz 1.6A 350S 1195 AC 100-120V 50-60 Hz 5A 460W 1571 AC 200-240V 50-60 Hz 2A 460W 1571 AC 100-120V 50-60 Hz 5.5A 540W 1844 AC 200-240V 50-60 Hz 2.1A 540W 1844 The above values are calculated while printing 136 column, all upper case high speed “E’s”. The stand-by (Energy Saver mode) wattage is 28W (96 BTU/Hr) for all models. 350 Interfaces Type: Standard: IEEE 1284 Parallel, Centronics Parallel, RS-232 serial, Dataproducts Parallel Optional: Coax, Twinax, RS-422 serial, Ethernet 10/100Base-T. Logic Levels: TTL/EIA®-232E/EIA-422B Transfer Rates: Up to 200 Kilobytes on parallel interface. Up to 19.2K baud on RS-232 serial interface. Up to 115.2K baud on RS-422 serial interface Printing Rates The printing speed of text is measured in lines per minute (lpm) and is a function of the selected font and the vertical dot density. Printing speed is independent of the number of characters configured in the character set repertoire. Print rates for lines containing attributes such as bold or emphasized printing, superscripts, subscripts, or elongated attributes will decrease to not less than half the rates of the font without such attributes. The exact print rate of lines containing these attributes depends on the specific print job, but software maximizes the throughput by dynamically determining which dot rows contain adjacent dots and must be printed in two strokes. The reverse paper feed capability allows the printing of multiple densities on a single line. This is useful in printing forms and text together or in mixing different fonts on a print line. Use of multiple densities and reverse paper feed also affects throughput. 351 Appendix A 352 Printing Rates B ASCII Character Set KEY B7 B6 B5 BITS B4 B3B2 B1 0 1 0 1 1 ESC 0 1 33 27 1B OCTAL equivalent DECIMAL equivalent HEX equivalent ASCII Character Name B7 BITS B6 0 B5 0 0 0 COLUMN B4 B3 B2 B1 ROW 0 00 0 0 0 NUL 00 0 1 1 SOH 00 1 0 2 STX 00 1 1 3 ETX 01 0 0 4 EOT 01 0 1 5 ENQ 01 1 0 6 ACK 01 1 1 7 BEL 10 0 0 8 BS 10 0 1 9 HT 10 1 0 10 LF 10 1 1 11 VT 11 0 0 12 FF 11 0 1 13 CR 11 1 0 14 SO 11 1 1 15 SI 0 0 1 1 1 0 20 0 DLE 16 0 10 1 21 DC1 17 1 1 (XON) 11 2 22 2 DC2 18 2 12 3 23 DC3 3 19 3 (XOFF) 13 4 24 DC4 20 4 4 14 5 25 NAK 5 21 5 15 6 26 SYN 22 6 6 16 7 27 ETB 23 7 7 17 10 30 CAN 24 8 8 18 11 31 EM 9 25 9 19 32 12 SUB 26 10 1A 0A 33 13 ESC 27 11 1B 0B 34 14 FS 28 12 1C 0C 35 15 29 13 GS 1D 0D 36 16 RS 30 14 1E 0E 37 17 31 15 US 1F 0F 0 1 0 2 SP ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 1 0 1 3 40 32 20 41 33 21 42 34 22 43 35 23 44 36 24 45 37 25 46 38 26 47 39 27 50 40 28 51 41 29 52 42 2A 53 43 2B 54 44 2C 55 45 2D 56 46 2E 57 47 2F 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? 1 0 0 4 60 48 30 61 49 31 62 50 32 63 51 33 64 52 34 65 53 35 66 54 36 67 55 37 70 56 38 71 57 39 72 58 3A 73 59 3B 74 60 3C 75 61 3D 76 62 3E 77 63 3F @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O 1 1 5 100 64 40 101 65 41 102 66 42 103 67 43 104 68 44 105 69 45 106 70 46 107 71 47 110 72 48 111 73 49 112 74 4A 113 75 4B 114 76 4C 115 77 4D 116 78 4E 117 79 4F P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ 1 1 6 120 80 50 121 81 51 122 82 52 123 83 53 124 84 54 125 85 55 126 86 56 127 87 57 130 88 58 131 89 59 132 90 5A 133 91 5B 134 92 5C 135 93 5D 136 94 5E 137 95 5F a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o 1 0 1 7 140 96 60 141 97 61 142 98 62 143 99 63 144 100 64 145 101 65 146 102 66 147 103 67 150 104 68 151 105 69 152 106 6A 153 107 6B 154 108 6C 155 109 6D 156 110 6E 157 111 6F p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ DEL 160 112 70 161 113 71 162 114 72 163 115 73 164 116 74 165 117 75 166 118 76 167 119 77 170 120 78 171 121 79 172 122 7A 173 123 7B 174 124 7C 175 125 7D 176 126 7E 177 127 7F 353 Appendix B 354 C Communication Notices Notices This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A. Printronix may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in other countries. Consult your Printronix representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an Printronix product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that Printronix product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any Printronix intellectual property rights may be used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-Printronix product, program, or service. Printronix may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquires, in writing, to: Printronix, Inc. 14600 Myford Road P.O. Box 19559 Irvine, CA 92623-9559 U.S.A. 355 Appendix C Notices The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: PRINTRONIX PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to you. This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication. Printronix may make improvements and/ or changes in the product(s) described in this publication at any time without notice. Any references in this information to non-Printronix Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this Printronix product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk. Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled environment. Therefore, the results obtained in other operating environments may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these measurements will be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore, some measurement may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for their specific environment. Information concerning non-Printronix products was obtained from the suppliers of those products, their published announcements or other publicly available sources. Printronix has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to non-Printronix products. Questions on the capabilities of non-Printronix products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products. 356 Printronix encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. Printronix offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in recycling their IT products. Information on these product recycling offerings can be found on Printronix’s Internet site at http://www.printronix.com. Note! Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information and Communication Statements on page 360. If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color illustrations may not appear. For online versions of this book, we authorize you to: • Copy, modify, and print the documentation contained on the media, for use within your enterprise, provided you reproduce the copyright notice, all warning statements, and other required statements on each copy or partial copy. • Transfer the original unaltered copy of the documentation when you transfer the related Printronix product (which may be either machines you own, or programs, if the program’s license terms permit a transfer). You must, at the same time, destroy all other copies of the documentation. You are responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal property taxes, resulting from this authorization. Your failure to comply with the terms above terminates this authorization. Upon termination, you must destroy your machine readable documentation. 357 Appendix C Energy Star Energy Star The Environmental Protection Agency ENERGY STAR® Computers program is a partnership effort with manufacturers of data processing equipment to promote the introduction of energyefficient personal computers, monitors, printers, fax machines, and copiers to help reduce air pollution and global warming caused by electricity generation. Printronix participates in this program by introducing printers that reduce power consumption when they are not being used. As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Printronix has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STAR® guidelines for energy efficiency. NOTE: The ENERGY STAR® emblem does not represent EPA endorsement of any product or service. 358 Product Recycling and Disposal This unit may have lead-containing materials – such as circuit boards and connectors – that require special handling. Before this unit is disposed of, these materials must be removed and recycled or discarded according to applicable regulations. This book contains specific information on batteries and refrigerant where applicable. This product may contain a sealed, lead-acid battery; lithium battery; nickel-metal-hydride battery; or nickel-cadium battery. Batteries of these types must be recycled or disposed of properly. Recycling facilities may not be available in your area. In the United States, Printronix has established a collection process for reuse, recycling, or proper disposal of used batteries and battery packs from Printronix equipment. For information on proper disposal of the batteries in this product, please contact Printronix. For information on disposal of batteries outside the United States, contact your local waste disposal facility. 359 Appendix C Communication Statements Communication Statements Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement This equpment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to meet FCC emission limits. Printronix is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Fules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 360 European Union (EU) Conformity Statement Hereby, Printronix declares that this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevent provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Printronix cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product, including the fitting of non-Printronix option cards. This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A Information Technology Equipment according to European standard EN 55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed communication devices. WARNING This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to reduce the potential for causing interference to radio and TV communications and to other electrical or electronic equipment. Printronix cannot accept responsibility for any interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors. Industry Canada Compliance Statement This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. Cet appareil numérique de la classe A conform á la norme NMB-003 du Canada. 361 Appendix C Communication Statements Statement of CISPR 22 Edition 2 Compliance Attention: This is a Class A Product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures. Japanese VCCI Class A German Conformity Statement Handbuchtexte: FCC class A entspricht: EMVG Klasse A Text Für alle in Deutschland vertriebenen EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte: Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten (EMVG) vom 18. September 1998 (bzw. der EMC EG Richtlinie 89/336): Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt in Übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das EG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen. Verantwortlich für die Konformitätserklärung nach Paragraph 5 des EMVG ist die: Printronix Deutschland GmbH, 70548 Stuttgart. Informationen in Hinsicht EMVG Paragraph 4 Abs. (1) 4: Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022 Klasse A. EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden: “Warnung: dies ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im Wohnbereich Funkstörungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber verlangt werden, angemessene Maßnahmen durchzuführen und dafür aufzukommen.” 362 EN 55024 Hinweis: Wird dieses Gerät in einer industriellen Umgebung betrieben (wie in EN 55024 festgelegt), dann kann es dabei eventuell gestört werden. In solch einem Fall ist der Abstand bzw. die Abschirmung zu der industriellen Störquelle zu öergrvßern. Anmerkung: Um die Einhaltung des EMVG sicherzustellen sind die Geräte, wie in den Printronix Handbüchern angegeben, zu installieren und zu betreiben. China Declaration: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may need to perform practical actions. 363 Appendix C Communication Statements Taiwan Warning: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user will be required to take adequate measures. 364 Korea CAUTION: This product is equipped with a 3-wire power cord and plug for the user’s safety. Use this power cord in conjunction with a properly grounded electrical outlet to avoid electrical shock. Lithium Battery Warning The controller board contains a lithium battery sealed inside the real-time clock chip. Do not disassemble the chip to replace the battery. Do not dispose of the chip by incineration. Failure to comply may cause the battery to explode. Contact your local waste agency for the correct disposal procedure. 365 Appendix C Software License Agreement Software License Agreement Your printer contains, among other software, Printronix operating software including, but not limited to the Embedded Configurable Operating System (the “eCos Software”) as embedded software. The terms of this Agreement apply only to the eCos Software, and all other embedded software supplied with the printer. You accept the terms of this Agreement by your initial use of your printer. 1. Object Code License Printronix grants you a nonexclusive license to use the Printronix Software, the eCos Software and all other embedded software (collectively, the “Embedded Software” or the “Software”) only in conjunction with the printer. As the rightful possessor of the printer, you may make a reasonable number of copies of the Software as necessary for backup, configuration, and restoration of the printer. You must reproduce the copyright notice and any other legend of ownership on each copy of the Software you make. You may transfer possession of the Software and its media to another party only with the transfer of the printer on which the Software is used. If you do so, you must give the other party a copy of these terms and provide all user documentation to that party. When you do so, you must destroy any copies of Software not resident in the printer. Your license for the Software terminates when you no longer rightfully possess the printer. No other rights under this license are granted. 2. Source Code A source code version of eCos Software is available under the terms of the Red Hat eCos Public License v1.1 at www.printronix.com. Printronix grants no rights whatsoever in the source code for the Printronix Software. 366 3. No Warranty THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS FREE OF DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT RED HAT, PRINTRONIX, ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER. 4. Conflicting Terms You agree that this Agreement provides you no more rights with regards to warranty, support, indemnity or liability terms with respect to Red Hat, Inc., Printronix, Inc. or any contributor to the Embedded Software than that provided by the Red Hat eCos Public License v.1.1 or any express warranty that may be made by Printronix, Inc. 367 Appendix C Software License Agreement 5. Limitation of Liability UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL RED HAT, PRINTRONIX, ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE, OR ANY PART THEREOF, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY'S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THAT EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 6. U.S. Government Users The Embedded Software is a "commercial item," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein. 368 7. Miscellaneous This Agreement represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof. If any provision of this Agreement is held to be unenforceable, such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable. This Agreement shall be governed by California law provisions (except to the extent applicable law, if any, provides otherwise), excluding its conflict-oflaw provisions. 8. Red Hat Statement with regards to eCos Software Part of the software embedded in this product is eCos - Embedded Configurable Operating System, a trademark of Red Hat. Portions created by Red Hat are Copyright (C) 1998, 1999, 2000 Red Hat, Inc. (http://www.redhat.com) All Rights Reserved. THE SOFTWARE IN THIS PRODUCT WAS IN PART PROVIDED BY RED HAT AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 369 Appendix C 370 Software License Agreement Index Numerics 5225 World Trade, 182 06 HOST REQUEST message, 317 5250 Params, 196 08 HOLD PRINT TIMEOUT message, 317 5250 Params menu 15 COMM CHECK message, 317 Active Char Set, 198 15V PWR FAIL * message, 317 Format Control, 201 20 CPI Condensed Graphic Chek Cod, 200 Epson FX Emulation, 243 Graphic Chek Err, 199 Proprinter XL Emulation, 238 Host Override, 201 22 INVALID ADDR message, 317 Max. Print Width, 201 23.5V PWR FAIL * message, 317 Prt Partial Line, 198 31 PAPER OUT TIMEOUT message, 317 PTX Transparent, 198 32 PAPER JAM TIMEOUT message, 318 Set Text Orientn, 200 3270 Params, 187 3270 Params menu Translation Tbl, 197 8.5V PWR FAIL * message, 317 Active Char Set, 189 Change Case, 191 Compatibility Op, 192 Early Print Cmpl, 189 Format Control, 195 Host Override, 195 Intervention Req, 191 Max. Print Width, 195 Prt Partial Line, 189 PTX Transparent, 190 Set Text Orientn, 191 Translation Tbl, 189 33 PLATEN OPEN TIMOUT message, 318 34 RIBBON STALL TIMOUT message, 318 48V PWR FAIL * message, 318 A A TO D OVERUN * message, 318 Absorb After ^PN, 160 Absorb After ^PY, 156 Accented Char, PRINTER CONTROL, 280 ACCESS NULL PTR * message, 318 Acknowledge, Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 297 Acoustic noise level, 349 ACTIVATE LOST message, 319 Active Char Set, 171, 181 3270 Params menu, 189 5250 Params menu, 198 ACTIVE IGP EMUL menu, 125 Active IGP Emulation, 77 371 Index Adapter Address, 75 Shuttle Timeout, 286 ADAPTER ADDRESS menu, 109 Slow Paper Slew, 286 DHCP, 110 AI 00 Spaces, 138, 158 Gateway address, 109 Alarm, ADVANCED USER menu, 286 IP address, 109 Alt. Char Set, Proprinter XL Emulation, 238 MAC address, 109 Alt. Set 80-9F, 174, 223 Subnet mask, 109 ADAPTER PARAMS menu ASCII data port, 112 Ethernet speed, 112 PTX Transparent, 183 Serial Matrix Emulation, 234 ANSI Emulation menu, 248 IPDS Data Port, 112 Auto LF, 253 Job Control, 113 Barcode Darkmode, 256 Keep alive timer, 112 BC Check Digit, 255 Nest Serv Type, 111 Character Set, 254 NetBIOS protocol, 111 CPI/LPI Select, 250 Novell frame, 111 Define CR Code, 253 Novell protocol, 111 Define LF Code, 253 ADVANCED USER menu, 281 ESC c Sequence, 254 Alarm, 286 ETX/ACK, 256 Auto Elevator, 284 Font Attributes, 250 Auto Locking, 284 Page Format, 251 Cancel Key, 287 Pos. on BC/OvrSz, 255 Downloaded Fonts, 283 Printer Select, 254 File System, 285 Private Mode, 255 PMD (Paper Motion Detection) PUM Default, 256 Fault, 283 372 Epson FX Emulation, 243 Received CR, 255 Power Saver Time, 287 Received DEL, 255 Power Stacker, 284 Reset Cmd CFG Ld, 254 Pwr Save Control, 287 Truncate PI Slew, 256 Set Lock Key, 288 Append Rotated, 155 Set Sharing, 285 ASCII Character Set, 353 Index ASCII data port, Adapter Params Auto Uppercase, 135 menu, 112 Autowrap, 133 ASCII data port, Ethernet Parameters Autowrap, LG Emulation, 272 menu, 116 B ASCII data port, WLAN Parameters B10 ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED* menu, 120 Auth Method, WLAN LEAP menu, 123 Auto Elevator, ADVANCED USER message, 319 B11 ERROR RAM TEST FAILED* message, 319 menu, 284 Auto FF at ^PN, 160 Auto LF, 222 ANSI Emulation menu, 253 Epson FX Emulation, 242 Proprinter XL Emulation, 237 P-Series XQ Emulation, 229 Serial Matrix Emulation, 233 Auto Locking, ADVANCED USER B12 ERROR PROGRAM MISSING* message, 319 B13 ERROR NOT COMPATIBLE* message, 319 B19 ERROR DC RETURNED* message, 320 B20 STATUS 00% DOWNLOAD MODE message, 320 B21 STATUS PRINTER RESET menu, 284 Auto Save Configuration, 60 Auto Skip At End, 177, 194 Auto Switching submenu, 86 Auto Switching submenu, 87 Port Type, 87 Report Status, 88 Timeout, 88 Trickle Time, 87 message, 320 B22 ERROR DECOMPRESS SIZE* message, 320 B23 ERROR DECOMPRESS CKSUM* message, 321 B30 STATUS INITIALIZING, 321 B35 WAITING FOR EC STATUS, 321 B40 ERROR PROM CKSUM BAD* message, 321 Auto Trickle Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 93 Dataproducts (Standard & Long Lines) submenu, 96 IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 89 B41 ERROR DIM MEMORY NOT SDRAM* message, 321 B42 ERROR SDRAM ROWS NOT ALLOWED* message, 321 B43 ERROR SDRAM TOO MANY BANKS* message, 322 373 Index B44 ERROR SDRAM NOT 64 BITS WIDE* Barcode Quality, IPDS Emulation, 259 message, 322 Barcode Size, IPDS Emulation, 260 B45 ERROR SDRAM IS WRONG Barcode Speed, IPDS Emulation, 260 VOLTAGE* message, 322 Baud Rate, Serial submenu, 102 B46 ERROR SDRAM HAS MIXED SIZES* BC Check Digit, ANSI Emulation message, 322 menu, 255 B47 ERROR SDRAM LARGER THAN Buffer Clear, Dataproducts Parallel 256M* message, 322 Interface Signals, 295 B49 ERROR SDRAM # LOGICAL BANKS* BUFFER OVERRUN message, 324 message, 323 Buffer Print, 179, 186, 203 B50 ERROR SDRAM LOGIC COMB SPC Twx Params, 208 BANKS* message, 323 Buffer Reprint, 172, 204 B50 XX% CLEAR FLASH, 323 Buffer Size in K B51 ERROR 50A LINE STUCK LOW, 323 Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 93 B51 XX% PROGRAMMING..., 323 Dataproducts (Standard & Long Lines) B55 STATUS SEND PROGRAM TO submenu, 96 EC, 323 Ethernet submenu, 106, 107 Bar Code Quality, PRINTER IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) CONTROL, 279 Bar Code Verification, 314 Submenu, 89 Serial submenu, 104 BARCODE DAMAGED message, 324 Busy On Strobe, Centronics (Parallel) Barcode Darkmode, ANSI Emulation submenu, 92 menu, 256 Busy, Centronics Parallel Interface Barcode Errors, 161 Signals, 297 BARCODE MISSING message, 324 Byte Mode, IEEE 1284 Parallel Barcode Options, 137 Interface, 298 AI 00 Spaces, 138 C I 2/5 Selection, 138 Optimized Ratio, 137 Select SO Char, 138 UPC Descenders, 137 User-Def Ratio, 139 Cable Verify, Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals, 295 Cancel a print job, 52 Cancel IGP/DCU, 173, 182 CANCEL key, 30 374 Index Cancel Key, ADVANCED USER ANSI Emulation menu, 254 menu, 287 ASCII, 353 Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 91 Epson FX Emulation, 243 Auto Trickle, 93 Proprinter XL Emulation, 237 Buffer Size in K, 93 Serial Matrix Emulation, 234 Busy On Strobe, 92 Characteristics, environmental, 348 Data Bit 8, 91 Cleaning Data Polarity, 92 exterior, 311 Latch Data On, 92 interior, 312 PI Ignored, 92 Cleaning requirements, 311 Prime Signal, 93 CLEAR key, 29 Resp. Polarity, 92 CLEAR PAPER JAM message, 324 TOF Action, 93 Clear to Send (CTS), RS-232, 306 Trickle Time, 93 CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH Centronics Parallel Interface, 296 message, 325 Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 297 Clock Skew, WLAN Kerberos menu, 122 Acknowledge, 297 CLOSE PLATEN message, 325 Busy, 297 Coax Emulation menu, 169 Data Lines 1 through 8, 297 Active Char Set, 171 Data Strobe, 297 Buffer Print, 179 Fault, 297 Buffer Reprint, 172 Online, 297 Cancel IGP/DCU, 173 Paper Empty (PE), 297 Change Case, 174 Paper Instruction (PI), 297 Char Set Select, 171 Prime, 297 Compatibility Op, 175 Change Case, 174 Early Print Cmpl, 172 Change Case, 3270 Params menu, 191 Format Control, 178 Changing parameter settings, 54 Host Override, 178 Changing parameters, example, 57 Image Buf Size, 175 Changing Ribbons, 49 Intervention Req, 175 Char Set Select, 171, 181 Max. Print Width, 179 Character Set, 224 PA1, 171 375 Index PA2, 172 Config Print, PCL-II Emulation, 268 Prt Partial Line, 171 CONFIG. CONTROL menu, 82 PTX Transparent, 173 Delete Config., 83 SCS Buffer Cntrl, 173 Load Config., 82 Set Text Orientn, 174 Name Configs, 84 Translate Table, 178 Power-Up Config., 83 Translation Tbl, 171 Print Config., 83 Coax/Twinax (CTHI) Emulation menu, 167 Protect Configs., 83 Simple Prot Conv, 168 Reset Cfg Names, 84 Standard, 167 Save Config., 83 Code Page Subset, IPDS Emulation, 262 Configuration, Auto Save, 60 COIL HOT message, 325 Configurations Column 132 Wrap, 203 custom, 55 Compatbl. Mode, 141 default, 55 Compatibility Mode, IEEE 1284 Parallel overview, 53 Interface, 298 saving, 61 Compatibility Op, 175 Control Code 06, 221 Auto Skip At End, 177, 194 P-Series XQ Emulation, 228 CR at MPP+1, 175, 192 Serial Matrix Emulation, 232 CR, EM, and NL (3287 only), 177, 194 Control Control Code 08, 221 FF After Job, 177, 194 Control panel, 28 FF Validity, 176, 193 Control panel keys Last Char = FF, 176, 193 CANCEL, 30 NL At MPP+1, 175, 192 CLEAR, 29 Null Suppression, 176, 193 ENTER, 31 Position Aft FF (4234 only), 176, 192 JOB SELECT, 31 Compatibility Op, 3270 Params menu, 192 ON LINE, 29 Compliance, Energy Star, 349 PAPER ADVANCE, 29 Component locations, printer, 26 PREV + NEXT, 32 Compressed CPI, 140 PREV or NEXT, 32 Compressed Print, P-Series XQ PRT CONFIG, 30 Emulation, 230 SET TOF, 30 376 Index UP + DOWN, 31 UP or DOWN, 31 Data Strobe Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 297 VIEW/EJECT key, 29 Conventions, manual, 18 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals, 295 CPI/LPI Select, 213 ANSI Emulation menu, 250 Data Term Ready, Serial submenu, 103 CR at MPP+1, 175, 192 Data Terminal Ready (DTR), RS-232, 306 CR Edit, 134 Dataproducts (Standard & Long Lines) CR, EM, and NL (3287 only), 177, 194 submenu CR, LG Emulation, 273 Auto Trickle, 96 CTL VOLT FAIL * message, 325 Buffer Size in K, 96 Custom configurations, 55 Data Bit 8, 95 Customer Support Center, 20 Data Polarity, 95 D Darker print, Integrated Print Management System, 48 Latch Data On, 95 PI Ignored, 95 Prime Signal, 96 Resp. Polarity, 95 Data Bit 8, 163 Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 91 Dataproducts (Standard & Long Lines) submenu, 95 Data Carrier Detect (DCD), RS-232, 306 Data Lines 1 through 8 Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 297 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals, 295 Data Polarity Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 92 Dataproducts (Standard & Long Lines) submenu, 95 Data Protocol, Serial submenu, 99 TOF Action, 96 Trickle Time, 96 Dataproducts (Standard) submenu, 94 Dataproducts Parallel Interface, 294 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals, 295 Buffer Clear, 295 Cable Verify, 295 Data Lines 1 through 8, 295 Data Strobe, 295 Demand/Data Request, 295 Online, 295 Paper Instruction (PI), 295 Parity Error, 295 Ready, 295 Data Set Ready (DSR), RS-232, 306 377 Index Default Code Page, IPDS Emulation, 261 System Memory, 291 Default configurations, 55 Test Width, 289 Default Font, IPDS Emulation, 262 Dimensions, printer, 23, 348 Define CR Code, 133, 222 Display Functions, PCL-II Emulation, 266 ANSI Emulation menu, 253 Display Language, PRINTER Epson FX Emulation, 241 CONTROL, 280 Proprinter XL Emulation, 236 DO NOT POWER OFF message, 325 P-Series XQ Emulation, 229 Documentation list, 19 Serial Matrix Emulation, 233 Downloaded Fonts, ADVANCED USER Define LF Code, 133, 222 menu, 283 ANSI Emulation menu, 253 DRAM Avail., DIAGNOSTICS, 292 Epson FX Emulation, 242 DRVR CIR BAD * message, 325 Proprinter XL Emulation, 237 E P-Series XQ Emulation, 229 Serial Matrix Emulation, 233 Delete Config., 83 Demand/Data Request, Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals, 295 Device Address, 182, 207 Device ID, 75, 182 DHCP Adapter Address menu, 110 Ethernet Address menu, 114 WLAN Address menu, 118 DIAGNOSTIC PASSED message, 325 DIAGNOSTICS menu, 289 DRAM Avail., 292 Flash Avail., 292 Paper Out Dots, 291 Print Statistics, 292 Printer Tests, 290 378 E NET TEST UNAVAILABLE message, 326 Early Print Cmpl, 172 3270 Params menu, 189 Early Print Comp (Complete), IPDS Emulation, 260 Eject Function, PRINTER CONTROL menu, 277 Electrical Characteristics, 350 Elong/Alt. Font, P-Series XQ Emulation, 230 EMULATION Menu, 166 Emulation, IGP/PGL, 126 Energy Star compliance, 349 E-Net Adapter submenu, 106 ENTER key, 31 Environmental characteristics, 348 Index Epson FX Character Set menu, 244, 245 Error Msgs, 161 LG, 247 ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED PCL-II, 246 message, 327 Epson FX Emulation, 241 ERROR NVRAM FAILURE message, 327 20 CPI Condensed, 243 ERROR OCCURRED FLUSHING Alt. Set 80-9F, 243 QUEUES* message, 328 Auto LF, 242 ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE Character Set, 243 DRAM message, 328 Define CR Code, 241 ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE Define LF Code, 242 FLASH message, 328 Printer Select, 242 ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID message, 328 message, 326 ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID ERROR DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX message, 328 message, 326 Error Report, 144 ERROR EC PROGRAM NOT VALID ERROR SECURITY KEY NOT message, 326 DETECTED message, 328 ERROR EC STOPPED AT XXXX ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX message, 326 message, 328 ERROR FLASH DID NOT PROGRAM ERROR WRITING TO FLASH message, 327 message, 329 ERROR FLASH NOT DETECTED ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM message, 327 message, 329 Error Handling, 161 ERROR WRONG OEM OR PRINTER Barcode Errors, 161 TYPE message, 329 Error Markers, 161 ESC c Sequence, ANSI Emulation Error Msgs, 161 menu, 254 Offpage Errors, 161 ESC d command, Serial Matrix ERROR LOCKED Emulation, 234 SN=nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ETHERNET ADAPTER BEING message, 327 INITIALIZED message, 329 Error Markers, 161 Ethernet Address, 76 379 Index ETHERNET ADDRESS menu, 113 F DHCP, 114 Face CPI Delay, PCL-II Emulation, 266 Gateway address, 114 Fault messages, 316 IP address, 113 06 HOST REQUEST, 317 MAC address, 114 08 HOLD PRINT TIMEOUT, 317 Subnet mask, 114 15 COMM CHECK, 317 ETHERNET DETECTED message, 329 15V PWR FAIL *, 317 ETHERNET PARAMETERS menu 22 INVALID ADDR, 317 ASCII data port, 116 23.5V PWR FAIL *, 317 Ethernet speed, 116 31 PAPER OUT TIMEOUT, 317 IPDS Data Port, 116 32 PAPER JAM TIMEOUT, 318 Job Control, 117 33 PLATEN OPEN TIMEOUT, 318 Keep alive timer, 116 34 RIBBON STALL TIMEOUT, 318 NetBIOS protocol, 115 48V PWR FAIL *, 318 ETHERNET PARAMS menu, 115 8.5V PWR FAIL *, 317 Ethernet speed, Adapter Params A TO D OVERUN *, 318 menu, 112 ACCESS NULL PTR *, 318 Ethernet speed, Ethernet Parameters ACTIVATE LOST, 319 menu, 116 B10 ERROR NO DRAM Ethernet submenu, 107 Buffer Size in K, 106, 107 ETX/ACK, ANSI Emulation menu, 256 EVFU, SPC Type, 208 EXCESS RBN WEAR message, 329 EXHAUST FAN FLT message, 330 DETECTED*, 319 B11 ERROR RAM TEST FAILED*, 319 B12 ERROR PROGRAM MISSING*, 319 B13 ERROR NOT COMPATIBLE*, 319 Expanded Font, 141, 157 B19 ERROR DC RETURNED*, 320 Ext Execute Copy, 136 B20 STATUS 00% DOWNLOAD Exterior cleaning, 311 MODE, 320 B21 STATUS PRINTER RESET, 320 B22 ERROR DECOMPRESS SIZE*, 320 380 Index B23 ERROR DECOMPRESS BARCODE MISSING, 324 CKSUM*, 321 BUFFER OVERRUN, 324 B30 STATUS INITIALZING, 321 CLEAR PAPER JAM, 324 B35 STATUS WAITING FOR EC CLEARING PROGRAM FROM STATUS, 321 B40 ERROR SDRAMEE PROM CKSUM BAD*, 321 B41 ERROR DIM MEMORY NOT SDRAM*, 321 B42 ERROR SDRAM ROWS NOT ALLOWED*, 321 B43 ERROR SDRAM TOO MANY BANKS*, 322 B44 ERROR SDRAM NOT 64 BITS WIDE*, 322 B45 ERROR SDRAM IS WRONG VOLTAGE*, 322 B46 ERROR SDRAM HAS MIXED SIZES*, 322 B47 ERROR SDRAM LARGER THAN 256M*, 322 B49 ERROR SDRAM # LOGICAL BANKS*, 323 B50 ERROR SDRAM LOGIC COMB BANKS*, 323 FLASH, 325 CLOSE PLATEN, 325 COIL HOT, 325 CTL VOLT FAIL *, 325 DIAGNOSTIC PASSED, 325 DO NOT POWER OFF, 325 DRVR CIR BAD *, 325 E NET TEST UNAVAILABLE, 326 ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 326 ERROR DRAM AT ADDRESS XXXXXXXX, 326 ERROR EC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 326 ERROR EC STOPPED AT STATE XXXX, 326 ERROR FLASH DID NOT PROGRAM, 327 ERROR FLASH NOT DETECTED, 327 ERROR LOCKED B50 XX% CLEAR FLASH, 323 SN=nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn B51 ERROR 50A LINE STUCK n, 327 LOW, 323 ERROR NO DRAM DETECTED, 327 B51 XX% PROGRAMMING..., 323 ERROR NVRAM FAILURE, 327 B55 STATUS SEND PROGRAM TO ERROR OCCURRED FLUSHING EC, 323 QUEUES*, 328 BARCODE DAMAGED, 324 381 Index ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM, 328 ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE FLASH, 328 ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE, 328 ILLGL OPR ACCSS *, 332 INCOMPAT E-NET, 332 INTAKE FAN FAULT, 332 INTERRUPT UNUSED VECTOR 00, 333 ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID, 328 INVALID ACTIVATE, 333 ERROR SECURITY KEY NOT INVALID COMMAND, 333 DETECTED, 328 ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX, 328 ERROR WRITING TO FLASH, 329 ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM, 329 ERROR WRONG OEM OR PRINTER TYPE, 329 ETHERNET ADAPTER BEING INITIALIZED, 329 LO DRV. SHORT *, 333 LOAD PAPER, 333 LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX%, 333 LOADING PROGRAM INTO FLASH, 334 NEW SPX DETECTED, 334 NON VOLATILE MEMORY FAILED, 334 ETHERNET DETECTED, 329 OLD RIBBON, 334 EXCESS RBN WEAR, 329 ON LINE, 334 EXHAUST FAN FLT, 330 ONLINE 28 CU NOT ENAB, 334 FIRMWARE ERROR, 330 ONLINE 8344 FAILED, 334 FM HEADER ERROR, 330 ONLINE CU TIMED OUT, 335 FRAMING ERROR, 330 PAP BAD TABLE *, 335 FREEFORM OFF, 331 PAP BSY TOO LNG *, 335 FREEFORM ON OFF HOLD KEY @ PAP FIFO OVERFL *, 335 PWRUP, 331 GRF CHECK ERROR PRESS STOP, 331 382 ILL EXT BUS ACC *, 332 PAP FIFO UNDRFL *, 335 PAP ILLGL ST *, 335 PAP INCMPL ENER *, 335 HAM. COIL OPEN *, 331 PAP INVLD CMD *, 335 HAMMER COIL BAD, ###, 331 PAP INVLD PARM *, 335 HB NOT INSTALLD *, 331 PAP NOT SCHED *, 336 HMR BANK FAN FLT, 332 PAP NT AT SPEED *, 336 Index PAP UNEXP INT *, 336 SHUTL INV CMD *, 340 PARAMETER ERROR, 336 SHUTL INV PARM *, 340 PARITY ERROR, 336 SHUTL OVR SPEED*, 340 PLAT INV CMD *, 336 SHUTTLE JAM, 340 PLAT INV PARM *, 336 SHUTTLE STALL, 341 PLAT INV STATE *, 336 SOFTWARE ERROR* CYCLE PLEASE WAIT...RESET IN PROGRESS, 337 POWER SAVER MODE, 337 POWERSUPPLY HOT *, 337 PRINTER HOT *, 337 PRINTER UNDER REMOTE CONTROL, 337 POWER, 341 SPX FOUND, ERROR KEY NOT DETECTED, 341 SPX NOT NEEDED OPTIONS ENABLED, 341 SSTACKER JAM, 342 STACK OVERFLOW*, 341 PROTECTED INSTR *, 338 STACK UNDERFLOW*, 341 PWRSUPP VOLT *, 338 STACKER FAULT, 342 QUEUE OVERRUN*, 338 STACKER FULL, 342 RBN AT END POINT, 339 TABLE MISMATCH DOWNLOAD RBN SENSOR ERROR, 338 AGAIN, 342 REMOVE USED SPX, 338 TCB CORRUPTED*, 342 RESTORING BOOT CODE, 338 TCP PORT BUSY, 342 RIB INVLD CMD*, 338 UNDEF INTERRUPT*, 343 RIB INVLD STATE*, 339 UNDFNED OPCODE*, 343 RIBBON DRIVE, 339 UNKNOWN RBN1, 343 RIBBON NOT RECOGNIZED, 339 UNKNOWN RBN2, 343 RIBBON STALL, 339 UP DRV. SHORT*, 343 RIBBON UNDER 2%, 339 WAITING FOR ETHERNET SCS COMMAND ERROR, 339 SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED, 340 ADAPTER, 343 Fault, Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 297 SECURITY VIOLATION, 339 Features, printer, 13 SENDING PROGRAM TO EC FF After Job, 177, 194 PROCESSOR, 340 383 Index FF Valid at TOF, Proprinter XL Graphic Chek Cod, 5250 Params Emulation, 237 menu, 200 FF Validity, 176, 193 Graphic Chek Err, 184 FF, LG Emulation, 274 Graphic Chek Err, 5250 Params menu, 199 File System, ADVANCED USER Graphics Density, PCL-II Emulation, 266 menu, 285 Graphics enhancement, 17 FIRMWARE ERROR message, 330 Graphics Options, 155 Flash Avail., DIAGNOSTICS, 292 Absorb After ^PN, 160 FM HEADER ERROR message, 330 Absorb After ^PY, 156 Font Attributes, 214 AI 00 Spaces, 158 ANSI Emulation menu, 250 Append Rotated, 155 Font Set, 163 Auto FF at ^PN, 160 Font Size, IPDS Emulation, 259 Expanded Font, 157 Font, LG Emulation, 271 I25 Selection, 158 Form Length, 77, 79 Ignore ^Lxx Cmd., 160 Form Width, 77, 79 Ignore Dots, 155 Format Control, 178, 186 Ignore Spaces, 157 3270 Params menu, 195 IGP110 Compatbl., 160 5250 Params menu, 201 LP+ Font, 157 Forms Handling, 135 Midline PY (includes ^PN), 157 FRAMING ERROR message, 330 MSI Check Digit, 158 Framing Errors, Serial submenu, 105 Print Quality, 157 FREEFORM OFF message, 331 Rot. Char Size, 156 FREEFORM ON OFF HOLD KEY @ Slash 0, 155 PWRUP message, 331 True Vert 1/10, 156 G Gateway address Adapter Address menu, 109 Ethernet Address menu, 114 WLAN Address menu, 118 Graphic CharSize, IPDS Emulation, 261 Graphic Chek Cod, 184 384 Truncate Alpha, 155 UPC Descenders, 156 Width Limit, 159 Graphics Print, IPDS Emulation, 259 Graphics Quality, IPDS Emulation, 259 Graphics Scaling, IPDS Emulation, 261 Index GRF CHECK ERROR PRESS STOP IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) message, 331 Submenu, 88 H HAM. COIL OPEN * message, 331 HAMMER COIL BAD, ### Message, 331 HB NOT INSTALLD * message, 331 Hex Dump Mode, MAINT/MISC menu, 282 Hex Dump, printing, 315 Hexdump Mode, IPDS Emulation, 262 HMR BANK FAN FLT Message, 332 Horiz Forms, 80 Auto Trickle, 89 Buffer Size in K, 89 Offline Process, 90 Prime Signal, 89 TOF Action, 89 Trickle Time, 89 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface, 298 Byte Mode, 298 Compatibility Mode, 298 Nibble Mode, 298 Horiz Forms, LG Emulation, 272 Host Command, 213 Signals, 299 Ignore ^Lxx Cmd., 160 Host Form Length, 139 Host Interface, 75 Ignore CH#1, 162 Ignore CH#2, 162 HOST INTERFACE menu, 85 Host Override, 178, 185 3270 Params menu, 195 5250 Params menu, 201 Host PI, 164 Ignore Char, 140 Ignore Chars, 162 Ignore Dots, 155 Ignore Spaces, 157 Ignore/DB8 Setup, 162 HS Print (High Speed Print), P-Series XQ Emulation, 230 Data Bit 8, 163 Ignore CH#1, 162 I I 2/5 Checksum, IPDS Emulation, 261 I 2/5 Selection, 138 I-2/5 Guard Bars, LG Emulation, 275 I25 Selection, 158 Idle Response, Serial submenu, 104 Ignore CH#2, 162 Ignore Chars, 162 IGP/PGL Emulation, 126 configuring with the control panel, 128 IGP/PGL submenu, 129 Auto Uppercase, 135 Autowrap, 133 Barcode Options, 137 Compatbl. Mode, 141 385 Index Compressed CPI, 140 IGP/VGL submenu, 148 CR Edit, 134 Error Handling, 161 Define CR (Carriage Return) Font Set, 163 Code, 133 Graphics Options, 155 Define LF (Line Feed) Code, 133 Ignore/DB8 Setup, 162 Error Report, 144 LG, 152 Expanded Font, 141 LPI, 154 Ext Execute Copy, 136 PCL-II, 150 Forms Handling, 135 PI Control, 163 Host Form Length, 139 Prt to Emulate, 164 Ignore Char, 140 SFCC & Pwrup, 154 LG, 132 IGP110 Compatbl., 160 PCL-II, 131 ILL EXT BUS ACC * message, 332 PGL SFCC, 133 ILLGL OPR ACCSS * message, 332 PI Slew Range, 134 Image Buf Size, 175, 202 Power On IGP/PGL, 136 INCOMPAT E-NET message, 332 Power on S-Mode, 143 Ink Saver Mode, PRINTER Print Quality, 143 CONTROL, 289 Printer PI Line, 142 INTAKE FAN FAULT message, 332 Scalable Size, 142 Integrated Print Management Select Font, 134 System, 15, 48 Select LPI, 135 Skip Cmd Prefix, 135 Darker Print, 48 Lighter Print, 48 Slash 0, 134 Interface Type, Serial submenu, 99 True Form Slew, 142 Interfaces Trunc Dyn Data, 143 Var Form Adjust, 139 Var Form Type, 140 printer, 293 specifications, 351 Interior cleaning, 312 IGP/PGL, Font Set menu, 145 INTERRUPT UNUSED VECTOR 00 IGP/VGL Emulation, 146 message, 333 configuring with the control panel, 147 IGP/VGL Font Set Menu, 165 386 Intervention Req, 175, 203 Intervention Req, 3270 Params menu, 191 Index J INVALID ACTIVATE message, 333 INVALID COMMAND message, 333 Job Control, Adapter Params menu, 113 IP address Job Control, Ethernet Parameters Adapter Address menu, 109 menu, 117 Ethernet Address menu, 113 JOB SELECT key, 31 WLAN Address menu, 117 K IPDS Data Port, Adapter Params menu, 112 KDC Port Number, WLAN Kerberos IPDS Data Port, Ethernet Parameters menu, 122 menu, 116 Keep alive timer, Adapter Params IPDS Data Port, WLAN Parameters menu, 112 menu, 120 Keep alive timer, Ethernet Parameters IPDS Emulation, 257 menu, 116 Barcode Quality, 259 Keep alive timer, WLAN Parameters Barcode Size, 260 menu, 120 Barcode Speed, 260 Kerberos Enable, WLAN Kerberos Code Page Subset, 262 menu, 121 Default Code Page, 261 Kerberos Password, WLAN Kerberos Default Font, 262 menu, 122 Early Print Comp (Complete), 260 Font Size, 259 Graphic CharSize, 261 Graphics Quality, 259 Graphics Scaling, 261 Hexdump Mode, 262 I 2/5 Checksum, 261 Print IPDS Fonts, 262 Print Quality, 259 VPA Check, 262 L Label specifications, 347 LAC Approx., 185 LAC Option, 184 Last Char = FF, 176, 193 Latch Data On Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 92 Dataproducts (Standard & Long Lines) submenu, 95 Lead-in Chars, 173 PTX Transparent, 183 LEAP Password, WLAN LEAP menu, 124 LEAP Username, WLAN LEAP menu, 124 387 Index LG Emulation LOADING PROGRAM INTO FLASH Autowrap, 272 message, 334 CR, 273 Loading Used Ribbon, 16 FF, 274 Logical Buf Size, 202 Font, 271 LP+ Font, 157 Horiz Forms, 272 LP, LG Emulation, 273 I-2/5 Guard Bars, 275 LPI, 154 LP, 273 LPI Adjust, PCL-II Emulation, 267 Plot Mode Opt, 275 M Print Mode Opt, 274 Unsolicited Rpt, 274 Vert Forms, 271 Lighter print, Integrated Print Management System, 48 Line Terminator, PCL-II Emulation, 266 LinePrinter Plus Emulation submenu, 209 Barcode X-Offset, 218 CPI/LPI Select, 213 Font Attributes, 214 Host Command, 213 Page Format, 217 PCL-II, 212 Print Char. Set, 217 Printer Protocol, 213 Reset Cmd CFG Ld, 218 Set Substitution, 218 LO DRV. SHORT * message, 333 Load Config., 82 LOAD PAPER message, 333 LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX% message, 333 MAC address Adapter Address menu, 109 Ethernet Address menu, 114 WLAN Address menu, 118 Main menu, 70 MAINT/MISC menu Hex Dump Mode, 282 Power-Up State, 283 PTX Setup Option, 282 Maintenance, 17 Manual conventions, 18 related documents, 19 special information, 18 warnings, 18 Margins, 78 Max Line Width, 80 Max Line Width, PCL-II Emulation, 265 Max PI 16, 164 Max. Print Width, 179, 186 3270 Params menu, 195 5250 Params menu, 201 388 Index Nibble Mode, IEEE 1284 Parallel Menu ACTIVE IGP EMUL, 125 Interface, 298 ADVANCED USER, 281 NL At MPP+1, 175, 192, 205 CONFIG. CONTROL, 82 noise level, acoustic, 349 DIAGNOSTICS, 289 NON VOLATILE MEMORY FAILED EMULATION, 166 message, 334 HOST INTERFACE, 85 Novell frame, Adapter Params menu, 111 IGP/PGL Font Set, 145 Novell protocol, Adapter Params Main, 70 menu, 111 navigating, 56 Novell Protocols, 110 NETWORK SETUP, 108 Null Suppression, 176, 193 PRINTER CONTROL, 276 O Midline PY (includes ^PN), 157 MSI Check Digit, 158 Offline Process IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) N Submenu, 90 Name Configs, 84 Offpage Errors, 161 Navigating the menus, 56 OLD RIBBON message, 334 Nest Serv Type, Adapter Params ON LINE key, 29 menu, 111 ON LINE message, 334 NetBIOS protocol, Adapter Params One Char Enquiry, Serial submenu, 105 menu, 111 Online NetBIOS protocol, Ethernet Parameters menu, 115 NetBIOS protocol, WLAN Parameters menu, 119 NETWORK SETUP menu, 108 Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 297 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals, 295 ONLINE 28 CU NOT ENAB message, 334 ADAPTER ADDRESS, 109 ONLINE 8344 FAILED message, 334 ETHERNET ADDRESS, 113 ONLINE CU TIMED OUT message, 335 ETHERNET PARAMS, 115 Open Platen @ BOF (Bottom of Form) WLAN ADDRESS, 117 WLAN PARAMS, 119 PRINTER CONTROL, 278 Operating modes, 27 NEW SPX DETECTED message, 334 389 Index Operational procedures cancel a print job, 52 reload paper, 34 unload paper, 45 Optimized Ratio, 137 Optimizing print quality, 68 Paper reload, 34 unload, 45 PAPER ADVANCE key, 29 Paper Empty (PE) Centronics Parallel Interface Signals, 297 Optimizing print speed, 69 Output Darkness, 15 Paper Instruction (PI) Centronics Parallel Interface Overstrike, 222 Signals, 297 Serial Matrix Emulation, 233 Overview, printer models, 13 P PA1, 171, 204 PA2, 172, 204 Page Format, 217 ANSI Emulation menu, 251 Page L./Inches, PCL-II Emulation, 268 Page L./Lines, PCL-II Emulation, 267 Page Length Rep, 80 Page Length Rep, PCL-II Emulation, 265 PAP BAD TABLE * message, 335 PAP BSY TOO LNG * message, 335 PAP FIFO OVERFL * message, 335 PAP FIFO UNDRFL * message, 335 PAP ILLGL ST * message, 335 PAP INCMPL ENER * message, 335 PAP INVLD CMD * message, 335 PAP INVLD PARM * message, 335 PAP NOT SCHED * message, 336 PAP NT AT SPEED * message, 336 PAP UNEXP INT * message, 336 390 Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals, 295 Paper Out Dots, DIAGNOSTICS, 291 Paper specifications, 346 Parallel Interface Centronics, 296 Dataproducts, 294 PARAMETER ERROR message, 336 Parameter settings changing, 54 saving, 54 Parameters, changing, example, 57 Parity Error Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals, 295 PARITY ERROR message, 336 Parity, Serial submenu, 102 PCL-II Emulation, 263 Config Print, 268 Display Functions, 266 Face CPI Delay, 266 Graphics Density, 266 Index Line Terminator, 266 Poll Response, Serial submenu, 104 LPI Adjust, 267 Port Type, Auto Switching submenu, 87 Max Line Width, 265 Pos. on BC/OvrSz, ANSI Emulation Page L./Inches, 268 menu, 255 Page L./Lines, 267 Position Aft FF (4234 only), 176, 192 Page Length Rep, 265 Power Consumption, 350 Perforation Skip, 266 Power On IGP/PGL, 136 Primary Char. Set, 265 Power requirements, 21 PTX Linefeed, 267 POWER SAVER MODE message, 337 Reset Cmd CFG Ld, 268 Power Saver Time, ADVANCED Second Char. Set, 265 USER, 287 Symbol Set Print, 268 Power Stacker, ADVANCED USER Perforation Skip, PCL-II Emulation, 266 menu, 284 PGL SFCC, 77, 133 POWER SUPPLY HOT * message, 337 PI Control, 163 Power Up ^ F, 154 Host PI, 164 Power Up ^ X, 154 Max PI 16, 164 Power Up ^PY, 154 Printer PI, 163 Powering on the printer, 27 Power-on S-Mode, 143 PI Ignored Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 92 Power-Up Config, 81 Dataproducts (Standard & Long Lines) Power-Up Config., 83 submenu, 95 Power-Up State, MAINT/MISC menu, 283 PI Slew Range, 134 PREV + NEXT key, 32 PLAT INV CMD * message, 336 PREV or NEXT key, 32 PLAT INV PARM * message, 336 Primary Char. Set, PCL-II Emulation, 265 PLAT INV STATE * message, 336 Prime Signal PLEASE WAIT...RESET IN PROGRESS Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 93 message, 337 Dataproducts (Standard & Long Lines) Plot Mode Opt, LG Emulation, 275 PMD (Paper Motion Detection) Fault, ADVANCED USER, 283 submenu, 96 IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 89 Poll Character, Serial submenu, 104 391 Index Prime, Centronics Parallel Interface Ribbon Action, 288 Signals, 297 Ribbon End Point, 277 Print Char. Set, 217 Tear Bar Dist. (Distance), 279 Print Config., 83 Unidirectional, 279 Print IPDS Fonts, IPDS Emulation, 262 PRINTER HOT * message, 337 Print job, cancel, 52 Printer interfaces, 293 Print Mode Opt, LG Emulation, 274 Printer PI, 163 Print Quality, 143, 157 Printer PI Line, 142 optimizing, 68 Print speed, optimizing, 69 Printer Protocol, 77, 213 Printer Select Print Statistics, DIAGNOSTICS, 292 ANSI Emulation menu, 254 Printer Epson FX Emulation, 242 component locations, 26 control panel, 28 Printer Tests, DIAGNOSTICS, 290 dimensions, 23, 348 Printer Type, SPC Type, 207 exterior cleaning, 311 PRINTER UNDER REMOTE CONTROL features, 13 message, 337 interior cleaning, 312 Printing rates, 351 maintenance, 17 Printing, Hex Dump, 315 models, 13 PrintNet Enterprise, consumable operating modes, 27 monitoring, 17 powering on, 27 Private Mode, ANSI Emulation menu, 255 site requirements, 22 Proprinter XL Character Set menu, 239 weight, 348 PRINTER CONTROL menu, 276 Accented Char, 280 LG, 240 PCL-II, 240 Proprinter XL Emulation, 236 Bar Code Quality, 279 20 CPI Condensed, 238 Display Language, 280 Alt. Char Set, 238 Eject Function, 277 Auto LF, 237 Ink Saver Mode, 289 Character Set, 237 Open Platen @ BOF Define CR Code, 236 (Bottom of Form), 278 392 Serial Matrix Emulation, 234 Index Define LF Code, 237 FF Valid at TOF, 237 P-Series XQ Emulation, 228 Auto LF, 229 Protect Configs., 83 Compressed Print, 230 PROTECTED INSTR * message, 338 Control Code 06, 228 PRT CONFIG key, 30 Define CR Code, 229 Prt Partial Line, 171, 182 Define LF Code, 229 3270 Params menu, 189 Elong/Alt. Font, 230 5250 Params menu, 198 HS Print (High Speed Print), 230 Prt to Emulate, 164 Slew Relative, 231 P-Series Character Set menu, 225 Upr. Case Select, 231 LG, 227 PCL-II, 226 VFU Select, 230 PTX Linefeed, PCL-II Emulation, 267 PSeries Dbl High, 224 PTX Setup Option, MAINT/MISC P-Series Emulation, 219, 220, 221 menu, 282 Alt. Set 80-9F, 223 PTX Transparent, 173, 183 Auto LF, 222 3270 Params menu, 190 Character Set, 224 5250 Params menu, 198 Control Code 06, 221 Alt. Set 80-9F, 174, 183 Control Code 08, 221 Lead-in Chars, 173, 183 Define CR Code, 222 Usr Defined HTRN, 174, 183 Define LF Code, 222 PUM Default, ANSI Emulation menu, 256 FF Valid at TOF, 224 Pwr Save Control, ADVANCED USER, 287 LG, 221 PWRSUPP VOLT * message, 338 Overstrike, 222 Q PCL-II, 220 PSeries Dbl High, 224 P-Series SFCC, 223 SFCC d Command, 224 VFU Select, 223 P-Series SFCC, 78, 223 QUEUE OVERRUN* message, 338 QUICK SETUP menu Active IGP Emulation, 77 Adapter Address, 75 Device ID, 75 Ethernet Address, 76 Form Length, 77, 79 Form Width, 77, 79 393 Index Requirements Horiz Forms, 80 Host Interface, 75 printer site, 22 Margins, 78 Max Line Width, 80 Reset Cfg Names, 84 Page Length Rep, 80 Reset Cmd CFG Ld, 218 ANSI Emulation menu, 254 PGL SFCC, 77 Power-Up Config, 81 Reset Cmd CFG Ld, PCL-II Emulation, 268 Printer Protocol, 77 Reset Kerberos Password, WLAN P-Series SFCC, 78 Kerberos menu, 122 Ribbon End Point, 80 Reset LEAP Password, WLAN LEAP Save Config, 81 menu, 124 Select CPI, 78 Reset LEAP User, WLAN LEAP menu, 124 Select LPI, 78 Resistor configurations, terminating, 302 Vert Forms, 79 Resistors WLAN Address, 76 R RBN AT END POINT message, 339 RBN SENSOR ERROR message, 338 Ready, Dataproducts Parallel Interface Signals, 295 Receive Data (RD), RS-232, 305 Received CR, ANSI Emulation menu, 255 Received DEL, ANSI Emulation menu, 255 Reload paper, 34 REMOVE USED SPX message, 338 Renew Lifetime, WLAN Kerberos menu, 123 Report Status, Auto Switching submenu, 88 Request to Send RS-232, 305 Serial submenu, 103 394 power, 21 installation, 303 removal, 303 Resp. Polarity Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 92 Dataproducts (Standard & Long Lines), 95 RESTORING BOOT CODE message, 338 RIB INVLD CMD* message, 338 RIB INVLD STATE* message, 339 Ribbon Action, PRINTER CONTROL, 288 RIBBON DRIVE message, 339 Ribbon End Point, 80 Ribbon End Point, PRINTER CONTROL, 277 Ribbon Flipping, 16 Ribbon Log, 16 RIBBON NOT RECOGNIZED message, 339 Index RIBBON STALL message, 339 SENDING PROGRAM TO EC RIBBON UNDER 2% message, 339 PROCESSOR message, 340 Ribbons, changing, 49 Serial Interfaces Rot. Char Size, 156 RS-232, 304 RS-232, 305 RS-422, 304 Clear to Send (CTS), 306 Serial Matrix Character Set menu, 235 Data Carrier Detect (DCD), 306 Serial Matrix Emulation, 232 Data Set Ready (DSR), 306 Alt. Set 80-9F, 234 Data Terminal Ready (DTR), 306 Auto LF, 233 Receive Data (RD), 305 Character Set, 234 Request to Send (RTS), 305 Control Code 06, 232 Transmit Data (TD), 305 Define CR Code, 233 RS-232 Serial Interfaces, 304 Define LF Code, 233 RS-422, 306 ESC d command, 234 RS-422 Serial Interfaces, 304 Overstrike, 233 S Save Config, 81, 83 Save, Auto, 60 Saving new configurations, 61 Saving parameter settings, 54 Scalable Size, 142 SCS Buffer Cntrl, 173 SCS COMMAND ERROR message, 339 Second Char. Set, PCL-II Emulation, 265 SECURITY KEY NOT DETECTED message, 340 SECURITY VIOLATION message, 339 Select CPI, 78 Select Font, 134 Select LPI, 78, 135 Printer Select, 234 Serial submenu, 98 Baud Rate, 102 Buffer Size in K, 104 Data Protocol, 99 Data Term Ready, 103 Framing Errors, 105 Idle Response, 104 Interface Type, 99 One Char Enquiry, 105 Parity, 102 Poll Character, 104 Poll Response, 104 Request to Send, 103 Stop Bits 1, 102 Word Length, 102 Select SO Char, 138 395 Index Set Lock Key, ADVANCED USER Slow Paper Slew, ADVANCED USER menu, 288 menu, 286 Set Sharing, ADVANCED USER SOFTWARE ERROR* CYCLE POWER menu, 285 message, 341 Set Text Orientn, 174, 185 SPC Char Set, SPC Type, 208 3270 Params menu, 191 SPC Coax Params, 202 5250 Params menu, 200 Buffer Print, 203 SET TOF key, 30 Buffer Reprint, 204 SFCC & Pwrup, 154 Column 132 Wrap, 203 Power Up ^ F, 154 Image Buf Size, 202 Power Up ^ PY, 154 Intervention Req, 203 Power Up ^ X, 154 Logical Buf Size, 202 VGL SFCC, 154 NL At MPP+1, 205 SFCC Char, SPC Type, 207 PA1, 204 SFCC d Command, 224 PA2, 204 SHUTL INV CMD * message, 340 SPC Null Supp, 204 SHUTL INV PARM * message, 340 SPC Space Supp, 205 SHUTL OVR SPEED* message, 340 Translation Tbl, 203 SHUTTLE JAM message, 340 Usr Defined HTRN, 203 SHUTTLE STALL message, 341 SPC Null Supp, 204 Shuttle Timeout, ADVANCED USER SPC Space Supp, 205 menu, 286 SPC Twx Params, 206, 207 Signals Buffer Print, 208 Centronics Parallel Interface, 297 SPC Type, 207 Dataproducts Parallel Interface, 295 Translation Tbl, 208 IEEE 1284 Parallel Interface, 299 SPC Type, 207 Simple Prot Conv, 168 EVFU, 208 Site requirements, 22 Printer Type, 207 Skip Cmd Prefix, 135 SFCC Char, 207 Slash 0, 134, 155 SPC Char Set, 208 Slew Relative, P-Series XQ Emulation, 231 Usr Defined HTRN, 207 Special information, 18 396 Index T Specifications interfaces, 351 TABLE MISMATCH DOWNLOAD AGAIN label, 347 message, 342 paper, 346 TCB CORRUPTED* message, 342 Speed print, 351 TCP PORT BUSY message, 342 SPX FOUND, ERROR KEY NOT Tear Bar Dist. (Distance), PRINTER DETECTED message, 341 CONTROL, 279 SPX NOT NEEDED OPTIONS ENABLED Technical support, 20 message, 341 Terminating resistor configurations, 302 STACK FAULT message, 342 Test Width, DIAGNOSTICS, 289 STACK OVERFLOW* message, 341 Ticket Lifetime, WLAN Kerberos menu, 122 STACK UNDERFLOW* message, 341 Timeout, Auto Switching submenu, 88 STACKER FULL message, 342 TOF Action STACKER JAM message, 342 Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 93 Standard, CTHI, 167 Dataproducts (Standard & Long Lines) Stop Bits 1, Serial submenu, 102 Submenu IGP/PGL, 129 submenu, 96 IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 89 IGP/PGL with LG, 132 Translate Table, 178 IGP/PGL with PCL-II, 131 Translation Tbl, 171, 203 IGP/VGL, 148 3270 Params menu, 189 IGP/VGL with LG, 152 5250 Params menu, 197 IGP/VGL with PCL-II, 150 SPC Twx Params, 208 Subnet mask Adapter Address menu, 109 Transmit Data (TD), RS-232, 305 Trickle Time Ethernet Address menu, 114 Centronics (Parallel) submenu, 93 WLAN Address menu, 118 Dataproducts (Standard & Long Lines) Support, technical, 20 Symbol Set Print, PCL-II Emulation, 268 System Memory, DIAGNOSTICS, 291 submenu, 96 IEEE 1284 Parallel (Bidirectional) Submenu, 89 Trickle Time, Auto Switching submenu, 87 True Form Slew, 142 397 Index True Vert 1/10, 156 UP DRV. SHORT* message, 343 Trunc Dyn Data, 143 UP or DOWN key, 31 Truncate Alpha, 155 UPC Descenders, 137, 156 Truncate PI Slew, ANSI Emulation Upr. Case Select, P-Series XQ menu, 256 Emulation, 231 Twinax Params menu, 180 User-Def Ratio, 139 5225 World Trade, 182 Usr Defined HTRN, 174, 203 Active Char Set, 181 Usr Defined HTRN, PTX Transparent, 183 Buffer Print, 186 Usr Defined HTRN, SPC Type, 207 Cancel IGP/DCU, 182 V Char Set Select, 181 Device Address, 182 Var Form Adjust, 139 Var Form Type, 140 Device ID, 182 Format Control, 186 Graphic Chek Cod, 184 Graphic Chek Err, 184 Host Override, 185 LAC Approx., 185 LAC Option, 184 Max. Print Width, 186 Prt Partial Line, 182 Vert Forms, 79 Vert Forms, LG Emulation, 271 VFU Select, 223 VFU Select, P-Series XQ Emulation, 230 VGL SFCC, 154 VIEW/EJECT key, 29 Voltage, 350 VPA Check, IPDS Emulation, 262 PTX Transparent, 183 Set Text Orientn, 185 U UNDEF INTERRUPT* message, 343 UNDFNED OPCODE* message, 343 Unidirectional, PRINTER CONTROL, 279 UNKNOWN RBN1 message, 343 UNKNOWN RBN2 message, 343 Unload paper, 45 Unsolicited Rpt, LG Emulation, 274 UP + DOWN key, 31 398 W WAITING FOR ETHERNET ADAPTER message, 343 Warnings, 18 Weight, printer, 348 Width Limit, 159 WLAN Address, 76 WLAN ADDRESS menu, 117 DHCP, 118 Gateway address, 118 IP address, 117 Index MAC address, 118 Subnet mask, 118 WLAN Kerberos menu Clock Skew, 122 KDC Port Number, 122 Kerberos Enable, 121 Kerberos Password, 122 Renew Lifetime, 123 Reset Kerberos Password, 122 Ticket Lifetime, 122 WLAN LEAP menu Auth Method, 123 LEAP Password, 124 LEAP Username, 124 Reset LEAP Password, 124 Reset LEAP User, 124 WLAN PARAMETERS menu ASCII data port, 120 IPDS Data Port, 120 Keep alive timer, 120 NetBIOS protocol, 119 WLAN PARAMS menu, 119 Word Length, Serial submenu, 102 399 Index 400 For technical assistance, contact your Distributor/VAR/Reseller for service. For further assistance, contact the Printronix Customer Support Center. Printronix Customer Support Center Americas (714) 368-2686 Europe, Middle East, and Africa (31) 24 6489 410 Asia Pacific (65) 65484114 Web site: http://www.printronix.com/public/servicessupport/default.aspx Printronix Supplier Center Americas (800) 733-1900 Europe, Middle East, and Africa (33) 1 46 25 1900 Asia Pacific (65) 65484116 or (65) 65484182 Web site: http://www.printronix.com/public/supplies/default.aspx Printronix, Inc. 14600 Myford Road P.O. Box 19559 Irvine, CA92623-9559 Phone: 714-368-2300 Fax: 714-368-2600 Printronix Schweiz Gmbh 42 Changi South Street 1 Changi South Industrial Estate Singapore 486763 Phone: 65-6542-0110 Fax: 65-6543-0220 Printronix, Inc. Nederland BV P.O. Box 163 Nieuweweg 283 NI-6600 Ad Wijchen The Netherlands Phone: 31-24-6489-489 Fax: 31-24-6489499 Or visit the Printronix web site at www.printronix.com *178660-001* 178660-001A
advertisement